KR20080038462A - Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters from keypad - Google Patents

Abstract

A device and a method for inputting alphabets in a keypad are provided to enable a user to input Korean character without ambiguity in the minimum key strokes by using the simplest key arrangement. Various characters including consonants and vowels are simply inputted in a keypad of an electronic device having the small number of keys by combining long time push of a predetermined button and repeated push of a control button. Key arrangement of the keypad includes three basic vowel keys, which include 'a', 'i', and 'u', basic consonant keys, and the control key.

Description

Alphabet input device in keypad and method thereof {APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INPUTTING ALPHABET CHARACTERS FROM KEYPAD}

Figure 1-1. Example of configuring standard keypad using English standard keypad

Figure 1-2. When assigning approximately three alphabets to each button, the alphabet in the center is designated as the representative alphabet, and the left and right alphabets are composed of subsequent alphabets with subsequent alphabets.

Figure 1-3. An example of configuring the standard keypad when assigning three to four alphabets to each button

Figure 2-1. Example of configuring a subsequent Japanese keypad (1)

Figure 2-2. Example of configuring the subsequent keypad in Japanese (2)

Figure 2-3. Graph of 2D Recycling Control Processing Method

Figure 2-4. Graph of two-dimensional cross control processing method

Figure 3-1. Example of configuring subsequent keypad (in Arabic)

Figure 3-2. Example of configuring a subsequent keypad (in Arabic, using two control buttons)

Figure 3-3. When assigning approximately three alphabets to each button, the alphabet in the center is designated as the representative alphabet, and the left and right alphabets are composed of subsequent alphabets with subsequent alphabets.

Figure 4-1. Example of assigning a basic consonant and a basic vowel to each button 1 (English)

Figure 4-2. Example of assigning a basic consonant and a basic vowel to each button in pairs 2 (English)

Figure 4-3. Example of assigning a basic consonant and a basic vowel to each button 3 (English)

Figure 4-4. Flowchart for inputting the basic consonant and the basic vowel by repeated selection method (Korean example)

Figure 4-5. Example of applying 3 collection elements

Figure 4-6. Example of solving Figure 4-5 from the perspective of applying the iterative selection method using four vowel elements

Figures 4-7. Example of assigning four collection elements to four buttons

Figures 4-8. Example of solving Figure 4-7 expressed in terms of application of the iterative selection method

Figures 4-9. Modified display example of Figure 4-5

Figure 4-10. Example using modern Korean vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ"

Figures 4-11. 6 modified display example

Figures 4-12. Modified display case of Fig. 4-10 ("+" type)

Figure 4-13. Modified display example of Fig. 4-10 ("-ㅏ" type)

Figures 4-14. Modified display example of Fig. 4-10 ("H" type)

Figures 4-15. Modified display example of Fig. 4-10 ("ㅏㅓ" type)

Figures 4-16. Example of transforming 4 rows of buttons into 1 row on a 3 * 4 keypad (1)

Figure 4-17. Example of transforming four rows of buttons into one row on a 3 * 4 keypad (2)

Figures 4-18. Examples using modern Korean vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ"

Figure 4-19. Modified display example of Figure 4-12

Figures 4-20. Examples of combining vowels using modern Korean vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ" and "ㅣ" (graph)

Figure 4-21. A Case of Combining Vowels Using Modern Korean Vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ" (Graph 2)

Figure 4-22. Flowchart of Keypad Korean Input Processing

Figure 4-23. Flowchart of Korean Input Processing on a 2-Ball Keyboard

Figure 4-24. Flowchart of Keypad Korean Input Process (When Repeat Method is applied to Consonant Input)

Figures 4-25. Flowchart of keypad Korean input process (when specific button combination is applied to consonant input)

Figure 4-26. Flowchart of Keypad Korean Input Process (General)

Figure 4-27. Flowchart of keypad Korean input processing (added when applying character completion button)

Figure 5-1. Input of Chinese characters using Pinyin Dictionary and Pinyin

Figure 5-2. English Text Input Example Using Totally Associative Simple Code

Figure 5-3. Case of processing input value as promised simple code in parallel input method (1)

Figure 5-4. Case of processing input value as promised simple code in parallel input method (2)

Figure 5-5. Application example of parallel input method through client and server

Figure 5-6. Grouping of phrases (words or phrases) stored in the index

Figure 6-1. A case in which a simple code received from a client is interpreted by a server (intermediation server), and the information obtained by interpreting the simple code is transmitted to a third server that needs the information.

Figure 7-1. An example of the subsequent keypad that can input various symbols by the control processing method (English keypad)

Figure 7-2. An example of the subsequent keypad that can input various symbols by the control processing method (Korean keypad)

Figure 8-1. 3 * 4 Case of existing mobile phone with various function buttons on top of numeric keypad

Figure 8-2. 3 * 4 Case 1 with various function buttons arranged under the numeric keypad

Figure 8-3. 3 * 4 Case 2 with various function buttons on the bottom of numeric keypad

Figure 8-4. 3 * 4 Numeric Keypad Case for Arrangement of Various Function Buttons

Figure 8-5. Case 1 using various function buttons as control buttons

Figure 8-6. Example 2 using various function buttons as control buttons

Figures 8-7. Example 3 using various function buttons as control buttons

Figure 8-8. Example 4 using various function buttons as control buttons

Figure 9-1. When the up / down / left / right movement button is used as an accel / decrease button, the function corresponding to each button is iconized and displayed on the LCD.

Figure 9-2. Example of symbolizing icons related to each number buttons and displaying them on the LCD

10-1 to 10-4. A Case of the Alphabet Consisting Separation Keypad in the Roman Alphabet

Figure 10-5. A case of the shortcut input method in the consonant separation keypad and the case of processing the input value as the promised simple code in the parallel input method

Figure 10-6. A Case Study of the Alphabetic Separation Keypad in the Roman Alphabet

Figures 10-7. Flowchart of Language Constraints Input Method in the Consonant Separation Keypad (1)

Figure 10-8. Flowchart of Language Constraints Input Method in the Consonant Separation Keypad (2)

Figure 10-9. Flowchart of Language Constraints Input Method on Incomplete Vowel Separation Keypad

Figure 10-10. Application of Parallel Input Method (In a System with All Words) (1)

Figures 10-11. Application of Parallel Input Method (In a System with All Words) (2)

Figures 10-12. (In a system with all words) Application Flow of Parallel Input Method (1)

Figures 10-13. Flowchart of applying the language restriction parallel input method (in a system with all words) (2)

10-14. Application of Full Input Method (and Parallel Input Method) to Full Code in System

10-15. Cases of parallel input method application in systems with indexes of words (words or phrases) consisting only of representative alphabets (1)

10-16. (2) Cases of application of parallel input method in system with index of phrase (word or phrase) consisting of representative alphabet only (2)

Figures 10-17. Example of processing recommended sound as a simple code (shortened input value)

Figure 11-1. Example of system configuration when input values are interpreted on the client side

Figure 11-2. System configuration example when input values are interpreted on the server side

Figures 11-3 through 11-10. Example of simple code processing (in parallel input method)

Figure 11-11. Example of simple code (ie short code or short input value) type

Figure 12-1. Example of inputting functions by control processing method

Figure 12-2. Example of displaying the control assigned to each button on the LCD screen

Figures 13-1 to 13-4. Example of processing part of input value as full code and other part as simple code

Figures 14-1 to 14-2. Example of control method using long press

Figure 14-3. Example using long press and short press

Figure 14-4. Short press followed by long press

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to an alphabet input device and method thereof in a keypad, and more particularly, to an alphabet input device and a method thereof in a keypad having a small number of keys such as a telephone keypad.

With the development of mobile communication, a function of transmitting and receiving digital information such as text has been added to a voice call-oriented portable terminal. Therefore, at the beginning, the keypad provided in the portable terminal for the purpose of inputting a telephone number also included means for inputting characters. However, since the size of the keypad used as an input means of the portable terminal becomes smaller, the number of buttons included in the keypad has its limit. On the other hand, the alphabet of each language greatly exceeds the number of twelve keys included in the keypad. Therefore, in order to input one alphabet using the telephone keypad, the alphabet should be represented by combining one or two buttons on the keypad.

In summary, the invention as presented in the applicant's prior application (Application Nos. 10-2000-0031879 and PCT / KR00 / 00601) is as follows.

First, according to the "partial whole selection method", a predetermined number of grids are formed in a form corresponding to the arrangement of all buttons in the keypad to each button on the keypad, and the alphabets are arranged in the grids, and the alphabet (the "target" The desired alphabet is inputted by combining the first button and the second button on the keypad corresponding to the arrangement position of the alphabet in the grids of the first button. For example, in Figure 1-1, "A = [1] + [2].

Among the grids of buttons, some grids including the first grid and the second button is the same, and some grids are used, but the convenience of the combination of the first and second buttons is high. The use of an ordered grid first was central to the partial partial selection method. The key to the partial full selection method is the reference grid, and the keypad that can utilize the concept of the reference grid is named "reference keypad".

Next, the standard repeat selection method is the number of pushes of the buttons in the order of close proximity to the reference grid from the alphabet of the reference grid position on the reference keypad configured to apply the partial partial selection method. According to the method, the alphabet was selected. The standard repetition selection method is to apply the repetitive selection method on the standard keypad. The dedicated keypad selection method is named "simple keypad" and for convenience, the repetitive selection method is applied on the simple keypad as it is used for convenience. I called the simple repetition selection method.

There was a "control method", which included "subscript control method" and "follow-up control method". The subscript control method was a method of inputting a modified alphabet by combining a subscript control and a basic alphabet when inputting a modified alphabet consisting of a subscript and a basic alphabet. Subsequent control processing method sets a group of alphabets assigned to a button in the relation between representative alphabet and subsequent alphabet, and inputs subsequent alphabet by combining sub alphabets attached to representative alphabet and representative alphabet when inputting alphabet afterward. It was to make it possible. For example, in FIG. 4-1, it can be entered as "ㅋ = ㄱ + [*]".

Subscript control and subsequent alphabet control processing are essentially similar and subsequent control processing is considered more general. In the case of subscript control processing, it is considered that the modified alphabet is attached to the basic alphabet in a certain alphabet group in a certain order. In the case of the superscript control process, since the modified alphabet can be divided into subscripts and basic alphabets, the alphabet group has a strong association in its shape, and the subsequent control has a strong association in the order or pronunciation. If it is.

The advantage of applying the control treatment method is that it is possible to simplify the arrangement of the keypad by not displaying the subsequent alphabet (or modified alphabet) on the keypad through the relationship between the basic alphabet and the subsequent alphabet (or modified alphabet). In addition, the control process allowed the alphabets to be entered without ambiguity. The simplified keypad, excluding the subsequent alphabet, was referred to as "sequence keypad", and the simplified keypad, excluding the modified alphabet, was called "simplified keypad", and the combination of the two was called "simplified keypad". Keypads that display all subsequent alphabets (or modified alphabets) were referred to as "full display pads" in contrast to simplified keypads.

In addition, it is possible to input subsequent alphabets (or modified alphabetes) through the control method in the entire display pad.On the contrary, in the simplified keypad, users who remember the layout of the entire display pad can use the input method in the entire display pad. It was. Thus, one of the characteristics of the previous application was the compatibility of inputting the following alphabet through the control method according to the user's convenience in the entire display pad by expanding the simplified keypad.

One of the effects of applying the control treatment is, in addition to the effect of eliminating ambiguity, "hidden" without displaying the subsequent alphabet on the keypad through the association of the representative alphabet with the subsequent alphabet, as shown in the earlier application. By doing so, the keypad can be simplified. This is called "hidden control method" for convenience. However, as mentioned in the earlier application, subsequent alphanumeric characters (or modified alphanumeric characters) may also be entered through the control method in the entire display pad where the keypad is displayed. This is called "non-hidden control method" for convenience.

Since it is essential to give a specific example in view of the characteristics of the present invention, the details will be described through the embodiment.

First, the contents of the application for each language are supplemented as follows. It is obvious that any of the contents mentioned below in one language can be applied to another language without being specifically mentioned in the other language.

1. Common Supplements

1.1 Scope of application of the keypad in the present application and the present invention

It is apparent that the keypad disclosed in the present application and the present invention can be applied to all fields in the form of telephone keyboard, such as a keypad or door lock configured by software on a numeric keypad of a mobile terminal or a standard keyboard or a screen. In addition, although the numeric keypad provided on the standard keyboard has a different arrangement of the keypad and the numeric buttons presented in the earlier application and the present invention, it is obvious that the arrangement on the keypad button of the prior application and the present invention can be applied to the keypad provided in the keyboard. . For example, in the present application and in the present invention, the alphabet disposed on the [1] button is placed on the [1] button of the numeric keypad provided on the keyboard, and the same way as described below, the alphabet input, utilization of simple codes and various codes It can be used for memorization.

1.2 Setting the Delay Time and Its Delay Time

In languages where consonants and vowels appear alternately, such as Korean and Hindi, a pair of representative consonants and vowels are assigned to each button, and one consonant is selected with two vowels. For example, if the algorithm is implemented to recognize the same button two strokes input within the interval of 0.1 second) as a vowel, it can be efficiently implemented while reducing the objection to the user. This delay time should be determined in consideration of the time interval that is commonly pressed for a certain time when the same button is continuously pressed. This delay time is referred to as " hit delay time " for convenience. In addition, it can be implemented to recognize two consonants of the same button 2 input more than a certain delay time (for example, 1 second) interval. This delay time is called "this other delay time" for convenience. This can be applied even when the same button is pressed three or more times.

For example, in Fig. 4-1 or Fig. 4-2, if [1] + [1] is input with a delay time of 0.08 seconds, it is first recognized as a vowel “ㅗ”, and if it is 1.1 second delay time. If it is input with, it is recognized as two consonants ("a", "a") first. If it is input with a time delay of 0.5 seconds, it is possible to determine whether one vowel or two consonants are input through the consonants and the appearance structure of the vowels. In addition, even when a delay time of 0.08 sec or 1.1 sec is input, it is possible to finally determine whether one vowel is input or two consonants are input through the structure of the consonants and vowels of the language.

In the past, only one time interval (for example, one second) was set, and if the same button was continuously input within the corresponding time, two strokes were consecutively recognized. . The difference is that the time delay value (eg 0.1 second) judged by two strokes is different from the time delay value (eg 1 second) judged by one stroke.

In general, it is considered that the repetition selection method is superior in terms of convenience of input among the partial partial selection method and the repetitive selection method of the prior application. Therefore, this means that the ambiguity can be largely avoided by using the structure of a specific language in which consonants and vowels alternate, while taking advantage of the repeated selection method (simplification and convenience of input rules). By setting the and delay time differently and allowing the user to specify, there is an advantage that the implementation of the algorithm can be simplified.

1.3 Chain Control Method

In the previous application, the subscript control method is essentially the same as the subsequent control method, and the subsequent control method is the more general method. In other words, in the Korean example of the previous application, the relationship between a, ㅋ, and 설명 was explained as the relation between the representative alphabet and the modified alphabet, and it was explained as ㅋ = a + {beep}, ㄲ = a + {beep}, but (a) This is because the result is the same even if it is placed in the relation between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet such as ㅋ (2nd) and ㄲ (3rd).

In the Japanese of Fig. 2-1, the input example by the subsequent control processing method is shown again as follows.あ (represented alphabet), い (2nd), う (3rd), え (4th), お (5th) as shown below, and select あ by [1] button 1 (あ = [1]), 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th controls can be placed on any control button (ex. [*]) And repeatedly selected according to the number of button presses. You can enter For convenience, the control is selected with braces. For example, when applying post-control input, あ = [1], い = あ + {2nd} = [1] + [*], う = あ + {3rd} = [1] + [*] + [*], え = あ + {4th} = [1] + [*] + [*] + [*], お = あ + {5th} = [1] + [ *] + [*] + [*] + [*]

Here again, the relationship between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet, such as あ (representative alphabet), い (2nd), う (3rd), え (4th), お (5th), place the follow-up control on the control button and select the repetition. Instead of selecting the method, you can select the "sequential" or "next" control by pressing a specific control button (eg [*]) once, and then enter the second alphabet following (eg い). And "next control" (ie い = あ + {next} = あ + [*]), and enter the 3rd succeeding alphabet え for the 3rd succeeding alphabet. The new representative alphabet can be considered as the second representative alphabet and can be entered in combination with the second subsequent alphabet and the "next control". That is, う = い + {next} = [1] + [*] + [*]. Likewise, if you enter the fourth alphabet after え, the preceding alphabet (third alphabet after) is regarded as the new representative alphabet for the fourth alphabet after (the third generation alphabet) and when you enter え = う + {next} = You can enter [1] + [*] + [*] + [*]. The same applies to the fifth successor alphabet.

This result is the same result of inputting a combination of representative alphabet and subordinate control while placing subordinated controls (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, ...) on the control button and selecting them by repeat selection method. to be. Here, if the first representative alphabet あ can be selected without ambiguity, it is easy to see that the second successive alphabet い can be entered without ambiguity, and the same is true for the remaining subsequent alphabets. That is, え = い + {next} = [1] + [*] + [*], where い can be entered without ambiguity, and い is also combined with "next control", resulting in subsequent alphabets without ambiguity. You can enter え.

In this relation between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet, it is assumed that only one "next" control is provided without a subordinate control on the control button. The method of inputting a combination of controls is called "chain-type follow-up control method" for convenience. Even if the subordinate control does not display the subordinate control on the subsequent control button, the elector wants to know that a particular button is the subsequent control button. Even if it is displayed on the button, the display can be simplified. In the present invention, since the results of the "follow-up control processing method" and "chain-type subsequent control processing method" described in the prior application are the same, it is used interchangeably.

1.4 Skip Control Action

In the superscript control method, it is shown that the combination of .. and e can be entered in inputting the modified alphabet ё consisting of ".. + e". Alternatively, you could enter e as the base alphabet and the rest of the appended alphabets, which are related in shape or rank, as a follow-up alphabet, and enter them as a combination of sub-orders and base alphabets (e.g. e (basic alphabet), ^/ e (2nd), ^{^} e (3rd),... In addition, the control buttons that can be placed only in combination with the alphabet (that is, a specific number button) can be used to enter a modified alphabet or a subsequent alphabet without ambiguity.

For the Roman alphabet, 11 variants of the alphabet ( ^/ e, ^{^} e, `e, ё,` a, ^{^} a, ^{^} i, `u, <sup>^</sup> u, c, <sup>^</sup> o) are used and are used for the variant alphabet. There are 5 kinds of dot (/, ^, `, .., s). If the selection order of subscript control is /, ^, `, .., s, you should input <sup>^</sup> a = a + [*] + [*]. However, in French, the alphabet a can only combine two subscripts, "` "and" ^ ", so that the subscript" / "cannot be appended, and if it is skipped to allow the subscript" ^ "to be selected, ^{^} a = a + [*]. This is called "skip control processing" for convenience. In other words, this is the same as entering a trailing alphabet (or variant alphabet) as a control method, with the sub-categories of subsequent alphabets such as a (basic alphabet), `a (2nd), ^{^} a (3rd).

Similarly, in Japanese, the only long lines are つ of the alphabets of line あ, や, and た, and the only lines of turbid sound are kan, さ, た, ほ, and semitones. It exists only in the alphabet of lines. As a result, it can be seen that there are two modified alphabets of long sound and tuck sound in the alphabet つ, and two modified alphabets of tuck sound and semi-tuck sound in the alphabet of row. Therefore, it is possible to press the subscript control button once when inputting the modified alphabet of the remaining alphabets except for the six alphabets in which the two modified alphabets exist. For example, if you set the control button to [*] button and apply post-control input, you can do ぁ = あ + [*], が = か + [*]. In the case of six alphabets in which two variant alphabets exist, the control can be selected in order of use of the modified alphabet when inputting the modified alphabet. For example, if you set the control button to [*] button and apply post-control input, っ = つ + [*], づ = つ + [*] + [*], ぼ = ほ + [ *], ぽ = ほ + [*] + [*] This means that in selecting controls, controls that cannot be combined with the default alphabet will not take effect. For example, even if が = か + [*], [*] can be treated as selecting a sound control rather than a long sound control, the basic alphabet 되는 combined with the control has no long sound, so the long sound control is not selected. This is because it skips over and selects the sound control.

The advantage of strict control selection is that it allows input of alphabets that are not actually used. For example, there is no alphabet with the subscript ".." in the French alphabet b, but it is possible to input such alphabets. There is no alphabet with a check mark in the Japanese alphabet あ, but such an alphabet cannot be entered. You can make it possible.

Even if the control is selected as a repetitive selection method, if the representative alphabet displayed on the keyboard can be entered without ambiguity (for example, if there is only one or several representative alphabets displayed on the keyboard) If no scheme is applied), the remaining subsequent alphabets can also be entered without ambiguity. This is because ambiguity is eliminated through the control process, because the control does not represent a specific alphabet by itself, but must be combined with another alphabet.

1.5 Input by control method of number and English alphabet

As presented in the previous application, it has been explained that the national alphabets can be arranged in the order of "closest to the reference grid", followed by the number and the English alphabet. It has been explained that national language alphabets and numbers can be selected. Likewise, in applying the subsequent control processing method, not only the local language alphabet belonging to a specific button, but also a number and an English alphabet (if it is not a Roman language) can be input through the subsequent control processing method.

Numbers or English alphabets may be placed in the alphabet following the national language. For convenience, in the case of Japanese, for example, あ (representative alphabet), い (2nd), う (3rd), え (4th), お (5th), 1 (6th),. (7th), q (8th), z (9th) can be placed. Also, if there are available buttons for controlling numbers or alphabets, the buttons for あ (represented alphabet), い (2nd), う (3rd), え (4th), お (5th) Button (e.g. [*] button), and another button (e.g. [#] button) as a number or button for English alphabet あ (representative alphabet), 1 (2nd),. (3rd), q (4th) and z (5th) can be entered so that numbers or English alphabets can be entered. For example, 1 = あ + [#] = [1] + [#],. = あ + [#] + [#] = [1] + [#] + [#], q = あ + [#] + [#] + [#] = [1] + [#] + [#] It becomes like + [#]. If a control button is available, you can set a separate control button for entering numbers and a control button for English alphabets.

This can be applied to other languages, and can also be applied to input of various symbols described later.

1.6 Grouping according to the pronunciation of the English alphabet

In constructing the keypad of each language in the previous application, in consideration of the application of the control processing method and the use for memorization, the alphabet is grouped into similar pronunciation groups and assigned to each numeric button. In the case of English, the method of assigning each group to each number button by grouping alphabets by 3 or 4 according to the dictionary order is widely used.However, it is possible to group and assign to each number button considering the similarity of pronunciation. . The following are some examples of English consonants grouped into nine groups according to the similarity of pronunciation.

B P / C S X / D T / F V H / G K Q / J Z / L R / M N / W Y

B P V / C S X / D T / F H / G K Q / J Z / L R / M W / N Y

The following is an example of grouping English consonants into eight groups.

B F P V / C G K Q / S X / D T / J Z / L R / M W H / N Y

B F P V / C G K Q / S X / D T / J Z / L R / M N / W Y H

Many variations are possible in addition to the above examples. Five vowels can be placed in groups of two. This can be convenient when applying the short input method using the simple code described later. In the case of a non-English language, in assigning the grouped English alphabet to each button, it can be assigned in consideration of similarity with the native language pronunciation group. For example, in Korean, the group G, K, and Q are assigned to a button assigned a similar letter "ㄱ". In Japanese, the G, K, and Q groups are assigned to buttons with similar alphabets “KA”. Therefore, even in the grouping of the English alphabet, it can be grouped considering the national language alphabet grouping of each language.

2. Supplements for Each Language

* In the following, the contents of the application is supplemented and developed for each language as follows. It is obvious that if the content described in one language supplement can be applied to another language, it can be applied in another language without special indication.

2.1 English

In the case of English, it is possible to enter alphabets other than the representative alphabet on the keyboard and input them through the control process, as in the previous application, the following alphabets can be entered through the control method on the entire display pad. In English, subsequent controls (2nd, 3rd) can be placed on the same control button (for example, the [#] button), or they can be placed separately from each other (for example, [*], [#] button). In the case of English, when ABC is placed on one button, if A is the representative alphabet, B and C are input through the subsequent control processing, and if B is the representative alphabet, A and C are each subsequent control. It is input through processing. As mentioned in the earlier filings, sub-categories of representative alphabets and subsequent alphabets may be determined in consideration of the frequency of use.

For example, in the A, B, and C groups, if A is the representative alphabet, the 2nd and 3rd controls are placed on the [*] button, and the control is applied, then B = A + {2nd} = [2] + [*] , C = A + {3rd} = [2] + [*] + [*] If B is the representative alphabet, the 2nd and 3rd controls are placed on the [*] and [#] buttons, respectively, and the control is applied, then A = B + {2nd} = [2] + [*], C = B + {3rd} = [2] + [#] 1-2 is an example in which the alphabets in the center of each group of alphabets are placed in the center with representative alphabets in the center, and subsequent alphabets are placed on the left and right sides, respectively. D = E + {2nd} = [3] + [*].

Thus, inputting only the representative alphabet as one button belonging to the representative alphabet and entering the remaining alphabet by the control processing method will be called "Control Processing Method Except Representative Chanracter" (CPMERC) for convenience.

In addition, when four alphabets of P, Q, R, and S are assigned to the [7] button, and four alphabets of W, X, Y, and Z are assigned to the [9] button, as indicated in the Korean embodiment of the earlier application, In addition, one of the four alphabets may be placed on a grid forming a top and bottom adjacent combination to apply the partial partial selection method. See Figure 1-3.

2.2 Japanese

In the case of Japanese in the previous application, the alphabet can be grouped on the basis of the 50th degree, and the subsequent control processing can be performed using the alphabets of the column (あ, か, さ,…) as the representative alphabet and the remaining alphabet as the subsequent alphabet. Said in the Election. In applying the sub-categories of subsequent alphabets given in the earlier application, the 50th note may be simply applied, as in the following table, almost similar to the earlier method 3. This can be user friendly with the simplicity of the subordinates. N can be treated as if it were attached to any representative alphabet, as in the previous application. Also, the empty space on the line Ya or W may be considered to be accompanied by a 50-character alphabet (eg, い, う, え) or ん.

Method of election Simple use of 50 notes Reference grid 2 ^nd 3rd 4th 5th Reference grid 2 ^nd 3rd 4th 5th あ い う え お あ い う え お か き く け こ か き く け こ さ し す せ そ さ し す せ そ た ち つ て と た ち つ て と な に ぬ ね の な に ぬ ね の は Hi ふ へ ほ は Hi ふ へ ほ ま み む め も ま み む め も や Yu よ や Yu よ ら り る れ ろ ら り る れ ろ W を ん W を

In the case of Japanese, the alphabet of the first stage, which can be regarded as the most representative for convenience in Japanese, was represented as the representative alphabet, which can also be represented by the alphabet of any stage, and the representative alphabet in each group. You can also In addition, in assigning the alphabet of each row to each button, as mentioned in the previous application, the row of buttons on the keypad is referred to ([1], [2], [3], [4],. ), Or you can assign columns to criteria ([3], [6], [9], [2], [5], ...). Similarly, you can assign them arbitrarily without assigning them by row or column.

In addition, in the Japanese example of the previous application, when "ん" is set to the reference grid position of the [0] button, and the [*] button and the [#] button have 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th controls, respectively, the [0] button In order to utilize as a control button for long sound / bass sound / semitone sound, it was assumed that "ん" is assigned to any number button instead of [0] button. In this case, however, the “N” may be placed at the reference grid position of the [0] button, and additionally, the long sound / taking / halftone sound control may be arranged in the order close to the reference grid, and the repeat selection method may be applied to the control selection. This is because "ん" does not appear consecutively in a single word. See Figure 2-1. The alphabets which do not appear consecutively are selected to the button 1 on which the alphabet is arranged, and the 2, 3,... Allowing other controls to be selected can also be applied to all other languages. This property is also utilized in the method using the vowel elements of Korean, which will be described later.

2.3 Arabic

There are 28 consonants in Arabic. Group the Arabic consonants that have the meaning of numbers in the previous application as follows and assign them to the keypad buttons, and place the alphabets having the meaning of the smallest number as the representative alphabet of each group at the position of the standard grid. The rest of the alphabets have been suggested to be placed on the keypad in the order of the order of the smaller numbers from the alphabet to the reference lattice (described in the earlier application). In addition, the previous application suggested a method of inputting the alphabet by the control process in the case of Japanese, Roman-based languages, Korean, Indian, and Arabic. In the case of the Arabic language, a method of processing subscripts was presented by considering vowels that are not used much as subscripts.

In this section, we will propose a method of controlling Arabic consonants. The following is an example of grouping Arabic consonants and assigning them to each button.

Among the alphabets with the meaning of 1, 10, and 100 assigned to the [1] button, the alphabet with the meaning of 1 can be displayed on the keypad with the representative alphabet, and the alphabet with the meaning of the remaining 10, 100 can be processed subsequently. have. Control buttons can use any button as in the previous application. If the 2nd and 3rd controls are placed using the [*] button for the subsequent control button, the average input stroke is 2 strokes for the consonant input. Since only one alphabet is placed per button, it is not necessary to select the partial full selection method when selecting the alphabet displayed on the button. Since the arrangement of the alphabet is conceptual, it may not be arranged on the keypad as described below.

Again, as in the Japanese case of the earlier filing, subsequent controls can be separated by other buttons. For example, if the 3rd control is distributed to the [#] button, the average input stroke is about 1.7 strokes ((1 + 2 + 2) / 3) and 28 consonants can be entered without ambiguity as suggested in the selection. do.

In this application, regardless of the frequency of use of the alphabet of each unit, the alphabet with a small meaning of each group as the representative alphabet of each group, and also in the rest of the alphabet, the example that allows you to select the alphabet with a small number of meaning first see. The control can be pre-input or post-input.

= [*] +

가 되고,

= [*] + [*] +

가 된다. 나머지 알파벳에 대해서도 동일하다. 이 경우 [#]버튼을 모음컨트롤처리를 위해 사용할 수도 있다. If all the following controls are placed in the [*] button, the alphabet of 1 unit is set as the representative alphabet, and the control button pre-input is applied when the 10 unit alphabet is selected.

= [*] +

Become,

= [*] + [*] +

Becomes The same is true for the rest of the alphabet. In this case, the [#] button can also be used for vowel control processing.

= [0] 이 된다. 1000의 의미를 가지는 알파벳을 1그룹알파벳으로 처리할 수도 있다. 이 경우

= [*]+[*]+[*]+

가 될 것이다. 혹은 1000의 의미를 가지 는 알파벳이 70의 의미를 가지는 알파벳(

)에 윗점이 붙은 형태이므로, 윗점컨 트롤을 각종 모음컨트롤에 앞서 선택되도록 하여 컨트롤처리하는 것도 가능하다. 즉 윗점컨트롤 선입력시

= [윗점컨트롤] +

로 입력할 수 있는 것이다. 윗점이 붙어 이루어진 다른 알파벳에도 이러한 윗점컨트롤처리를 다른 입력방법과 병행하여 허용할 수 있다. 이 경우 [0] 버튼을 다른 용도의 컨트롤버튼(예를 들 어 모음컨트롤버튼)으로 활용하는 것이 용이하게 된다. If only one alphabet with the meaning of 1000 is placed on the [0] button,

= [0]. The alphabet meaning 1000 can be treated as a group alphabet. in this case

= [*] + [*] + [*] +

Will be. Or an alphabet meaning 1000 means an alphabet meaning 70 (

), With the dot attached, it is also possible to control the dot control by selecting it before various collection controls. In other words, when inputting the point control

= [Point control] +

Can be entered. This dot control process can be allowed in parallel with other input methods in other alphabets with dot characters. In this case, it is easy to use the [0] button as a control button for another purpose (for example, a vowel control button).

= [#] +

가 된다. 이 경우도 선출 원의 일본어의 경우와 같이 입력시,

= [*] + [*] +

을 병행하여 허용 할 수 있다. 1000의 의미를 가지는 알파벳을 1그룹알파벳에 속하게 할 경우, 경 우

= [*]+[*]+[*]+

혹은

= [#]+[#]+

가 된다. 즉 [*] 버튼에 2nd, 3rd, 4th 컨트롤이 배치되어 있는 것으로 그리고 [#] 버튼에 3rd, 4th 컨트 롤이 배치되어 있는 것으로 생각하면 된다. 아랍인들이 우에서 좌로 가로쓰기를 하는 점을 고려하여, 즉 [#] 버튼에 2nd, 3rd, 4th 컨트롤을 배정하고, [*] 버튼 에 3rd, 4th 컨트롤을 배치하는 것도 가능하다. If you separate the control and use the 3rd control (here 100 unit control) with the [#] button, the alphabet means 200.

= [#] +

Becomes In this case, too, at the time of input as in the case of Japanese of elected origin,

= [*] + [*] +

Can be allowed in parallel. If the alphabet meaning 1000 belongs to the group 1 alphabet,

= [*] + [*] + [*] +

or

= [#] + [#] +

Becomes In other words, it is assumed that 2nd, 3rd, and 4th controls are arranged in the [*] button, and 3rd and 4th controls are arranged in the [#] button. Considering that the Arabs write horizontally from right to left, it is possible to assign 2nd, 3rd, and 4th controls to the [#] button, and to place 3rd and 4th controls on the [*] button.

In Arabic, this means that the common consonants of about 1.7 strokes can be entered without ambiguity, and that Arabs know the meaning of the numbers in their native alphabets. There is a great advantage in that the alphabet can be entered without displaying the unit alphabet (or representative alphabet). In other words, when applying the method in the present application through the keypad displayed only with numbers, which unit alphabet is the representative alphabet, which unit is the control button for which unit alphabet, and the subsequent control is one control button. If you use, you can enter most alphabets (Arabic consonants) needed in real life only by knowing the rules such as the order of selection of each subsequent control and preselection of control buttons.

As pointed out in the earlier filings, vowels can also be controlled. If both [#] and [*] are used for consonant control, an alphabet with a meaning of 1000 is assigned to the [0] button, as in the earlier Japanese. Instead of arranging it, it is placed in the [1] button for control processing, the [0] button can be designated as a control button for vowel processing, and the subscript type vowels (collection control and subscript control) can be selected. Likewise, the vowel control (subscript vowel) is selected according to the number of button presses in order of frequency of use. If only one [*] is used as the subsequent control button for consonants, you can use [#] as the vowel control button, or you can use both [#] and [0].

In the example of FIGS. 3-1 and 3-2, an alphabet (1 unit alphabet) having a meaning of 1 to 9 is represented as a representative alphabet of each group. However, the most frequently used alphabet in each group may be represented as a representative alphabet. . And to reduce confusion, the alphabet of any unit among 1 unit alphabet (alpha having a meaning of 1 to 9), 10 unit alphabet (alpha having a meaning of 10 to 90), and 100 unit alphabet (alpha having a meaning of 100 to 900) May be represented as a representative alphabet. Fig. 3-3 shows the 10-unit alphabet as the representative alphabet and puts the alphabet assigned to the left and right sides (100 unit alphabet, 1 unit alphabet) by using the control buttons assigned to the left and right by the control processing method. This is an example.

Likewise, the alphabet selected by the subsequent control may be the alphabet of each unit according to the frequency of use. For example, if 100 unit alphabet is the most frequently used, and this is the representative alphabet, then 1 unit alphabet is the most frequently used, you can enter a combination of 2nd control (that is, 1 unit control) and representative alphabet. The 10 unit alphabet can be entered by combining the 3rd control (ie 10 unit control) with the representative alphabet.

In the previous application, it is possible to input subsequent alphabets through the control processing method in the entire display pad. Likewise, it is possible to input consonants by the subsequent control processing method and input the vowel by the subscript control processing method in the keypad of the previous application. Do. In the 3 * 4 keypad, when the vowel subscript control button is set to the [0] button, it is possible to distribute the control buttons for consonant input to the [*] and [#] buttons.

2.4 English

2.4.1 Application of various controls

4-1 to 4-3 are a method of assigning a basic consonant and a basic vowel in Korean to each button, and inputting the basic consonant and the basic vowel displayed on the keypad by a repetitive selection method. In FIG. 4-1, the vowels, the horns, and the extended vowels are input by the control processing method. In FIG. 4-2, only the vowels and the horns are input by the control processing method. 4-3 illustrates an example of inputting a vowel, a horn, a basic vowel, and an extended vowel by a control processing method.

2.4.2 Program Implementation

4-4 are merely examples of flow charts for implementation and more efficient programming is possible. For example, if the consonant portion of the support in Figure 4-4, by checking whether the consonant that can achieve the double support, it is possible to implement a slightly more efficient.

The example of Korean presented in the previous application can be applied to other languages with similar features (a structure in which consonants and vowels alternate). In the case of other languages, the characteristics of the appearance of other languages should be reflected.

For example, if you want to construct a Hindi input system using a pair of basic consonants and basic vowels, it can be implemented similarly to the Korean language by reflecting the characteristics of Hindi. Simple rules make it easier to implement.

2.5 Hindi

In the Applicant's application, Hindi consonants are grouped into nine groups and assigned to the [1]-[9] buttons, so that the vowels assigned to the [0] buttons are selected with one [0] button. You can group them into groups of four and always have one consonant selected and ten vowels selected two. Vowels ___ (ri), which are not placed on the keypad and are not frequently used, can be processed by the control method. In grouping consonants into 10 groups, it is possible to group them in consideration of the similarity of pronunciation as suggested in the earlier application. An example of grouping into 10 groups is as follows.

And the first vowel ___ (a) in Hindi can be omitted between consonants and consonants. That is, consonants come out in succession. In this case, it is very easy to display "consonants + consonants" even if you enter "consonants + ___ (a) + consonants". Of course, it is also possible to input "consonant + consonant" directly, but in this case, the same representative consonants are selected in succession, which increases the possibility that two consonants can be recognized as one vowel. Therefore, both (automatic omission of the collection ___ (a) or user omission input) can be allowed.

2.6 Myanmar

There are 33 consonants in Myanmar: This can be grouped into 9 or 10 groups as in the example of Hindi, the representative alphabet can be set, and the remaining consonants can be input by the subsequent control method.

3. Multidimensional Intersection Control

Figure 2-2 is an example of assigning alphabets of the "A" column in alphabetical order to each button according to the above table. In the case of the previous application, the 4nd and 5rd controls could be additionally assigned to the control buttons assigned to the 2nd and 3rd controls.However, in order to minimize the number of input strokes and to make the most of the control buttons, the 2nd and 3rd controls are assigned. see.

The method of inputting subsequent alphabets in Fig. 2-2 is as shown in the previous application. For example, after control input, い = あ + [*]. Next, we will show how to input the alpha, bet, and half-tuck sounds of each alphabet. In FIG. 2-2, all of the buttons ([*] button and [#] button) available as control buttons are used as subsequent control buttons. Therefore, there is no control button for the modified alphabet. However, if the default alphabet of the target alphabet is a subsequent alphabet, the subsequent control button that is not used as a subsequent control button after inputting the subsequent alphabet can be used as a modified alphabet control button (referred to as the "An opposite control button"). Can be.

For example, ぃ = い + "opposite control buttons" = あ + [*] + [#], ご = こ + "opposite control buttons" = か + [#] + [#] + [*] do. This means that 변형 is regarded as a modified alphabet of the basic alphabet i, and in applying the control method, it can be seen that the opposite control button which is not used as a subsequent control button to input ぃ is used as a modified alphabet control button. As in the example, the skip control method of the previous application can be applied here. From the point of view of the chain control processing method, by pressing the control button on the opposite side once, it is regarded as selecting the "next control" to input the modified alphabet ((in the example) of the previously input alphabet ((in the example). Can be.

There are two types of modified alphabets in the alphabet: row, halftone and halftone, so you can press the opposite control button once for long sound and twice for the halftone sound.ぶ = ふ + "opposite control buttons" = は + [*] + [*] + [#], ぷ = ふ + "opposite control buttons 2 times" = は + [*] + [*] + [# ] + [#]

Next, if the basic alphabet of the target alphabet is a representative alphabet, the above method cannot be applied as it is. In this case, in addition to any button of the subsequent control button, the modified alphabet of the representative alphabet may be placed as a subsequent alphabet to input the target alphabet.

For example, if you use the [*] button to enter a variation of the representative alphabet (long sound, sound sound, half sound), you will get あ = あ + [*] + [*] + [*]. In other words, the modified alphabet of the representative alphabet (long sound, sound sound, half sound) is regarded as 4th successive alphabet that can be input by using the [*] button. The above is summarized as follows.

Using the opposite control button to expand the use of the control button and to use it for more alphabets or other inputs is called "cross control processing" or "zigzag control processing" or "multidimensional cross control processing" for convenience. Call. This may also apply to using three or more buttons as control buttons.

In the above table, it is obvious that the cells of the other columns except the first column can also be used for inputting other alpha characters or various symbols. In the example above, the opposite control button is applied once. That is, when inputting ぷ, ふ = ふ + "press the opposite control button 2 times" = は + [*] + [*] + [#] + [#] repeatedly and use it as the next control button. The opposite control button ([#] button) is applied only once. This is referred to as "two-dimensional cross-control processing" or "two-step cross-control processing" for convenience.

That is, when only one control button is used to input one alphabet, this may be referred to as "one-dimensional control processing". This can be said to use the control button "one-dimensional". However, in the two-dimensional (crossover) control method, two different control buttons are used to input one alphabet. In other words, when ご is input, ご is regarded as a variant of こ, and 입력 = こ + "opposite control buttons" = か + [#] + [#] + [*], where the opposite control button is already represented Although it is defined as a control button for inputting き and KU after the 1st and 2nd of か, it is like the modified alphabet control button for inputting the modified alphabet of こ on the opposite control button ([*] button). It can be used. This can be seen as using two control buttons "two-dimensional" as compared to using one control button one-dimensionally for one alphabet input.

ぷ = ふ + "Press the opposite control button one time" + "Press the opposite control button one time for the previous control button" = は + [*] + [*] + [#] + [*] It may be. In other words, if it is not possible to input the modified alphabet by repeatedly using the control button ([#] button in the example) that was finally used for input of 으로, use the opposite control button for the other control button again in the same way. You can enter a variant alphabet or a later alphabet. This is called "three-dimensional cross control process" or "three-step cross control process" for convenience. This means that the cross control method can be used to infinitely expand the number of possible inputs for the alphabetic or other alphabetic inputs that can be entered within the keypad. In addition, there is a great meaning that a subsequent alphabet or modified alphabet having a relationship with a pre-input alphabet can be naturally input by a control method.

The above description will be given in the form of a graph, for example, in the case of row A in which two modified alphabets (muck sound, half sound sound) exist, as shown in Fig. 2-3. In Fig. 2-3, the circled ".." in dim color is the same as that which can be used to enter other alphabets or symbols in the empty spaces in the above table, if desired. Alphabet or symbol) can be input by the multidimensional control processing method. In FIG. 2-3, the [*] button and the [#] button are used in the perpendicular directions, respectively.

In the previous application, assign [*] button to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th control instead of the representative alphabet among 50 alphabets, and use the [*] button as a control button to input variation alphabets such as long sound, table sound, and semitone sound. Compared with the method used, it can be seen that the two-dimensional control process is applied to the method of the previous application. That is, 입력 = い + {variation} = い + [*] + [#] because two control buttons are used. The difference is that in the elected circle, the purpose of the control button was used only as a follow-up control button (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th) and only as a modified alphabet (long sound, sound sound, anti-sound) control button. In processing, after inputting the subsequent alphabet, the subsequent control button is used again as the modified alphabet control button. In order to distinguish the main use of the control button (the follow-up control button in the example) as the modified alphabet control button from the two-dimensional control processing method of the previous application, the "two-dimensional recycling control method" or "two-dimensional multi-purpose control processing method" for convenience. I will call it.

The method of filing an application has the advantage of a simple and consistent input method, but has a relatively large number of input strokes. In order to show the difference with the present invention, the graph of the case where the control button was used only as a subsequent control (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th) button and only as a modified alphabet (long sound, sound sound, anti-sound) control button in the first application, respectively. 2-4 is shown. In Figs. 2-3 and 2-4, the parts shown in dim color can be extended and applied.

In the application of the cross-control processing method above, an example of post-control input is shown, which is similar to the control input or post-input in applying the control processing method in the previous application. You can also enter it. For example, ぃ = "opposite control buttons" + い = [#] + [*] + あ. However, it may be convenient to enter the control afterwards when applying the cross control method.

This applies equally to all other languages, not just Japanese. For example, in Arabic, if the * and # are used to enter subsequent alphabets, the multidimensional cross-control processing method is used to enter subscripts. Can be. In addition, when using the [*] button and the [#] button as a control button for inputting a subsequent consonant and a subsequent vowel in Thai, the tonal code is input, and the multi-dimensional cross control processing method can be used.

4. Korean input method

4.1. How to use vowel elements in Korean

In the past, there were methods of assigning alphabets to each button and inputting alphabets by a combination of each stroke (eg, →, ↓, ↙, ↘, ⊃, O, etc.). Also, in Korea, there are cases where Korean vowels are separated into three vowel elements (ㅡ,., ㅣ =>, ie, Korean), and the alphabet is input from the keypad as a combination of vowel elements.

In Korean, vowels can be divided into several vowel elements. For example, it can be thought of as dividing into three vowel elements (sometimes referred to simply as "three vowels") for ㅡ,., ㅣ and four vowel elements of ㅡ,.,:, | It can be thought of as dividing into (), and since ㅡ and ㅣ exist as vowels themselves, it can be considered to use vowel elements in the Korean input method on the keypad. Anyone who knows Korean can know that Korean vowels can input all the various vowels of Korean by combining three vowel elements or four vowel elements.

It will be described in detail through the following examples.

4.1.1. 10 consonants and 3 vowels

First, the basic alphabet for Korean input is 10 consonant pneumatic sounds (basic consonants), 3 vowel elements, the rhythm control, and the rhythm for inputting the horns and vowels by the control method (combination of basic consonants and controls). You can think of 15 elements, such as controls. Since this is assigned to a 3 * 4 keypad with 12 buttons and inputs, the basic consonants of which there are no consonants and pulsations among the ten basic consonants on the nine buttons (for convenience, "9-button dropout consonants" or "10-9 Consonant "or, more simply," 9 consonants "), assign the remaining nine basic consonants to nine buttons, and randomly select one of the three vowel elements, the vowel control, the horn control, and the three-button nine consonants. You can group them by two and assign them to the remaining three buttons. The basic consonants assigned to the nine buttons are entered as the assigned button 1, the vowel element is entered as the assigned button 1, and the control grouped together with the vowel element "." Or the 9 button dropping consonants as the assigned button 3 can do. This is referred to as "10 sound consonant three vowel control method" or "three sound consonant control process". Here, the selection of the grouped together with the vowel element "." Or the button 3 stroke assigned the 9-button dropout consonant is described later, and it can be seen that the repetitive selection method is applied.

Here, it is a matter of course that 10 basic consonants are assigned to each of the 10 number buttons in order to utilize the Korean keypad for memorization. 4-5 illustrate one such embodiment. In Figure 4-5, "ㅎ" is grouped together with the vowel element "." As a 9-button dropping consonant and assigned to the [0] button which is a numeric button. This is because it can give a natural feeling to Koreans at the end of the order, while also giving less inconvenience even if they can't input with the assigned button one. In Figure 4-5, since the remaining basic consonants are also assigned to each numeric button in alphabetical order, there is an advantage of providing a good location identification (readability) to the user.

When inputting after control ㅋ = + {beep (control)} = [1] + [*] + [*], ㄲ = + + {beep (control)} = [1] + [#] + [# ]. In the applicant's application, as in the case of Japanese, the vowels “ㅡ” and “ㅣ” are not used in Korean so that the vowel control and the ê 음 sound control can be selected by the repetitive selection method. In the case of "ㅔ" or "ㅖ", the vowel "ㅣ" may appear consecutively, but the vowel element "." Because of this precedence, the system knows that pressing "##" is not a control but a vowel. Even though the control does not display the control on the button, the user has to know that the user can select the control by simply pressing the corresponding button. By assigning the sound control by grouping it together with the vowel "-", the user can intuitively select the vowel " You can remember to select the sound control by pressing the button to which the "-" button was assigned twice. Likewise, by assigning the sound control with the vowel "ㅣ", the user intuitively selects the button assigned the vowel "ㅣ" twice. There is an advantage that it can be seen that select the hard control, this property is also one of the elements to be protected by rights in the applicant's invention, and the same applies to the four-vowel method described below. This is not limited to the embodiments presented by the Applicant, and may be equally used in other applications, which are also included in the scope of the Applicant's invention. For convenience, this is referred to as "a method of controlling the sound of a vowel / beep using a line-shaped vowel element (" ㅡ "," ㅣ ") button".

In the example of FIGS. 4-5, the vowel element "." Is implicitly placed by assigning the vowel element "." To the [0] button and implicitly placing it in the number "0" (red dot in the number "0"). can do. As a result, the Korean input system can be constructed by concisely placing only one alphabet on the keypad. Similarly, as shown in Fig. 4-9, "ㅎ =. + ㅡ + ㅇ", but by "." Of "ㅎ" in red by assigning only one phoneme in appearance, a simple keypad can be configured.

In the consonant / beep control process, the consonant can be entered by pressing the button to which the basic consonant of the consonant is assigned twice (ie, by the concealed repetition selection method). have. For convenience, this will be referred to as a "vowel repetition selection horn control processing 3 vowel method". Alternatively, the horn can be input by pressing the button to which the basic consonant of the horn is assigned twice (that is, by the concealed repetition selection method) instead of the control method alone (this is a combination of the horn, ie, the consonant of the basic consonant). It can also be seen as typing). For convenience, this will be referred to as "a method of selecting a repetitive sound control process repeatedly." Alternatively, both the sound and the sound can be input by the repetitive selection method without input by the control method. When inputting both the sound and the sound by the repetition selection method, the repetition selection order may be set as the basic consonant (1 stroke)-the sound (2 strokes)-the interval sound (3 strokes) (this is a sound, ie a double consonant). It can be input as a combination of basic consonants, and it can be regarded as inputting three vowels with the basic consonant), basic consonant (1 stroke)-rhythm (2 strokes)-horn (3 strokes). . For convenience, the former case will be referred to as "first rhythm repeat selection three vowel method" and the latter case will be called "first rhythm repeat selection three vowel method". Some of the items described in this paragraph are collectively referred to as "trivial / beep repetitive three-bar method".

It is also possible to apply the "Beep / Horn Repeat Selection 3 Vowels" method while maintaining the 3 vowels of the Sound / Horn Control process. You can also apply Gap / Hero control processing While maintaining the three-vowel method, it is possible to apply only the voic repetition selection method, or to apply the rhythm only repetition selection method, or the pre-harmonic repetition selection method. Various combinations are possible, including the application of the repetitive selection method. On the contrary, while maintaining the triple vowel / beep repeat selection method, it is possible to apply only the control method of the horn, to apply only the control method of the horn, or to apply the control method of both the horn and the horn. have. Alternatively, the horn may be entered only as a control method, the rhythm may be entered only as a repetition selection method. On the contrary, the horn may be entered only as a control method and the horn may be entered only as a repetitive selection method (ie, a combination of basic consonants). You may. There may be further combinations similar to the ones exemplified, which will be referred to as " trivial / beep control repeated combination 3 vowels " for convenience. Generally, a case where an input method of a squeak and a stiff sound is not specified is generally referred to as "10 consonant trivo method" for convenience. It is also possible to allow the user to set a convenient input method for the input of the hard sound and the hard sound.

The frequency of ambiguity that occurs when the "Beep / Beep Repeat Selection 3-vowel method" is applied to both the input of the rhythm and the horn is about 140 characters and one character, about 15 characters in the input system of Samsung Electronics. It occurs much less than it occurs in Korean. It is also possible to additionally assign and arrange a sound or a sound to each number button, inputted by the repeated selection method or by the control processing method, which is also included in the scope of the present invention.

4.1.2. 10 consonants and 4 vowels

The examples of FIGS. 4-5 and 4-9 can be solved and expressed as shown in FIGS. 4-6. In Fig. 4-6, the same input method as in Fig. 4-5 can be applied. As shown in Fig. 4-6, this is a vowel element ":( Acts as a horizontal or vertical stroke, but for convenience, the horizontal stroke ':' is grouped together with the vowel element "." And assigned to the same button, and the vowel elements ".", ":" It is possible to select each of the buttons 1 and 2 assigned by the repetition selection method, but the vowel element ":" may not be placed on the button explicitly. Of course, as shown in Figure 4-6, even if you explicitly assign and select the alphabet displayed on the keypad by the iterative selection method is the same result. However, even if the vowel element ":" is not displayed on the button, the user intuitively enters the combination of the vowel element "." (Ie ":" = "." + "." = [0] + [0]) I can think of it. Finally, Figure 4-5 also uses four vowel elements ("ㅡ", ".", ":", "ㅣ"), but one of the three vowel control, horn control, 9-button dropper sound vowel element " . "And the vowel element": "are assigned to an arbitrary button, and the". ",": "And 9 button dropping consonants (in the case of Figs. Select it, but you can see that the vowel element ":" is not displayed on the button. This result is the same as the above-mentioned "10 consonant 3-vowel method", but for convenience, "10 consonant vowel element repeated selection 3-vowel method" or "10 consonant vowel element repeated selection 4-vowel method" or "10 Consonant point collection element repeated selection vowel method. The horn and the beep can be input by the various methods mentioned above. In fact, describing the same result or giving a special name, Figure 4-5 also uses four vowel elements and applies the repeated selection method, but it can be seen that the vowel element ":" is not simply displayed on the button. 4 (5-6), the input method and the algorithm constituting the input system are the same as in Figs. 4-6, and the existing Korean input system of Samsung Electronics has only three vowel elements. While it was an approach to use, the input system proposed by the applicant is intended to emphasize what can be seen from different perspectives (using four vowel elements).

4-7 illustrates a case in which vowel elements ":" are not grouped together with vowel elements ".", But grouped into different groups. That is, four vowel elements ("ㅡ", ".", ":", "ㅣ") are assigned to different buttons, and for convenience, it is called "10 consonants 4 vowels" or "4 vowels". . Since the four vowel method has many points related to the three vowel method, it is explained relatively simply. It is obvious that the contents applicable to the four vowel method described in the three vowel method can be directly applied to the four vowel method. The term can also be used similarly to the term used in the three vowel method.

Similarly in the four vowel method, each of the ten basic consonants except the two basic consonants with no consonants are assigned to eight buttons, and each of the four vowel elements, the consonant control, the horn control, and the eight buttons. Group two consonants that are not assigned to (conventionally called "8-button dropout consonants" or "10-8 consonants" or, more simply, "-8 consonants") into groups, and enter the vowel elements into the assigned button one. In addition, the assigned control or missing consonants can be entered with the assigned button 2 (ie, by the repeat selection method).

Here too, 10 basic consonants can be assigned to each number button, which can be used for memorization. In addition, by assigning the vowel element "." To a similarly shaped [0] button and displaying it inside the number "0", a concise placement on the button is possible (or you can omit the notation within the number, so the user will see it similarly). Easy to recognize) by assigning the vowel element ":" to a similarly shaped [8] button and displaying it inside the number "8" (or omitting the notation within the number so that the user can easily recognize it). Only one alphabet can be arranged externally per button. When the buttons assigned to the vowels “ㅡ” and “ㅣ” are the [*] buttons and the [#] buttons as shown in FIGS. 4-7, when the various vowels of Korean are input, adjacent buttons are pressed to reduce the distance of fingering. It works.

In the case of the four vowel method, the repetitive selection method can be applied to the input of the vowel and the horn, similarly to the case of the three vowel method. In addition, as in the case of the three vowel method, it is possible to use a combination of the repeated selection method, which is collectively referred to as "multiple vowel method combined mixed selection of repeated sound / sound control processing".

The keypad of FIGS. 4-7 may also be solved and expressed as shown in FIGS. 4-8 from the viewpoint of the repeated selection method. 4-6 and 4-8, the difference between FIGS. 4-5 and 4-7 can be clearly seen. Fig. 4-8 shows the result of moving the vowel element ": " selected by the [0] button 2 in Fig. 4-6 to the [8] button and inputting it with one stroke. 6 and 4-8 are slightly different, but this can be done uniformly). The vowel element ":" consisting of two dots can also be divided into the horizontal vowel element ":" and the vertical vowel element "..". , ".", ":", "..", "ㅣ") may be referred to as "5 vowel method". However, as compared to the four vowel method of Figs. 4-7, there are few advantages in terms of input stroke, improvement of recognition ability, etc. and thus are not mentioned in the present invention.

Collection element "." And ":" can be assigned to the [*] and [#] buttons, but in this case, the vowel elements are displayed in numbers as shown in Figs. 4-7, so that only one alphabetical surface cannot be placed. .

For example, referring to Figures 4-7, ㅕ =: + ㅣ = [8] + [#], ㅑ = ㅣ +: = [#] + [8], = = ㅡ +: = [*] + [ 8], when inputting by 8 button drop consonant repeatedly, ㅁ = [8] + [8], ㅎ = [8] + [8]. If the collection element ":" the collection element "." If it is allowed to input with 2 arranged button 2, "ㅎ" is inputted with the 3 button with "." As in the previous application.

For example, in the case of "Wo" or "Wee", the dot-shaped vowel element ".." between the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" is entered as the vowel element ":". The system may recognize that you have entered "U + ..." temporarily, but since the vowel "|" cannot appear after "U", the system may recognize you as "W". In the "10 consonant vowel element repeated selection 3 vowel method," enter the vowel element "." Twice when entering the vowel element between "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" in the case of "Woo" or vowel It can be understood by entering the element ":" once.

Some of the contents described above are described as follows. First of all, when inputting Korean on the keypad by applying the repetition selection method, the method using three vowel elements (ㅡ,., ㅣ) is 10 consonant pyeonyum, three vowel elements, and two controls (beep, voic). ) Repeated selection method is applied by grouping and assigning a total of 15 elements in the 4 * 3 keypad, and grouping "3 vowel elements" and "2 controls and 1 consonant sound (9-button dropout consonants)" It is assigned.

The method using four vowel elements (ㅡ,.,:, ㅣ) is used to group and assign 10 consonant sounds, four vowel elements, and 16 elements of two controls in a 4 * 3 keypad. Applied but assigned by grouping "four vowel elements" and "two controls and two consonants (8-button dropout consonants)".

In both methods, 10 consonants were assigned to 10 number buttons for the natural use of simple chords (especially syllable-based initial chords).

Applicants' 3 vowel method (collectively referred to as various 3 vowel methods) and 4 vowel method use various characteristics of a specific language (here, Korean), so that even if the repeated selection method is applied, there is almost no ambiguity or no ambiguity. It shows how to input. This means that in inputting the alphabet displayed on the keypad by using a repetition selection method, in particular, in entering Korean, the Korean language repetition selection method among the "language restrictions input method" among the "language restrictions input method" presented by the applicant in the earlier application. The Korean input method optimized for "can be considered.

In fact, in the Korean application, the applicant proposed that a pair of basic consonants and basic vowels be assigned to each button, and the rule of appearance of Korean consonants and vowels (ie, word generation rule, alphabet) It is the same context that showed that the ambiguity in the iterative selection method can be greatly reduced by using a combination rule. When the Korean vowel (elements) "-" and "ㅣ" do not appear in succession in Figures 4-5 to 4-8 using three vowel elements or four vowel elements in Korean, they appear in succession. In the same way, it is possible to select the rhythm control and the rhythm control assigned with the vowel element by the repetitive selection method by using the property to know whether the vowel or the control is entered in the "ㅖ"). Can be.

4.1.3. Full control 3 vowels / 4 vowels and full control 3 vowels / 4 vowels

In Fig. 4-5, even when the sound and sound are input by the control processing method, ambiguity may occur in the case of "Lee <=> Ahi" and "Lee <=> Ahe <=> Yahi". Values are all the same). In the example, "ㅡ" is used instead of the vowel "ㅣ", and other similar cases may be understood by a person who knows Korean. However, many of these cases do not occur in actual words, and can be effectively overcome by setting the "battery delay time" and "other delay time" mentioned in the earlier application. A similar case may exist in the four vowel method of FIGS. 4-7. In Fig. 4-7, there is no case like "Ahe <=> Yahi", but may be the same as "and <=> Yami". However, this too is not the case and can be overcome by time delay. The number of occurrences can be examined based on the actual frequency of Korean consonants and vowels, but it is expected to occur in hundreds of characters in Korean, so virtually no ambiguity occurs.

Of course, as mentioned in the earlier application, in the three-vowel method as shown in Fig. 4-5, if the nine-button dropout note (“he” in the example drawing) is regarded as a modified alphabet of “ㅇ” (beep or beep), the input is unambiguous. It is possible. For example, ㅎ = ㅇ + {beep} = [8] + [*] + [*]. This is referred to as a "full control process 3 vowel method" for convenience. Similarly, in the four-vowel method similar to 5, the 8-button drop-out consonants ("" "and" "" in the example) are controlled by the control method (for example, "" "as described above. Can be entered without any ambiguity. For convenience, it may be called "full control processing four-bar method".

However, inputting 9-buttons / 8-button drop-out consonants by the full-computing three-vowel / four-vowel method hinders the naturalness of the simple code. Accordingly, the present invention proposes to input a 9-button drop-out consonant (“” in the example) as a combination of a button and a control to which a corresponding alphabet is assigned in the three-vowel method (applicable only in the case of post-control input and described as an example). For example, in the 3 vowel method of Figure 4-5 ㅎ =. + {Beep} = [0] + [*] + [*] It is as if the vowel element "." Is inputted as one button with the alphabet assigned to the 9-button drop-out consonant. Is to type like the alphabet. This method also eliminates ambiguity completely, and by using the [0] button for the input of "ㅎ", it is possible to maintain the naturalness of the simple code. This will be referred to as "full control processing 3 vowel method using the assigned drop consonant button". The same applies to the four vowel method. With this method, "ㅎ" ends with a letter with a seed sound (e.g. "angle") and then "h" can be temporarily recognized as "high". However, again, the vowel "ㅡ" + "ㅡ" cannot come out in succession, so the system can recognize that the user has selected the control, and the "high" vowel element "." Can be combined with the sound control. Therefore, the system recognizes that ". + ㅡ + ㅡ" has entered "ㅎ". If the initial letter ends with a vowel (eg "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "TT", etc.) that can be combined with the vowel element "." Without a seed, the input is entered to enter "ㅎ". The values "0 **" to "0" are temporarily combined with the preceding vowel, and the vowel "ㅡ" + "ㅡ" is entered and the system can recognize it temporarily, but the system will also enter the "**" input value. Notice that this control is selected and cannot be combined with the preceding vowel element ".", So the system knows that you typed "ㅎ". A little further, if the letter ends with a vowel that cannot be combined with the vowel element "." (Eg, the remaining vowels except "ㅣ", "ㅏ", and "TT"), enter the [0] button. You can also type "ㅎ" and the system will consider it and display it to the user. Also, even if "0" is entered after [0], it can be regarded as "H".

Here, it can be seen that a button assigned with a vowel “-” should be used as a control button for inputting a dropped consonant in the three-vowel method (including the four-vowel method) in the full control process using the dropped consonant assign button. As mentioned in the earlier application, "ㅔ" and "ㅖ" exist in Korean. The same is true for the four-combined full-control process using the dropout consonant button. Similarly, when inputting "ㅁ" assigned to the [8] button in FIGS. 4-7, it can be input as ㅁ = [8] + [*] + [*]. The input example in the 4 vowel control method using the dropped consonant assignment button is the same and is omitted.

4.2. Temporary language restriction delay

The previous application stated that "delay time of delay" and "delay time of delay" can be applied even if more than three alphabets are assigned to one button. For example, you can set the batter delay time to 0.1 seconds on the standard English keypad so that the system can assume that you typed B when the [2] button is pressed twice within 0.1 seconds.

Likewise, when the [2] button is pressed three times in succession (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]), the first input value and the second input value (that is, the first [2] button and the second [2] button) If the delay time interval is within the time set as the battering delay time (eg 0.1 seconds), and the delay time interval between the second input value and the third input value is within the time set as the batting delay time (eg 0.1 seconds) ( That is, [2] + within 0.1 second + [2] + within 0.1 second + [2]), C can be recognized by the system. Alternatively, if the total input time is within two times the batting delay time (eg 0.2 seconds) when the [2] button is pressed three times in succession (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]), enter C. You can also let the system know.

The various delay times mentioned in the earlier and main applications are summarized as follows.

Battering delay time ≤ time delay ≤ temporary language restriction delay time

All three delays may be set the same, but it may be desirable to set the other delay time longer than the batter delay time and the temporary language restriction delay time longer than the other delay time.

4.3. Response between client system and server system

In an earlier application (2000 applications with priority claims), the alphanumeric program on the keypad could be mounted on the terminal (client) side or on the server side. When mounted on the server side, a numeric input value is sent from the client side to the server side and the server side interprets the input value. In the whole system consisting of client (terminal) and server, it is possible to interpret the input value on the client side and transmit the character string to the server side. Obviously, this also applies to all the character input method of the applicant.

4.4. Use of buttons other than 4 * 3 keypad

In the previous section, we presented a method to fully process Korean input in a 4 * 3 keypad. However, a vowel element or a part of the vowel element may be assigned by using a separate button other than the 4 * 3 keypad. For example, in FIG. 4-5, when the vowel element "." Is assigned to a separate button, the dropped consonants "ㅎ" assigned together are selected as the assigned button 1 stroke. Similarly, in Figures 4-7, if the vowel elements "." And ":" are assigned to separate buttons (two may be placed on one button, each may be placed on two buttons), the eight-button dropout consonant " ㅁ "can be selected by assigning one button.

In addition, a separate button may be used, but a vertical movement button, a high movement button, or a left movement button may be used which is not frequently used in the text input mode.

4.5. Typing of Korean Gore Alphabet

The present invention further proposes a method for allowing Korean Gore to be input through a keypad.

In Korean, the vowels that are rarely used in modern times (lost alphabets) are the lower vowels (indicated by "·"), the consonants in half-tone (indicated by the triangle "ㅿ"), and the weak hyssop ("ㅎ") "Yes"), old eunuchs ("" "with a dot on the top), and a sprint (" ㅂ "with a circle under the" ㅸ ").

Vowels in Gore are frequently used in relatively modern languages. For example, you can see it used in the trade name "ㄱ. ㅁ. 고을" and in the famous word processor "ㅎ. ㄴ글" made by Hangul and computer companies. +. "Is one letter," ㅁ +. "Is one letter, and" ㅎ. As in the example, the lower vowels are used in various names, and thus can be usefully used for inputting a phone book.

In the applicant's application, the lower part of the vowel is the same shape as the vowel element ".", So the lower part of the collection can be entered naturally by allowing the button element "." With the collection element "." To be entered. The input rules remain unchanged since no other vowels appear after the vowels (even if that is the case, the vowels below the vowels are rarely used, so no other vowels appear after the vowels). . Of course, if the button assigned the vowel element "." Is pressed twice, the system will recognize that it is to enter "ㅕ" or "ㅖ" instead of entering the sequence twice. Likewise, if the vowel element "." Is pressed twice in succession after the vowel "|", the system recognizes that it is for entering the vowel "ㅑ" or the vowel "ㅒ".

Gore's consonants can also be typed as a variation of the basic consonant (consonant flat). For example, the half-tone "ㅿ" is regarded as a variant alphabet of "s" (eg, a sonic sound), and the tender hyssop "ㆆ" is considered to be a modified alphabet of "o" (eg, a sonic or audible sound). Can be entered as a modified alphabet of "ㅇ" (beep or beep). In the case of pure sound "ㅸ", the input method can also be defined (e.g. automata processing which enables the combination of "ㅂ" and "ㅇ"), but it is an alphabet that is not actually used in modern Korean and is a variant of "ㅂ". As there is both a sound "ㅃ" and a "beep" is not described in detail in the present invention.

For one example, you could enter "ㅸ = ㅂ + **** = 6 ****" or "ㅸ = ㅂ + #### = 6 ####". As mentioned in Inputting various symbols, it is like inputting various symbols by repeatedly using the control button and inputting a valid alphabet, and pressing the control button repeatedly. "6 *** = f", but with "6 ****" you can enter the gore (the gore as a variant of the "ㅂ"). Likewise, various symbols can be entered by repeating the use of the control buttons (here, the [*] and [#] buttons assigned the vowels “ㅡ” and “ㅣ”).

The input of Gore's consonants is equally applicable to other applicants' filings. However, the method of using the vowel elements (ㅡ,., ㅣ) among the applicant's prior applications has the advantage that it is possible to input the children under the collection naturally and easily.

Through the present invention, it is possible to input the Gore alphabet used intermittently in modern Korean through the keypad. Currently, Korean Samsung Electronics' input method using vowel elements is not supported for inputting vowels below. Therefore, in the present invention, the biggest difference is that it is possible to input a vowel under which is used in a special case even in a relatively modern language.

4.6. Characteristics of parallel input method

In the earlier application, "short / full parallel input method" or simply "parallel input method" has been described. For example, when the parallel input method using the full input method as the default input mode is applied, the system checks the input value every time an input value is input, and the input value does not form the full code of the specific full input method. The moment the system recognizes it, the system treats the input value as a simple code (this is called "full-priority parallel input method" for convenience). On the contrary, when the parallel input method using the shortcut input method as the default input mode is applied, the system examines the input value every time an input value is input and the input value no longer exists in the index of the simple code to be searched. The moment the system confirmed that it did not, the system regarded the input as a full code and processes it (this is called "short-priority parallel input method" for convenience).

When using the "partial full selection method" as the pool input method, it was explained that it is possible to treat the input value as a short code at the instant when the input value violates the full code generation rule in the pool-first parallel input method.

When the iterative selection method is applied as the pool input method, it is not explicitly known whether the input value violates the full code in the pool priority parallel input method. However, when the language limited iterative selection method is applied as the full input method, the system may treat the input value as a short code at the moment when the input value violates the word generation rule of a specific language.

In the method using three vowel elements of Korean (ㅡ,., ㅣ) (example of Fig. 4-5), the syllable-based initial code is used as a short code (i.e., used for indexing the simple code to be searched). Simple code means the syllable-based initial code.) In the case of applying the full-priority parallel input method, if "12 ~" is input as the input value, the input value forms Korean syllables (letters) when the second input value "2" is input. Because the system cannot recognize that the full code is not achieved, the system can treat the input value as a simple code. Anyone who knows Korean is easily recognizable, but when the user enters a simple code (syllable standard initial code) when applying the parallel priority input method in the form similar to that of Fig. 4-5, in most cases, the second input value There is a good characteristic that the input value is a simple code.

This is also the same context that the system treats the input value as a simple code (short code) when the input value violates the Korean word generation rule in the Korean restricted input method using three vowel elements of Korean language. In case of inputting "100 ~" as an input value in Fig. 4-5 using three vowel elements of Korean (full priority parallel input method), the system inputs "ㄱ +" or "bridge" to the user. .. "can be recognized and output, but if the 4th input value is input without the vowel element" ㅡ "or" ㅣ ", the input value can not be full code. At that moment, the input value may be recognized as a simple code (short code), and a phrase corresponding to the input value may be output (visual means or audio means) by referring to the simple code index. 4-5, the system can know whether the input value is a full code or a simple code. city).

Likewise, in FIG. 4-7 using four vowel elements (ㅡ,.,:, ㅣ), when the user applies "18 ~" when the full-priority parallel input method is applied, the system is "almost" or "high". It can be recognized as the input of "ㄱ +." To input, but it can be output, but when the number button (corresponding to the consonant) is input as the third input value, the input value cannot form a full code, The system can treat the input value as a simple code. When up to three buttons are entered, the system has a good feature of knowing whether the input value is full or simple chord (when the four vowel method of the horn / beep control process is applied).

In Figures 4-5 and 4-7, the number button assignments of the basic consonants (consonant pyeonyum) are different, but FIGS. 4-5 and 4-7 are merely examples, so the arrangement of the consonant pyeonyum can be kept the same. Can be. 4-5 implicitly assigns "ㅎ" to the [0] button, and implicitly assigns the vowel element "." To the number "0" in FIGS. 4-7, but this is also the same. . For convenience, the input method using three vowel elements is called "three vowel Korean input method (or more simply three vowel method or three vowel method)" similarly to Figs. The input method using vowel elements will be called "4 vowel Korean input method (or more simply 4 vowel method or 4 vowel method)".

4.7. Compatibility between 3-vowel keypad and 4-vowel keypad and application on memorized keypad and numeric keypad only

In the keypad of Fig. 4-5 and the button assigned to the basic consonants in the keypad of Figs. 4-7, the basic consonants are slightly different from each other. (E.g., the method described in Figs. 4-5) or the 10 consonant 4-vowel method (e.g., the method described in Figs. 4-7). There is. Furthermore, in the "memorization" keypad which assigns Korean consonants to each number button, the user can use the 10 consonants 3 vowels or the 10 consonants 4 vowels. Here, a user who is familiar with the 3 vowel method or the 4 vowel method will be able to use the simple code and input Korean by 3 vowel or 4 vowel method even on the keypad that does not display consonant sound on the keypad. Applicant's protection scope includes using a simple code on a numeric keypad or a keypad displaying only consonant sound on 10 numeric buttons for memorization, and using Korean input by the 3-vowel method and the 4-vowel method. Inclusion is self-evident.

4.8. Input of missing consonants

If you apply the full control method by applying the falling consonant "ㅎ" in the 3 vowel method in the previous application (after input control), enter without ambiguity as "ㅎ = 0 ** =. ㅡ ㅡ = ㅗ ㅡ" I could do it. In addition, it was improved by saying that if the drop-out consonant "ㅎ" appears at the beginning of the word, it is possible to input it with [0] button 1 (because the vowel element '.' Does not appear at the beginning of the word). In addition, the vowel element "." Cannot be combined (that is, the vowel element '.' Is a vowel except for 'ㅡ', 'ㅣ', 'ㅏ', 'TT'). ㅎ "is said to be entered with the [0] button 1 stroke.

When "ㅎ" is entered with the [0] button 3 strokes, the vowel element "." It is pointed out that when this vowel ('.combinable vowel') is followed by "ㅎ", as described, ambiguity may occur, such as "<<> ahe <=> Yahi". To input without it, it is possible to input as "ㅎ = 0 **" or "ㅎ = 0 *" by applying the full control processing method. In addition, when inputting without ambiguity, it is recommended to input "0 **" rather than "0 *" for regularity of input method. In this case, when the drop consonant "ㅎ" is inputted by using the button to which the drop consonant is assigned, the "." Comes after "." It can be seen that ambiguity can occur only in special cases. On the contrary, if the consonant is followed by "ㅎ", you can enter "ㅎ" without any ambiguity with the [0] button 3 strokes. In other words, if you enter "ㅎ" after a consonant, you can enter "ㅎ" without any ambiguity by applying either "0 **" or "000".

Here, when ".combinable collection" comes after "ㅎ", it can be seen that "0 *" can be input. This is because “.combinable vowels” and “. + ㅡ” are not combined in Korean.

To sum up the above, in order to make the input of the dropped consonant "ㅎ" as possible as convenient as possible, when the beginning of the word and ". . "Combinable vowels" after "ㅎ" can be entered as "0 *" or "0 **", and when "ㅎ" appears after the consonant, "000" can be entered.

Of course, you can always input "ㅎ = 0 **" for regularity of input method. At this time, it is also possible to coexist with the input method of "ㅎ" summarized above. For example, at the beginning of the word, "0 = ㅎ", next time "*" is pressed, "0 * = H", and once more "*" is pressed, "0 ** = ㅎ" Will be. If "*" is pressed again, "0 *** = ha" is pressed again, and if "*" is pressed again, it becomes "0 **** = ha".

Likewise, if you press "0 *" to input "." After ".combinable collection" and then press "*" again, it will be equal to "0 ** = ㅎ" (the input method is set to '0' ** = ㅎ '), so when "*" is pressed again, it might be "0 *** = h".

Obviously, the above description can be equally applied to the case of using three vowels (eg, "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ") of Korean, which will be described later. In addition, the input of "ㅎ =. + ㅡ + ㅡ = 0 **" is composed of the shape of "ㅎ = ㅗ + ㅇ", which means that it is possible to input with the feeling of writing "ㅎ". Furthermore "." ("3", etc. when using 3 Korean vowels) After entering a vowel that can be combined with "ㅎ", enter "ㅎ =. + ㅡ + ㅡ" for consistency of input rules. For the convenience of the user, when ". + ㅡ" is input, it can be displayed as "ㅗ". For convenience, this is called "heavy input". For example, FIG. By default, if "1 = 0 ##" to "1 # 0" is entered, "a" is displayed, and if "*" is entered once more, "a" is displayed. If you enter "1 # 0 *", when "1 # 0 *" is entered, "Kit" is displayed and press "*" once again, "Ki (Kim5601 is supported by 'ㅎ' in Unicode, Is the first consonant of the next letter) "and" # "is further pressed to" quite ". The difference is a vowel ending with". "(" ㅏ ", etc. when using three vowels). After this is entered "ㅡ When "is entered,". "And". "Entered just before"-"are recognized and processed as a single vowel" ㅗ ". After" 1 # 0 * = conventional "is entered, the delete button is pressed. It can be set to "1", which is the "1 # 0" state of the page. This is the same as entering "ㅎ =. + ㅡ + ㅡ", except in the special case only the form displayed in between.

To sum up the above a little more generally, it is defined as a combination of "ㅗ = X + Y" in a specific input method, and "X" entered after a series of vowels is If a certain phoneme is formed and then successively input "Y" does not form a promised specific vowel, the last input "X + Y" is recognized as a single vowel "ㅗ" and processed. "X" may be a vowel element "." As illustrated, or may be "ㅏ", "ㅓ", "TT", ... etc. as in the method using three Korean vowels described below. , "Y" can be "ㅡ".

As a result of the above, when the vowel "ㅗ" is entered and then "ㅡ" is inputted, it can be seen that "ㅗ + ㅡ" is treated as "ㅎ". That is, do not apply the input of "ㅎ" using the [0] button assigned "ㅎ" at the beginning of a word, and enter "ㅗ" as "0 *" at the beginning of a word, and enter "" (= If *) "is entered," 0 ** "can be recognized as" ㅎ "and processed. If you go one step further and enter "ㅇ" after the single vowel "ㅗ", you can recognize and process "낱" as "ㅎ". Again, "ㅗㅇ" is not a normal Korean character, so the combination of "ㅗㅇ" is treated as "ㅎ". However, if "단어" is not a single vowel, as in words such as "study", "ㅗ + ㅇ" does not become "ㅎ". In the case of "Kihi" illustrated above, "1 # 0 * = Guillaume". If "ㅇ (= 8)" is entered next time, "Kiji ('ㅎ" is supported by unicode. In KSC5601, 'ㅎ' becomes the first consonant of the next letter) ". If" ㅣ (= #) "is input again, it can be recognized as" quite "and processed. In the example, we heard the input of "ㅎ", but you can input any phoneme by the above means. However, it would be natural to enter a geometrically relevant "ㅎ".

Although three vowels have been described above, the same can be applied to the input of the dropped consonants in the four vowel method. 4-7 and 4-8, in inputting "ㅁ" assigned with ".." in the [8] button, when the dropping consonant "ㅁ" comes at the beginning of a word, the corresponding button [1] When the vowels ".." assigned together cannot be combined (ie vowels and vowels except vowel 'ㅡ', 'ㅣ'), followed by "ㅁ" You can type. Likewise, if the consonant is followed by the dropped consonant "ㅁ", you can enter "ㅁ" without any ambiguity with the corresponding button 2. In addition, if a missing consonant "ㅁ" comes after a vowel that can be combined with the vowel elements assigned together, it can be entered as "8 *". Of course, even in the case of the four-vowel method, the application of the full control processing method using the dropping consonant allocation button and the application of the control processing method that regards the falling consonant as a modified alphabet (diaphragm or beep) of the other basic consonant It is possible.

In addition, it is possible to apply a control processing method by using basic consonants in which there is no horn / horn in inputting a symbol.

4.9. Input example of symbol

Whenever possible, enter a combination of a button with a basic consonant with no septum or beep and a vowel element button (especially the "-" and "|" buttons that can be used like a control button). It will be convenient. In other words, it can be regarded as the application of the input method of the sound of beep.

For example, various symbols can be input as follows based on FIGS. 4-5, and the following contents are already presented in the prior application, and are not only used in the character input method proposed in the present invention but also in other character input systems. Obviously, it can be applied similarly (ie using control methods).

▶ Exclamation Point (!) = 2 **: It can be easily associated with "Ne = 2 * ..." of "Exclamation Point".

▶ Slash (/) = 2 ##: can easily associate with "me = 2 # ..." of "Division"

▶ Tilde (~) = 4 **: Reminiscent of wave shape in "ㄹ" and "le" pronunciation

▶ Golvin (@) = 4 ##: Reminiscent of "ㄹ + ㅣ" in loop form of "@" symbol

▶ Question mark (?) = 5 **: can be easily associated with "water = 5 * ..." of "question mark"

▶ Period (.) = 5 ##: It can be easily associated with "De = 5 # ..." of "Period"

▶ Comma (,) = 5 ###: Enter "Period" and press "#" once more

▶ Colon (:) = 5 ####: Enter "Comma" and press "#" once more

▶ Semicolon (:) = 5 #####: Enter "Colon" and press "#" once more

If you use a character input system that does not use the [*] or [#] buttons as a vowel button, you can enter an exclamation point by combining a button assigned with "b" and a control button (eg [*] button). will be. In the input system where the [*] button or the [#] button is used as a control button instead of a vowel button, or even in a system used as a control button, as described in `` pure sound input '', the repeated pressing of the button and the control button You can enter an exclamation point in combination. For example, if you enter a modern language that takes precedence over Gore, and a button assigned with "ㄴ" and an arbitrary control button (for example, the [*] button) is pressed up to two times, enter "exclamation mark = ㄴ + ***". Can be.

Period (.) + "ㅣ" = comma (,), which also uses the property that the vowel "ㅣ" cannot be combined normally after a certain symbol (period in this example). If you want to enter the vowel "ㅣ" after the period, enter a period (.) And set a period of time (e.g. as long as the language release delay). After inputting (.), You can confirm the period by pressing a certain button (eg right arrow or 'Blank + Delete'), and then enter ". ㅣ" by entering the collection "ㅣ". The same applies to the input of the previously described Gore Hangul.

It is obvious that other symbols other than the exclamation point can be similarly applied in other input systems (combination of buttons and control buttons assigned with consonant Hangul consonants). This is possible.

In the above, the symbol input case optimized for the Hangul input method proposed in the present invention is shown. In other words, various symbols are inputted by using consonant buttons and vowel buttons (vowels “-” and “ㅣ” assigned) which do not have a vowel sound / sound. However, as shown in the example of entering the pure horn "ㅸ = 6 ****" or "ㅸ = 6 ####", the consonant button or the various symbols can be used even with the consonant You can enter

Furthermore, as in the case described in 10 and 11 below, the vowel button can be repeatedly pressed to select / enter symbols even when various vowels are selected / entered. For example, in FIG. 4-5, when "*" button is selected with one [*] button assigned to vowel "-", "TT" is selected with two strokes, and "ㅠ" is selected with three strokes (that is, the vowel is selected). "ㅡ", "TT", "ㅠ" in the order of the number of times the button is pressed repeatedly), "5 *** = mu" will be.

Usually in a way that a particular phoneme is selected by repeating a particular button press, the "maximum possible number of repetitions" (eg when the [*] button is pressed three times) is returned to its initial state (ie It is often the case that the selected state is cycled, that is, “5 **** = M.” This is primarily a case of pressing more times than desired by a typo (but this is not the case. It is usually sufficient to use the delete function of the input unit set forth in the earlier application) or "5 **** = 5 *** + * = mu ㅡ" As shown in the input, the system detects that an uncombinable alphabet (collection) has been entered, and can recognize the entire input as one specific alphabet (eg, a corresponding lattice, gore or a specific symbol).

In this case (in case of collection "-", "TT", "ㅠ", it is selected according to the number of repetition presses of the button-where three vowels are actually displayed on the [*] button and some vowels) (Eg include all occurrences of the vowel "ㅡ"), you can enter "question mark (?) = 5 ****". When the [*] button is pressed consecutively after "5 ****", when a period (.) Is entered in the example above and the next [#] is pressed, the sequence of symbols (in the example above) Like a comma (,), a colon (:), a semicolon (;), and the like in a broad sense, various letters) may be recognized as promised symbols. Thus, for example, a non-symbol, such as lattice "ㅋ = 1 ****", could be entered as "key = 1 *****".

This allows the selected "ㅡ", "TT" and "ㅠ" to be selected according to the number of repeated presses of the [*] button to which the vowel "ㅡ" is assigned. In addition, "Symbol Control 1", This can be seen in the same context as "symbol control 2", "symbol control 3", ... are selected. In other words, it is equivalent to "5+ {symbol control1} = 5 **** = question mark (?)". Similarly, according to the number of repetitive presses of the [*] button to which the vowel “ㅡ” is assigned, the promised “ㅡ”, “TT”, and “ㅠ” are selected, and according to the number of consecutive repetition presses, “2nd” and “3rd It is like having a subsequent control such as "," 5th "... selected. For example, "5+ {2nd} = 5 **** = question mark (?)". In other words, "ㅁ" is represented as "?" In [5] button. Is implicitly defined as the {2nd} subsequent alphabet. This can be seen in a similar context to the example of using a collection button as a control button, as presented in the applicant's earlier application (the application number is not clearly stated).

If the button assigned to the vowel "ㅡ" is used only as an input for "ㅡ", the maximum possible repetition of the vowel "ㅡ" following the consonant is 1, so enter as "question mark (?) = 5 **" This can be seen as possible. In this case, even when the maximum possible repetition number is one or more times (three times in the above example), various symbols can be input. Of course, even if the symbol is not recognized in combination with the consonant button, only the input of the vowel button may be recognized as a symbol. For example, if three vowels are inputted as "ㅡ", "TT", "ㅠ" according to the repeated pressing of the [*] button to which "ㅡ" is assigned, "5 **** =?" Without "**** =?" To recognize a specific alphabet (eg a symbol). However, this is not a good way to use the [*] button to enter only one symbol and the promised symbol when the [*] button is pressed in succession. In the case of the recognition with the consonant button, the combination with the [5] button in the example as well as the combination with other buttons (for example, a numeric button assigned with a consonant) can be recognized as a specific symbol (alphabet is also possible). It is obvious that the input of various symbols can be implemented with a small number of input strokes.

As described above in the application, the applicant may use a button assigned with a vowel as a control button. According to the input rule, the control button may be pre-inputted or inputted later. In other words, you can enter "question mark (?) = 5 **" or "** 5". For example, if "ga" is entered and then "** 5" is entered, the system will recognize the input as "ga?" As soon as the last "ㅁ" is entered in "ga + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅁ". do. When "** 5" is entered after "Gam", the last input "5 **" is detected as soon as the last "ㅁ" is entered in "Gam-L" and the input value can be recognized as "Gam?" have. The same holds true for the remaining cases.

To summarize the above, a specific vowel button is repeatedly used to select a set alphabet according to the number of pushes. The combination of a value with a specific (consonant) button (a set of vowel buttons can be pre-input or post-input, as defined) is treated as the input of the promised alphabet (symbol).

This can be applied to various function inputs as well as alphabets (including symbols). When applied to the input of the function, as shown in the Applicant's earlier application, "Multi-dimensional cross-control processing method" (when entering the alphabet by the N-dimensional cross control processing method, enter the function by the cross combination of N + 1 control button). In order to input a specific function, it is preferable to set various alphabets (symbols, etc.) by the repeated pressing of the control button, and to make the last one. (E.g. 5 **** = question mark (?), 5 ***** = exclamation point (!), 5 ****** = enter function enabled)

If "5 ***** = Enter function activated" and "5 ****** = Exclamation mark (!)", Enter function is activated by "5 *****" and then [*] When the button is pressed, the system disables (cancels) the entered enter function and interprets the entire input value "5 ******" as an exclamation point (!), Because it is unnatural in implementation and confusing to the user. to be. This means that when a vowel button used as a control button is used for a maximum of N times when inputting various alphabets (including symbols), it is preferable to input the function by using the repeated pressing more than (ie N + 1 times). to be.

4.10. Entering an arbitrary vowel using the vowel element "." (Eg vowel "ㅏ")

It has been shown that the vowel element "." Can be used to naturally enter the Gore "bottom". The vowel element "." Is similar in shape to the lower one, so it can be user friendly. If you enter the lower vowel element ".", You can end the vowel combination at the beginning of vowel combination (eg after consonant input) at the vowel combination process (ie vowel processing). If only the [0] button is pressed during the activation of a function, it is treated as a down arrow.

Basically, inputting a vowel using a vowel element forms a single vowel with a combination of vowel elements. The vowel combining process refers to the beginning of a vowel combination to the end of the collection. The vowel combination start state means that after inputting consonants, activating a function such as a space, or when it is recognized that the currently input vowel is not combined with the previously recognized vowel. For example, when "*" is pressed in the vowel input "1 # * ... = Ki-...", the previously recognized vowel "ㅣ" is followed by the vowel element "ㅡ". Because it can not form a new vowel combination state will be recognized. Likewise, the vowel termination state means when a new consonant is recognized, when a function activation such as a blank is recognized, and so on. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the vowel combining process (from the beginning of the vowel combination to the end of the vowel combination) will be described as an example.

For example, "105 = a +. + ㅁ" would be a single letter with a lower vowel. If "1" is pressed to recognize the consonant and then "0" is pressed, the system will first recognize the start of the vowel combining process. For input value "10 ~", the system selects "ㄱ +." (The process of typing "ger", "cha", "high", or "school"). However, if "5" is pressed to recognize that the consonant processing starts and the vowel combining process ends, the input value "0" can be processed down. In other words, the input value "105" is recognized as "a => a +. => A +. + ㅁ". In this case, the use of the "+" symbol means that the word appears as a vowel under the Gore (ie '.').

Of the three vowel elements "ㅡ", ".", And "ㅣ" used in the three vowel method, "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" exist as vowels themselves, but only the vowel element "." Is combined with other vowel elements. Represents a Korean vowel. It is shown here that the vowel element "." Can be used to enter a single vowel (eg, "ㅏ"), which is often used in modern languages, rather than entering the under which is rarely used in modern Korean.

Using the [0] button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned, it is recommended to enter a modern Korean vowel "ㅏ" which is most frequently used and similar in pronunciation to Haha. Would be preferred.

Entering the vowel "ㅏ" with a button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned is similar to entering a lower button with a button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned. For example, when "1" is pressed when entering "105", the system recognizes the consonant "a", and if the next "0" is pressed, the system will primarily ('0 **' or '000' If it is input, it becomes consonant process). Similarly for the input value "10", the system displays "ㄱ +." ) It can be recognized as an intermediate step of inputting "ger", "cha", "high", or "bridge", but the next time the consonant input "5" is entered (or a space to terminate the vowel combining process) And activating other functions), the system can complete the vowel combining process and recognize the input value "0" as the promised vowel "ㅏ". That is, for the input value "105", it is recognized as "a => a +. => Sense". If another vowel (eg 'ㅣ') is entered, it is obvious that the total input value will be "105 # = kamikaze".

The process of the example "105 = persimmon" is actually the same as the process of "a => period => is => persimmon" for "1 # 05". When " 5 " is pressed after " 1 # 0 ", the end of the vowel combining process is recognized and the vowel "# " However, when inputting "ㅏ = ㅣ +. = # 0", the system outputs according to the input value similar to the process of writing the vowel "ㅏ".

It is true that typing the vowel “ㅏ” which is frequently used as the vowel element “.” Is less natural than typing the vowel element “ㅣ” and “.” In sequence. But the vowel element "." This is not a problem since you can enter "ㅏ" as a combination of "ㅣ" and "." (Ie '# 0' in the drawing) at the same time as entering the vowel "ㅏ" by itself.

Here, the input of the gore down can be input as "00". Likewise, if you press "100", the system will enter "A +. +." As you type "bridge" or "bran". If no vowel buttons can be combined with the next input, but the activation of other functions that can terminate the consonant or other vowel combining processes is recognized, the system will set "100" to "a + down". To be recognized. "1005" = "a + down + ㅁ". Again, if there is less need for input under Gore, other vowels, such as vowel "ㅓ", which are frequently used, can be input as two [0] buttons.

Some users may be less preferred because of lack of intuition about typing "ㅏ" instead of the lower element as a vowel element ".". For these users, you can use the [0] button 1 key to enter the lower key, and the [0] button 2 key to enter the vowel “ㅏ”. The process is the same as described above, so it is omitted. In this case, you can input "동시에 = | +. = # 0" at the same time. Entering the vowel “ㅏ” with two [0] buttons (ie '00') assigned the vowel element “.” Is also more convenient than typing “ㅣ +. = # 0” for ease of input. The degree is high.

Whether the button assigned to the above vowel element "." ([0] button in the drawing) should be entered as "1" with one stroke or by entering Goa under one and entering "ㅏ" with two strokes. You can set it to your preference. Furthermore, it is possible to enter a vowel other than "ㅏ", which can also be set by the user.

Since the vowel "ㅏ" is overwhelmingly frequently used in Korean, it is preferable to enter "ㅏ" rather than other vowels in order to be able to input arbitrary vowels used in modern languages by using the vowel element "." . The vowel "ㅏ" has a frequency of about 22% of all Korean vowels. Also, if the frequency of use is "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", these three vowels are about 50% of the total frequency of Korean usage. In other words, it is possible to input "ㅏ" as a vowel element ".", Which means that about half of the actual vowels can be input by one button.

The above description is based on the three vowel method, but the same can be applied to the four vowel method. That is, the vowel elements "." In the vowel combining process (combination start to vowel end) in FIGS. 4-7 and 4-8. If only the recognized vowel can be treated as a promised vowel (eg 'ㅏ'), and if the vowel element ".." is recognized (ie the [8] button input) it will be accepted as another single vowel (eg below or below). 'ㅓ'). In addition, it can be applied to the input system using the vowel elements currently used in Korea.

Since the vowel combining process means from vowel combination start to vowel combination end, you cannot combine other vowels in addition to these vowel inputs. This means that you cannot enter "vo" as a combination of the vowel element "|" and again with "vo" as "10". "10 #" becomes "ㅓ" because the vowel combining process starts when "0" is entered and the vowel combining process continues when "#" is pressed. In other words, the above description can only be applied to vowel inputs that are used alone, not to vowels that change by combining vowel elements (eg vowel "ㅏ" or "probably + word termination" in "Sense"). "ㅏ").

Here, the vowel element ".", Which does not exist as a vowel alone, is a vowel element. Vowels created by combining "-", "ㅣ" and vowel elements that exist as vowels that can be changed by additional vowel combinations such as "ㅏ", "ㅑ" ... It is called. Where "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" are both vowel elements and element collections.

4.11. Vowel input method using three vowels of modern Korean (eg "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ") and Korean input system using the same

The most common vowels in Korean are three vowels in the order of "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ". In particular, the vowel "ㅏ" is the most frequently used vowel. Hereinafter, a method of processing Korean vowels using three vowels including "-", "ㅣ" and any one vowel (in the example, vowel "ㅏ") is shown. As introduced in the previous application, 10 basic consonants of Korean and 13 alphabets of three vowels, “ㅏ”, “ㅣ”, “ㅡ” are used as basic alphabets, so in a keypad with 12 buttons, one consonant per button Illustrate an example with a vowel. However, apart from these examples, the combination of the vowels presented next is different (in addition to the various consonant input methods presented in the earlier filings, consonant input methods from other systems, as well as any new consonants that will emerge in the future). The same can be applied to the input method). It is apparent that the contents mentioned in other chapters of the present application below may also be applicable to the following.

In view of the invention in the prior application, Figs. 4-10 and 4-11 are examples in which a vowel "ㅏ" and a consonant "ㅎ" are provided in one button. In FIG. 4-10, in order to keep the keypad concise, the vowel “안에” is displayed in the number “0” of the [0] button, which is the same as in FIG. 4-11. In the example of FIGS. 4-10, the vowels "-", "ㅏ", and "ㅣ" may be selected / input by the [*] button, the [0] button, and the [#] button, respectively. Of course, this is only one example, and it is easy to see that modifications are possible. For convenience, the [*] button is the [*] button or the vowel “” button, the [0] button is the [0] button or the vowel “ㅏ” button, and the [#] button is the [#] button or the vowel “ㅣ” button. Let's call it. In particular, the [0] button assigned with the consonant "ㅎ" is sometimes called the "ㅎ" button.

In FIG. 4-10 and FIG. 4-11, the [0] button is primarily applied as a "ㅏ" button, and thus a consonant ("ㅎ" in the example drawing) is not assigned to the button to which "ㅏ" is assigned. If not, the same is true. It can also be applied when consonants are assigned to the rest of the vowel buttons or when they are assigned with any control. However, the input of consonants assigned with the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" should not affect the input of the vowels. ("ㅋ = ㄱ + ㅡ + ㅡ = 1 **" Next, the vowel "-" takes advantage of the non-consecutive nature, which does not affect the input of the vowel as a result-a property that is treated as "deterministic" as mentioned.

The following shows an example of inputting the remaining vowels using the three vowels presented in the present invention.

In Table 1, enter Korean vowel using three vowel elements "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", but "." Is the same as entering the vowel "ㅏ" with the assigned button1. In Table 1, for example, it is defined as "TT = ㅡ + ㅏ", which means that the entire input value ("ㅡ + ㅏ" is used by using the property that the vowel "ㅏ" after the vowel "ㅡ" in Korean does not appear consecutively). You can think of the ") as defined by the system as a vowel" tt ". In the case of the vowel "분해", it is decomposed into "수" and "ㅣ", so it can be natural to enter "0 #", but it is defined as the collection "ㅓ = 0 #", so "ㅐ = # 0 # "To be entered. You can think similarly about defining combinations for the remaining vowels. According to the definition in Table 1, 21 Korean vowels can be entered without ambiguity.

When the vowel process (that is, the vowel combination process) is started by recognizing that one vowel button is pressed in Table 1, when the corresponding input value of Table 1 is detected, the system identifies the vowel. do. For example, after one of the consonant buttons [1] to [9] is pressed in Figs. 4-10, or after a consonant input is recognized by a series of inputs (eg "1 ** = ㅋ"). ) If one of the vowel buttons ([#], [0], [#] button in Fig. 4-10) is pressed, the system recognizes that the vowel processing is started and the input of the vowel button and subsequent By detecting the input of a series of input values (collection buttons), it is possible to identify the vowel corresponding to the input value according to Table 1.

However, in the case of vowels circled in (collection) confirmation (possible) in Table 1, it can be determined that the vowel is for the input of the input value, but the rest can be different vowels according to the next input value. have. For example, if "0 #" is pressed, the system can recognize the input of "ㅓ" according to Table 1, but if "#" is pressed again, the system will enter the entire input value "0 #". # "Will be recognized as the vowel" ㅔ ". In Table 1, the system adds another input value after "0 ##" so that the system does not recognize the entire input value as another input value. Therefore, the system uses the vowel "ㅔ" for input value "0 ##". It can be recognized definitely.

" 혹 은 "ㄱㆍ" 혹은 "ㄱ@" 혹은 "가" 등의 형태 중의 임의의 한가지로 출력될 수 있다. 다음 입력으로 자음버튼이 입력되거나 자음의 입력이 인식되면(예를 들어 "1" 이 추가로 입력), 전체 입력값 "101"에서 중간에 입력된 "0"을 모음 "ㅏ"로 확정적으로 인식하고, "각"을 출력할 수 있는 것이다. 여기서 "ㅏ = 0" 으로 입 력하도로 하였으나, "#0" 으로 역시 "ㅏ"를 입력할 수 있도록 하는 것을 허용할 수 있다. Likewise, in Table 1, a vowel without a circle in the Confirmation (Possible) column may be recognized as another vowel according to the following input value. The vowel "ㅏ = 0" can also be a vowel such as "ㅓ", "ㅕ", "ㅗ", "ㅛ", ... depending on the following input, so the vowel [0] button is pressed after the consonant. When (eg "10"), the output is "ㄱ"

"Or" a. "Or" a @ "or" ga ", etc., can be output in any one of the following forms. In addition, it is possible to reliably recognize "0" input in the middle of the total input value "101" as the vowel "ㅏ" and output "angle", where "ㅏ = 0" is inputted. You can also allow "#" to be entered as "# 0" as well.

") 하여 줄 수 있으며, 확정적으로 인식되는 순간 다시 적절하게 표시(예. "각")하여 줄 수 있는 것이다. 마찬가지로 "10"이 입력된 후 단어의 종료(예. 공백, 입력의 종료 등)가 인식되면, 시스템은 기 입력 된 "10 = 가"로 확정적으로 인식할 수 있는 것이다. 표1에서는 일부의 경우만 입 력중 출력형태를 예시하였다. Here, the system is completely separate from the problem of "recognizing" the corresponding vowel for a particular set of inputs (including all cases where the recognition is temporarily recognized and deterministic) and "outputting" (eg displaying on a liquid crystal) the recognized content. Is a problem. (Depending on the system, there may be cases where it is not necessary to output the recognized contents, and whether or not to output the recognized contents is an optional matter.) For the temporarily recognized contents (here, the recognized collection), As such, the output may be in a suitable form, taking into account that it may vary depending on the next input value (eg

"), And can be displayed appropriately again (eg" angle ") as soon as it is finally recognized. Likewise, the end of a word (eg a space, the end of an input, etc.) after" 10 "is entered. If is recognized, the system can recognize the input “10 = a.” Table 1 exemplifies the output form during input only in some cases.

FIG. 11-1 is a diagram presented by the applicant of the present application. The input value input through the keypad in the client is interpreted by referring to the memory in the controller, and the interpreted result (string) is displayed. display on the display unit, or send to the server through a sender. The problem of displaying the interpreted character string on the display unit (eg liquid crystal) and transmitting it to the server side is an optional problem separately from the process of interpreting the input value. Also in the hardware configuration, unlike the drawing, the problem may be included in the control unit to the memory, which is not absolute. Fig. 11-2 also shows an example of transmitting an input value from a client side to a server side and interpreting the input value on the server side in a diagram presented in a previous application.

Here, the right arrow "→" is applied instead of the vowel "-" and the down arrow "↓" is applied instead of the vowel "ㅣ", and the effect is similar. In Table 1, arrows "→" and "↓" are applied instead of the collections "ㅡ" and "ㅣ". Instead of the vowels "-" and "ㅣ", it would be better for the user-friendliness to see the vowels "-" and "|" rather than "→" and "↓" respectively on the keypad buttons. The same is true in the vowel input method using four vowels described later. Furthermore, it is also possible to use shapes such as horizontal lines and vertical lines similar to the vowels ㅡ and ㅣ.

Applicants proposed in the earlier application to enter the collection down with "." Assigned to the [0] button in Figures 4-5, eventually using the [0] button as the "down button", the rest of the collection In combination, the three vowels "-", "|", "." The method of entering all the vowels with the three vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", and "ㅣ" is also assigned to a button assigned to the bottom of the vowel (indicated by "." In the drawing) (Figs. 4-5 and 4-9). This is essentially the same as the case with the [0] button), where you enter the most frequently used vowel "ㅏ".

Therefore, it is obvious that various properties suggested in the applicant's application can be used. For example, the input of the lattice sound / hard consonant sound by the repeated pressing of the button to which the basic consonant is assigned, the input of the vowel by the pressing of the vowel button repeatedly, the lattice sound by the control processing method (that is, combined with the vowel button) / Consonant inputs, vowels assigned with vowels (eg "ㅎ"), and so on. It is also possible to process a continuous input "00" into an abbreviated vowel at the beginning of the vowel processing.

For example, if two inputs of the [0] button are promised as the vowel “ㅓ”, the first “1” input is recognized as “a” and the second “0” input is collected. Recognizes that the process has started, temporarily recognizes the vowel "ㅓ" when the third "0" is input, and recognizes the end of the vowel processing when the fourth "1" input is input, and recognizes the continuous input "00". Recognized as "Y", it can recognize as input "1001" as "shade". In the lattice sound input in FIGS. 4-10 and 4-11, input by "ㅋ = a + {beep control} = a + ㅡ + ㅡ = 1 **" by the control processing method to which the post-control input is applied. You can do that. If up to "1 *" is entered, the system recognizes it as "that" but then sees the "*" entered in succession so that the system can be deterministically recognized as "1 ** = ㅋ". will be. If "*" is entered as the fourth input value after "101", the system recognizes the input value as "gag". This is so natural as the Hangul Automata on the 2 Beol keyboard. Next, when "*" is input as the fifth input value, the last input "1 **" in "... 1 **" is recognized as "ㅋ" and is confirmed, so the entire input value "101 **" "For +" will be recognized. (註: When using Unicode system, 'ㅋ' should be displayed as one letter as the final support of 'A', but it is indicated as 'Ga + ㅋ' because only the KSC 5601 completion type is supported in the JPO electronic document editor. ) Means that "1 **" is set to "ㅋ" at the moment "1 **" is detected among a series of input values "... 1 **", that is, the [ㅋ] button is pressed on the PC keyboard. It can be treated and recognized as if it were done.

Similarly, in the input of the hard sound, it can be set as "ㄲ = a + {sound control} = 1 ## = a + | + | The input of "ㅎ" also regards "ㅎ" as a modified alphabet of "ㅇ" (lattice sound) and input "ㅎ = ㅇ + {beep control} = ㅇ + ㅡ + ㅡ = 8 **", or "ㅎ" can be regarded as a variant of "ㅏ" and can be entered without ambiguity as "ㅎ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅡ = 0 **". In addition, at the beginning of the word, "ㅎ" is replaced by one [0] button, and a collection of "ㅡ", "ㅣ", "ㅏ", "TT", "ㅚ" (collection "ㅏ"-ie [ After the vowels other than the [0] button-can be combined into other vowels are identified, being able to enter "ㅎ" with the [0] button 1 is the same as described in other embodiments. It is also possible to allow "0" or "8 **" to be recognized as "ㅎ" even if it is possible to enter "ㅎ" with one button assigned to "ㅎ". You can also apply the modified alphabet "3 + other" input method to enter more than 3 strokes (e.g. "ㄱ = 1", "ㅋ = 111", "ㄲ = 1111" or "ㄱ = 1", "ㄲ = 111 "," ㅋ = 1111 ". This is very rare but can be ambiguous. Also, as mentioned earlier, lattice, light or falling consonants (referred to as variants of the basic alphabet) Consonant, for example, a simple repetition selection method can be applied to input of dropped consonant "ㅎ" for basic consonant "ㅇ" and dropped consonant "ㄹ" for basic consonant "b" For example, a = 1, k = 11, k = 111 or a = 1, k = 11, k = 111 or b = b, r = b + b (a variation of "b" from "b" Alphabetical (if it is considered to be a lattice or hard)) or ㅇ = ㅇ, ㅎ = ㅇ + ㅇ (ㅇ = 8, ㅎ = 88 based on Figs. 4-10), but by the control method Compared to the case of input without ambiguity, inputting by modified alphabet (lattice, light consonant, falling consonant, etc.) "3+" other input method and simple repetition selection method causes ambiguity, There is no advantage, such as no difference, etc. The proposed vowel input technique is a specific consonant input mentioned or not mentioned in the present invention. It can be applied in a liquor applied separately, as well as the said, more information can be equally applied in the content of type "trestle" elements of a collection. "" Described above is apparent.

When the above consonant and vowel input methods are applied, consonants and vowels can be identified "deterministic" with respect to the input value. Therefore, combining Korean consonants and vowels constitutes Korean syllables (lump letters). Yes, it can be handled easily by applying the consonant combination automata on the 2 beol keyboard. As a deterministic input method, the system can identify consonants and vowels, and there is no difficulty in understanding them.

It is said that "ㅓ" can be input by pressing the [ㅏ] button (that is, the [0] button) twice by repeatedly pressing a specific vowel button. That is, "00 = #" or "0 # = #". If you enter "00" only as "00", you can define "0 #" as "ㅐ" instead of "ㅓ" and enter as "ㅐ = 0 #". However, when "0 ## = ㅔ", when "0 #" is pressed, there is a point that "ㅐ" different from "ㅔ" may be displayed. For example, if it is pressed up to "10 #", it will be recognized (and displayed) as "dog", and if "#" is pressed once more, it will be recognized as "10 ## = crab". At this time, the user may press “ㅣ” once more after inputting “dog”, and the user may recall that the center point (or a small horizontal stroke) of “ㅐ” is pushed inward to become “ㅔ”. As mentioned in the previous application, the input of "ㅑ" can also be defined as two consecutive presses of the "ㅏ" button, ie "ㅑ = ㅏ + ㅏ", but this is where "여기서 = ㅏ + ㅣ" is entered. This is difficult (since you have to enter "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅣ").

In Table 1, "ㅘ = ㅘ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ = 0 * # 0" is defined. In addition, it can be defined as "ㅘ = [ㅗ + ㅏ] = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ = 0 * 0". Marked in "[...]" is a decomposed representation of the double vowels for better understanding. With this applied, when the [0] button is pressed after the vowel "ㅗ = ㅏ + ㅡ = 0 * (bottom ie the vowel" ㅗ "which cannot be combined with '.') Together with the [0] button, It becomes difficult to input the assigned consonant ("ㅎ" in the example) with one [0] button. However, it is possible to enter "ㅎ" by other means (eg 0 **, 8 **, 0 *, .. etc.). Likewise, it is possible to define "ㅙ = [ㅗ + ㅐ] = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ = 0 * 0 #". The definition of "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= 0 * 0)" and "ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * 0 #)" are defined in Table 1 as "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= 0 * # 0) ", which can be applied at the same time as defined as" ㅏ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * # 0 #) ", and only one may be selectively applied. It can also be set according to the user's choice. Defining "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= 0 * 0)" and "ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * 0 #)" means that there are fewer input strokes. , Additionally (optionally) enter "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= 0 * # 0)" and "ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * # 0 #)" It would be desirable to be able to. Defining "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= 0 * 0)" and "ㅙ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 * 0 #)" means "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00) "(ie, even if it is not defined as" ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00) ").

For reference, in the Korean keypad of FIG. 4-5 illustrated in the previous application, vowel elements are arranged from left to right in the order of "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", which increases the naturalness of the input. do. Looking closely at "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", the vowels "음", "ㅟ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ",. . We can observe pattern of double vowels. On the contrary, if they are arranged in the order of "ㅣ", ".", "ㅡ" as in the keypad of the three temples, the vowels are not observed well. In addition, even in the input of the double vowels, there is a disadvantage that can not be entered naturally as flowing from left to right. Likewise, entering "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= 0 * 0)" reduces the number of strokes than typing "ㅘ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= 0 * # 0)" There is also meaning, but it increases the naturalness of the input. In the illustrated Korean keypad of FIG. 4-10, the Korean vowels are arranged from left to right in the order of "ㅡ", "ㅏ", and "ㅣ". To input "... # 0", the right button ([ #] Button) and then the left button ([0] button) is pressed to hinder naturalness.

Further, by setting "ㅓ = 00", it can be applied to a double vowel input such as "ㅝ" and "ㅞ" as in the case of "ㅏ = 0". For example, in Table 1, "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + | = * 00 #" is defined, but "ㅓ" in "ㅝ" is set to "ㅏ + ㅏ = 00" and "ㅝ = [ ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ = * 000 " It is also defined as "ㅞ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ" in Table 1, but "에" in "ㅞ" is set to "ㅏ + ㅏ = 00" and "ㅞ = [ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ ] = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ = * 000 # ". As in the case of "ㅘ" and "ㅙ", "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ (= * 000)" and "ㅞ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= * 000 #)" Apart from defining "별 = ㅏ + ㅏ = 00", it can be applied at the same time as defining "ㅝ" and "ㅞ" in Table 1, or optionally only one can be applied. If you define the input of "ㅓ" only as "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00)" and not as "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 #)", you can use "ㅐ = ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 #)" You may be able to enter it.

"ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ (= * 000)", "ㅞ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= * 000 #)", when pressed to "1 * 00", " If you press the [0] button once again, it will be recognized as “Go”. When [#] is pressed once again, it is recognized as an "arc". Likewise, in this case, "* 000" means the input of a normal vowel (that is, "ㅝ"), so the vowel "ㅠ (= * 00)" followed by "ㅎ" It is obvious that the "" "cannot be entered with the button 1 to which the consonant) is assigned.

- 숫자 '0' 안에 'ㅏ' - 가 배치) 을 "아래아(.)"처럼 연상하여 나머지 모음을 입력할 수 있는데, "ㅑ"는 음 가를 기준으로 조합하여 입력하게 되는 점이 있다. 마찬가지로 표1에서 "ㅒ = ㅣ +ㅏ+ㅏ+ㅣ (=#00#)" 으로 되어 있으나, 이를 "ㅒ = [ㅑ+ㅣ] = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅣ (= #0#)" 으로 정의하여 입력할 수 있다 ("ㅐ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅣ"가 아닌 "ㅐ = ㅏ+ㅣ"로 입력한다 는 전제). 마찬가지로 모음 "ㅑ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅏ"로 하는 것과 "ㅑ = ㅣ+ㅏ"로 하는 것, 그리고 모음 "ㅒ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅏ+ㅣ"로 하는 것과 "ㅒ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅣ"로 하는 것은 동시에 적용될 수도 있고 선택적으로 적용될 수도 있다. "ㅑ = ㅣ+ㅏ"로 "ㅒ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅣ"로 하면 모음 "ㅑ"와 "ㅒ"의 입력타수가 표1의 경우보다 1타씩 줄어들게 된다. 이 내용을 선출원에서 기술하지 않은 이유는 모음 "ㅑ"와 "ㅒ"는 사용빈도 가 많지 않은 모음이므로 입력타수 감소에는 많은 영향이 없기 때문이다. Similarly, "ㅏ" can be entered using the [ㅏ] button ([0] button in the figure) to which "ㅏ" is assigned, or "ㅏ = | + ㅏ (= # 0)" (section 4.10). And Section 4.11). When inputting only "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00)", the same as "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 #)" instead of "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 #)", "ㅏ = If you define only "ㅏ = ㅏ (= 0)" rather than "| + ㅏ (= # 0)", it is possible to enter another alphabet with a combination of "ㅣ + ㅏ". For example, it is defined as "ㅑ = | + ㅏ + # (= # 00)", but you can define an input rule to input as "ㅑ = | + ㅏ (= # 0)". The melody of the vowel "음" is "ㅣ + ㅏ" that is known to those who have received a certain level of education. However, enter the vowel using the vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", and "ㅣ", which are the most frequently used vowels.

-You can enter the rest of the vowels by associating 'ㅏ'-with the number '0' as "bottom (.)", Where "ㅑ" is entered by combining the values. Similarly, in Table 1, "ㅒ = ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= # 00 #)", but this is defined as "ㅒ = [ㅑ + ㅣ] = ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= # 0 #)" You can enter it (assuming you enter "로 = ㅏ + ㅣ" rather than "ㅐ = | + ㅏ + ㅣ"). Similarly, the vowel "ㅑ = ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅏ" and the "ㅑ = ㅣ + ㅏ", the vowel "ㅒ = ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ" and the "ㅒ = ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ" May be applied simultaneously or selectively. If "ㅑ = ㅣ + ㅏ" and "ㅒ = ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ", the input strokes of the vowels "ㅑ" and "ㅒ" will be reduced by one stroke than in the case of Table 1. The reason why this is not described in the earlier application is that the vowels "ㅑ" and "모음" are not frequently used collections and therefore do not have much effect on the reduction of input strokes.

In the vowel input using three vowel elements "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", when "." Button is entered after any consonant (eg "ㄱ"), it is temporarily displayed as "ㄱ." If "ㅡ" is entered in the ". + ㅡ" is recognized as "하여" "high" is displayed. In other words, full Korean characters are not displayed in the middle of input. However, if you enter a vowel with a combination of modern Korean vowels (in this example, "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ"), the button with the "ㅏ" When it is lost, it has the advantage of displaying full Korean characters such as "ga". Even when "ㅓ = ㅏ + ㅏ" is applied, "A" is displayed for the "10" input, and when "0" is pressed once again, a complete Korean character may be displayed, such as "Gar". Of course, the problem of recognizing and identifying a specific alphabet (or Korean character) by a specific procedure (algorithm) and the display of this recognized specific alphabet (or Korean character) is a separate problem.

In addition, it is natural that the input method (input procedure) and the question of how to write a Hangul alphabet or a code form representing the Hangul alphabet in a proper form on the keypad buttons for the input method are separate problems. For example, as shown in Fig. 4-5, the vowel element "." The notation on the keypad buttons can be modified, just as it is possible to enter a vowel by considering the [0] button as a "ㅏ" button on this keypad (the red dot in the number "0"). The previous application stated that the input method can be applied even to keypads that are not marked with the Hangul alphabet. Examples of some variations of keypad notation are shown in FIGS. 4-12. Figures 4-12 are keypads in which "+" is inserted in the number "0 (Zero)" so that the collection "ㅏ" and "ㅓ" can be represented simultaneously. Figure 4-13 also shows the number "0 (zero). This is an example of keypad that put "-ㅏ" in ")" and associate "연" with "ㅓ". In addition, as shown in Fig. 4-14, the case of the keypad that reminds "ㅏ" and "ㅓ" by inserting the "H" shape, which is a form of "0" and "ㅓ" left and right in the number "0 (zero)", as shown in FIG. to be. The same is true for the form that is temporarily displayed during input. 4-15 are examples of displaying "ㅏ" and "ㅓ" respectively. In other cases, as shown in Figs. 4-15, the number " 0 " may be separately indicated. In addition, various modifications are possible, and all modifications other than the ones applying the vowel combination method of the present invention are also within the scope of the present invention. Is self-explanatory. In the exemplary drawing, "ㅎ" is displayed in a light gray color, which means that "ㅎ" may not be indicated as mentioned.

를 표시할 수 있다 (도 4-13 에서와 마찬가지로 "ㅏ"를 우선 연상할 수 있도록 하여 좌측 왼편의 수평선을 회색으로 한 사례로 회색으로 표시된 부분이 없는 경우도 포함함). 또는 해당버튼을 이용하여 1상하향모음을 입력하는 경우

형태를 버튼상에 표시할 수 있다. 다른 경우에서와 마찬가지로 입력 중간에 표시되는 형태로 사용될 수도 있음은 마찬가지이다. 해당 버튼을 이용하여 우선적으로 입력되는 모음에 따라 첫번째 제시한

형태의 좌우대칭형 또는 두번째 제시한

형태의 상하대칭형이 이용될 수 있다. (이러한 형상이 [0] 버튼에 표시될 경우) 다른 사례에서와 마찬가지로 숫자 "0" 이 함께 표시되거나 함께 표시되지 않을 수 있고, 역시 "ㅎ" 도 함께 표시되거나 표시되지 않을 수도 있다. 제시하는 형상은 어느 광고에 나오는 "우주의 질서와 땅의 조화" 또 거기에 인간중심(人間中心)의 사상을 담고자 한 것이다. If you enter one or more of the "1 up and down vowels (ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅗ, TT)" using a particular button (eg [0] button), you can additionally present As follows. In the variation of the "-ㅏ" form shown in Figure 4-13

Can be displayed (as in FIG. 4-13, "ㅏ" can be recalled first so that the horizontal line on the left side is grayed out, including the case where there is no grayed out portion). Or when inputting 1 up and down vowel using the corresponding button

The shape can be displayed on the button. As in other cases, it can be used in the form displayed in the middle of the input. According to the vowel entered first by using the corresponding button

Symmetrical or second presented

Vertical symmetry of the form can be used. (When such a shape is displayed on the [0] button) As in the other cases, the number "0" may or may not be displayed together, and also "ㅎ" may or may not be displayed together. The image presented is intended to contain the thought of "center of space and earth" and human-centered thought in an advertisement.

형태 또는

형태에서 각각 왼쪽, 아래쪽에 흐린 회색으로 표현된 분은, 다른 키패드 도면에서 "ㅎ"을 표시할 수도 있고 표시하지 않을 수도 있다고 한 것처럼, 표시될 수도 있고 표시되지 않을 수도 있음은 쉽게 알 수 있다.

형태에서 좌측의 회색부분을 제외하면, 도4-10 에서 동그라미 또는 숫자 "0" 안에 "ㅏ" 가 있는 형상과 유사하게, "ㅏ"에 동그라미 또는 숫자 "0"이 걸쳐있는 형상이 된다.

형태는 도4-13에서 "-ㅏ" 에 동그라미 또는 숫자"0"이 걸쳐 있는 모양인데, 마찬가지로 도4-12의 "+"에 동그라미 또는 숫자 "0"이 걸쳐있는 모양으로 변형될 수도 있음은 자명하다.

Form or

It is easy to see that the minutes, which are expressed in light gray on the left and bottom of the form, may or may not be displayed, as indicated by other keypad drawings may or may not be displayed.

Except for the gray portion on the left side of the form, similar to the shape with "4" in the circle or the number "0" in Fig. 4-10, the shape is a shape in which the circle or the number "0" spans the "ㅏ".

The shape is a shape in which the circle or the number "0" is spanned by "-ㅏ" in FIG. Self-explanatory

As mentioned, Korean characters can represent plain consonants (eg "ㄱ") and lattice sounds (eg "ㅋ") and Gyeongja (eg "ㄲ") corresponding to the consonants. Because of the similarity, the modified alphabet is hidden on the keypad, and only the flat consonants (eg "a") are displayed on the keypad, and the rest of the consonants are naturally associated with the input (eg control method, repeated selection method, modified alphabet). 3+ other input methods, etc.) It is also one of the great characteristics of Hangul that it is possible to construct a naturally simple keypad (minimum phoneme placed on the button), taking advantage of the characteristics of Hangul, the most scientific writing system on the planet. Of course. However, it is obvious that a keypad assigned with modified alphabets (lattice consonants, hard consonants, and falling consonants) along with basic consonants (flat consonants) may be included in the scope of the present invention. When the dropped consonant "ㅎ" is regarded as a modified alphabet of "ㅇ" (lattice or light consonant), "ㅇ" and "ㅎ" may be displayed together on the keypad. When considered as a variant alphabet (as mentioned in the earlier application, "ㅎ" may be the basic consonant), "b" and "ㄹ" may be displayed together. In the illustrated drawings, it is obvious that the modified alpha bets are written together with the flat consonants and the keypads displayed on the keypad buttons are also within the scope of the present invention. That is, only the lattice sound of the lattice sound and the hard consonant can be displayed on the keypad together with the flat consonant, and only the consonant sound can be displayed on the keypad button together with the flat consonant sound. It is also possible to display all. In addition, it is obvious that all the lattice sounds of some of the lattice sounds are additionally included with the flat consonants, or all of the lattice sounds are included in the scope of the present invention.

Applicant explained that all Korean keypads presented in the previous application and this application may be compatible. The structure of Hangul is composed of vowels on the left side of the consonants (ie, left-handed vowels) and vowels on the lower side (ie, box-bottomed). And in the notion of Korean people, "a" has the idea of "1", "b" for "2", and "c" for "3". This means that (1), (2), (3), (4),... I also write numbers, like "a", "me", "da", "la",… Or ㉠, ㉡, ㉢, ㉣,... It is easy to see even in writing. "A", "b", "c",... Original characters ㉠, ㉡, ㉢,.. The existence of this KSC5601 character set also proves this. That is, the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4... The buttons "a", "b", "c", "ㄹ"… in order. It is obvious that assigning a suffix is an optimal form consistent with our literary and numerical notion.

Another example was the use of numerals (not the Arabic numerals, but the Hanja one, two, three, four, five,…) that were used at the time of Hangeul consonants in the rudimentary ciphertext of the Joseon Dynasty. For example, "poetry" is expressed as "七 ㅣ" and "mer" as "五 ㅓ". In fact, it is very easy for a Korean to find out the original sentence by looking at a word or phrase that shows the number corresponding to the consonant position of Hangeul. This is true even for those who do not know these rules. For example, when a TV program called Survival History Quiz showed "三 ㅐ 五 ㅓ 四 ㅣ" in the Joseon Dynasty sentence and asked what it meant, "all" participants matched that the original sentence was "bald head". (Of course, the quiz participants didn't know the rule that indicated the first consonants numerically.)

Therefore, as shown in the applicant's drawing, assigning a flat consonant (in order) to a number button and a vowel to a button at the bottom corresponds to the numerical conception of Korean people associated with the consonant and also to the "box bottom model" Korean composition. It is self-evident. However, in Korea, keyboards of Samsung Electronics using three vowel elements "ㅡ", "." And "ㅣ" are widely used. Influenced by the giant keyboard of Samsung Electronics, some companies have a desire to put vowel buttons (or vowel element buttons or vowel buttons) on top of consonants. Although not preferable, the [*], [0], and [#] buttons at the bottom of the keypad are placed on top of the [1], [2], and [3] number buttons, as shown in FIGS. 4-16 and 4-17. Can configure the keyboard. The lower box model Jamo arrangement has been violated, but consonants can be assigned to the numeric buttons in order. It is obvious that the exemplary drawings are also included in the applicant's prior application category. In addition, in the exemplary drawing, the letters "han" or "ㅎ. ㄴ" ('.' Are below) of the "Hangul" can be seen. The word "ㅎ" in light gray means that "ㅎ" may not be displayed. However, by placing "ㅎ" on the [0] button, placing 10 flat consonants on the 10 number buttons ([1] to [0] buttons) means to accept the Korean standard keypad (KSC-xxxx). Have

The above is an example of inputting all vowels using three vowels "ㅏ", "ㅡ", and "ㅣ" which are the most frequently used in Korean (about 50% of the total vowel usage frequency). It is obvious that the same may be applied to all similar cases. For example, it may include applying any vowels (eg, any other vowels including "ㅏ" or "ㅗ", etc.) except for "o", "|", "ㅏ" instead of "ㅏ". When "ㅓ" is applied instead of "ㅏ", it can be "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ", and a combination of vowels is formed by using a vowel ("ㅓ") which replaces the vowel "ㅏ" in the table above. Just do it. However, since the vowel "ㅏ" is overwhelmingly used compared to other vowels (as mentioned, 22% of the total vowel frequency), the vowel "ㅏ" is not better than the vowel "보다" in terms of input efficiency.

A more generalized table 1 can be used to process a vowel using three vowels (and three vowel buttons) of the (element) collection "ㅡ", "ㅣ", and "X" as follows: In the table below, the vowel used as the vowel "X" out of the 19 vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" among Korean vowels is the button to which the vowel "X" is assigned (ie, the [X] button) 1 It is obvious that other inputs can be made.

collection 3 collections combined X X One ㅏ ㅣ + X 2 ㅐ ㅣ + X + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + X + X 4 ㅒ ㅣ + X + X + ㅣ 5 ㅓ X + ㅣ 6 ㅔ X + ㅣ + ㅣ 7 ㅕ X + X + ㅣ 8 ㅖ X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ X + ㅡ 10 ㅘ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X 11 ㅙ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X + ㅣ 12 ㅚ X + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ X + X + ㅡ 14 TT ㅡ + X 15 ㅝ ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅡ + X + ㅣ 18 ㅠ ㅡ + X + X 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

To make this more general, you can input a vowel by a combination similar to the above table using any of the three vowel buttons in Korean. For example, the vowels "A", "B", and "X" may be element collections, and the remaining vowels may be input by a combination similar to the following. It is also evident that the vowels "A", "B" and "X" can be entered with one button assigned to each vowel. For the convenience of the user and to minimize the number of input strokes, it would be desirable to use three vowels containing "-", "|" and "ㅏ".

collection 3 collections combined X X A A B B One ㅏ B + X 2 ㅐ B + X + B 3 ㅑ B + X + X 4 ㅒ B + X + X + B 5 ㅓ X + B 6 ㅔ X + B + B 7 ㅕ X + X + B 8 ㅖ X + X + B + B 9 ㅗ X + A 10 ㅘ X + A + B + X 11 ㅙ X + A + B + X + B 12 ㅚ X + A + B 13 ㅛ X + X + A 14 TT A + X 15 ㅝ A + X + X + B 16 ㅞ A + X + X + B + B 17 ㅟ A + X + B 18 ㅠ A + X + X 19 ㅡ 20 ㅢ A + B 21 ㅣ

As suggested, three vowels in Korean ("ㅏ", "ㅡ", "ㅣ") (and three vowel buttons) can be used to efficiently input vowels. Further examples of the vowel input method are as follows. The following example uses the vowels "ㅓ", "ㅡ" and "ㅣ". In this case, the control processing method is not applied to the input of the consonant consonants. (Because in the following example, the vowel entry rule sometimes has "Å" or "ㅣ")

collection Vowel decomposition 3 collections combined (B) Not applicable at application (A) (B) One ㅏ ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ or ㅓ + ㅓ 2 ㅐ ㅣ + ㅓ (ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (X)) ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ ㅏ + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 5 ㅓ ㅓ 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ B (B), ㅠ (B) 7 ㅕ ㅡ + ㅓ (ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ (X)) 8 ㅖ ㅕ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ ㅣ + ㅡ or ㅓ + ㅓ 10 ㅘ ㅗ + ㅏ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅚ + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅓ 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 14 TT ㅡ + ㅡ 15 ㅝ TT + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ or ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅞ (B-1) 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ or ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ or ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ B (B-2) 17 ㅟ TT + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ B (B), ㅠ (B) 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅟ (B) 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

Decomposition of the double vowel in the above "vowel decomposition" column is shown for clarity. Providing several (multiple) input rules for a vowel with (A), (B) and "or" shows that a variety of examples are possible.

One of the characteristics of the above example is to input "ㅏ", "ㅑ" by pressing the button "ㅣ" repeatedly, and "TT" and "ㅠ" by pressing the "" "button repeatedly. In other words, press the "ㅡ" button once to "ㅡ", press the second time to "TT", press three times to "ㅠ". (As described in the applicant's prior application, the same button can be pressed repeatedly, and the stroke can be added as the button is pressed to provide a natural input.)

Another feature is to enter the rest of the vowels using the horizontal and vertical lines of the vowels ㅡ and ㅣ. At this time, "ㅓ", "ㅢ", and "TT" are all combinations of "a horizontal line shape and a vertical line shape." It is reasonable to enter "ㅢ = ㅡ + ㅣ" among these vowels. The vowel "ㅓ" can be entered by itself with one button assigned to the "ㅓ", and the vowel "TT" can be entered naturally by pressing the "-" button repeatedly. In addition, the vowels "[= [ㅜ + ㅣ]" and "도" can also be expressed as "ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ", but "ㅕ = ㅡ + ㅡ" in "ㅟ" is the same as "ㅕ" By setting "로 = ㅡ + 않고" instead of = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ", it is possible to make" ㅟ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ". "ㅐ" is also set to "ㅑ = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ", not "ㅐ = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ".

The characteristics of the above example are the natural input of a vowel that contains the vowel "ㅓ" (for example, 모음, ㅕ, ㅖ, ㅝ, ㅞ, and even 모음, "ㅒ", "ㅙ", etc.). You can do it. In the case of "ㅕ", if you enter "ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ", the number of strokes is three strokes, and it becomes difficult to input "ㅟ = [ㅜ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ". Of course, if you set "ㅟ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ", you can also say "ㅕ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ", but the input method of the vowel "TT" is included in "ㅟ". It is not good in terms of simplicity, user convenience, WYSWYG, etc. because it is input in a different way from ㅡ).

In the above table, the meaning of "(B) not applicable" means that the vowels "ㅔ", "ㅟ", and (B) of "ㅠ" are all "ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ", so they apply to only one vowel. It means you can do it.

The above example can be modified to change to "로" and "ㅛ" by pressing the "-" button repeatedly, or to change to "ㅓ" and "ㅕ" by pressing the "ㅣ" button repeatedly. (One or both of them) However, it will not be as good in terms of natural input and user convenience as shown in the above example.

In the above example, except for the case where the vowel "ㅡ" or "ㅣ" appears consecutively at the beginning of the vowel process, the input method is to input the modified alphabet (lattice / hard consonants, etc.) by the control method. It may also be applied optionally, provided that it does not conflict with the input rules of the case where the variant alphabet is entered by the control method. Similarly, any of the input cases in Table 1, etc., may optionally be applied to the above cases as long as they do not conflict with the above cases (ie, they are not defined identically for other vowels). It is obvious that this is applicable throughout the present invention.

Next, enter "위", "ㅕ" and "ㅏ", "ㅑ" by repeatedly pressing the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" similarly to the above. This is an example of inputting the remaining vowels using a combination of vertical lines, but using three vowel buttons of "ㅏ", "ㅡ" and "ㅣ".

collection Vowel decomposition 3 collections combined (B) Not applicable when applied (A) (B) One ㅏ ㅏ ㅣ + ㅣ ㅛ (A), ㅑ (A-4) 2 ㅐ ㅏ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅏ + ㅡ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ or ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ 5 ㅓ ㅏ + ㅏ 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ B (B), ㅠ (B) 7 ㅕ ㅡ + ㅏ or ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ or ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ or ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅟ (A) 8 ㅖ ㅕ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ or ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ 9 ㅗ ㅣ + ㅡ 10 ㅘ ㅗ + ㅏ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅏ 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 14 TT ㅡ + ㅡ 15 ㅝ TT + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ or ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ or ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ A (A-2) 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ or ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ or ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ TT + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ B (B), ㅠ (B) 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅟ (B) 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

The frequency of use of the vowels "ㅡ", "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" is about 40% of the total collection frequency, and the frequency of the collection "ㅏ", "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" is about 50%, so "ㅏ" Using "," ㅡ "," ㅣ "can be efficient in terms of input stroke. The advantage is that you can naturally enter vowels containing the vowel "ㅏ" (eg "ㅐ", "ㅑ", "ㅒ", "ㅘ", "ㅙ", etc.). However, in order to input "위해서는 = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ", there is a disadvantage of not inputting "ㅕ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ". Therefore, if you input "ㅕ = ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ", it will become "ㅏ", "ㅓ", "ㅕ" as you press the "ㅏ" button.

As described above, only one of the input methods for a vowel can be applied or several can be applied at the same time. However, likewise, if there are multiple vowels with the same input (the same vowel combination in the above example), only one is possible.

In (A) of "ㅝ" input, "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ" means that there is no Korean vowel that combines "ㅏ" after "vo", so enter "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ" It is shown that he can reduce the number of strokes. However, it is a disadvantage in terms of simplicity and consistency of input rules. Therefore, at the same time as "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ", as in "B" input (B), "ㅝ = [TT + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ" can be entered. At the same time, it is also possible to use a combination of horizontal and vertical lines of the vowels "-" and "|" for the input of "ㅝ".

Also, as mentioned above, it is obvious that the keypads of Fig. 4 are compatible. (For example, the input method described in 4-10 can be applied in 4-9)

As a similar example, it uses three vowels of modern Korean, among them using the vowels "ㅏ", "ㅡ", "ㅣ" and "반복", "ㅕ", "ㅖ" by repeatedly pressing the "ㅣ" button. Enter "TT", "ㅠ" by pressing the "-" button repeatedly, "ㅑ" by pressing the "ㅏ" button repeatedly, "ㅗ", "ㅛ" is horizontal / vertical line type A combination of "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" (that is, "ㅗ = ㅣ + ㅡ", "ㅛ = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ") is a collection of 10 basic collections (ie, ㅏ, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ). , ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ) and the rest of the vowels are shown as a combination of these vowels.

collection Vowel decomposition 3 collections combined (B) Not applicable when applied (A) (B) One ㅏ ㅏ 2 ㅐ ㅏ + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅏ + ㅏ 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ 5 ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ 7 ㅕ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ 8 ㅖ ㅕ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ ㅣ + ㅡ 10 ㅘ ㅗ + ㅏ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅏ 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 14 TT ㅡ + ㅡ 15 ㅝ ㅜ + ㅓ ㅠ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ or ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅠ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ or ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ TT + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

In the above example, the combination of the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" was used only for "ㅗ" and "ㅛ" which were not entered by pressing the "-" button repeatedly among the 10 basic collections. In addition, a combination of "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", a horizontal / vertical line collection, was used for the input of "+" as "ㅔ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ". If you do not use "ㅕ = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ" and do "모음 = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ" with a combination of vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] =" ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ". All of the vowels other than the 10 basic vowels are entered as a combination of the 10 basic vowels entered above. However," ㅞ = [TT + ㅔ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ "ㅣ" included in "ㅞ" is "ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ". It can be seen that an input rule that is generally recognizable is applied.

For the input of a vowel using a combination of "-" and "ㅣ", which are horizontal vowels, including "ㅗ", "ㅛ", "ㅔ", and the like, the input rule as shown in Table 1 Of course, it can be applied.

Further examples of inputting Korean vowels using three vowels (and three vowel buttons) in Korean are as follows. First of all, 21 vowels used in modern Korean are classified according to vertical / horizontal form for convenience.

"ㅡ" is called "horizontal vowel" for convenience, and "ㅣ" is called "vertical vowel" for convenience. "ㅘ", "ㅙ", "ㅚ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ", "ㅟ", and "ㅢ" containing "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" are called "vertical horizontal vowels." "ㅗ", "ㅛ", "TT", and "ㅠ" in the form of small strokes are called "horizontal (basic) type collections", and in the form of small strokes including "ㅣ" "ㅏ", "ㅐ", "ㅑ", "ㅒ", "ㅓ", "ㅔ", "ㅕ", and "ㅖ" are called "vertical (basic) type collections".

In addition, the 10 basic vowels (ㅏ, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, TT, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ) are classified as follows. "ㅏ", "ㅑ" means right vowel, "ㅓ", "ㅕ" means left vowel, "ㅗ", "ㅛ" means up vowel, "TT", " ㅠ "is a downward vowel, and the basic" ㅡ "and" ㅣ "can be said to be an unscented vowel. Divided further, "ㅏ" with one small stroke added to the right is called "1-right vowel", and "ㅑ" with two small strokes added to the right is called "2-right vowel". The rest of the vowels (ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ) can also be called. The up and down vowels can be called "up and down vowels", and the right and vowels can be called "up and down vowels". The vowels "ㅗ" and "TT" may be collectively called "1-up and down vowels", and the vowels "ㅏ" and "ㅓ" may be collectively referred to as "1-left and right vowels". Similarly, "ㅛ" and "ㅠ" may be referred to as "two-up and down vowels", and "ㅑ" and "ㅕ" collectively referred to as "two-left and right vowels". Among the vowels other than the 10 basic collections, "ㅔ" and "ㅖ" can be similarly classified.

* On the basis of the undirected vowel “ㅡ” and “ㅣ”, the up vowel can be inputted according to the repeated pressing of the button to which “ㅡ” is assigned, and the down vowel can be inputted. It can be input, or both the up and down vowels can be input. Likewise, the left vowel can be input, the right vowel can be inputted, and the 1-left vowel can be inputted. You can also have all the vowels entered. Naturally, the selection order according to the repeated pressing can be determined in consideration of the prior order or the frequency of use. For reference, the order of frequency of Korean vowels is "ㅏ, ㅣ, ㅡ, ㅓ, ㅗ, TT, ㅕ, ㅐ, ㅔ, ㅢ, ㅘ, ㅚ, ㅛ, ㅑ, ㅝ, ㅟ, ㅠ, ㅖ, ㅙ, ㅞ, The top nine vowels account for 90% of the total frequency of use.

First, a method of combining vowels using three vowel elements of "-", ".", And "ㅣ" based on FIGS. 4-5 is currently widely used. Of course, you can put "ㅎ" on the [0] button or not. Current method (by vowel scheme used by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.) is that full Hangul characters are not made in the middle of inputting characters such as "Go", "Gyo", "Geo", "Grab" It was said. (E.g. "A => a. => A .. => bridge" when entering "bridge") That is, this phenomenon occurs when the left upward vowel (left vowel and up vowel) input. Therefore, this problem can be solved by inputting the up vowels and the left vowels by repeatedly pressing “ㅡ” or “ㅣ”. For example, if you define that the up vowel is input according to the repetition pressing of the button assigned to "ㅡ", it will be "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "ㅛ" according to the repetition pressing of the corresponding button. If you press "1 ***", it becomes "ㄱ => the => high =>" bridge ", so that the form like" ㄱ "and" ㄱ ... "does not appear in the middle of the input as in the conventional method. Likewise, if the user inputs the left vowel by repeatedly pressing the button to which "ㅣ" is assigned, the button may be changed to "ㅣ => ㅓ => ㅕ" by pressing the button repeatedly. It can be seen that the convenience of input is higher than that of the conventional method of inputting “ㅗ”, “ㅓ”, etc. in combination. However, there is a disadvantage that the input of “ㅔ”, “ㅖ” etc. is not natural when the repeated pressing of the “ㅣ” button is used to input the left vowel. Using a combination of equilibrium vowels, "ㅔ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅖ ")" to "ㅖ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ".

By repeatedly pressing the button to which "-" is assigned, you can enter "up and down vowel". For example, when "-" is repeatedly pressed, the assigned button is "-A => ㅗ => ㅜ" (=> "ㅛ => ㅠ"). The order in which the "up and down vowels" are selected according to the repeated pressing may be arbitrarily determined. The decision may be made in consideration of the dictionary order and frequency of use. It may be desirable to select a "1-up and down vowel" that has a relatively high frequency of use rather than "2-up and down vowels" which are less frequently used. Too many times of repeated presses to enter a specific vowel is not good for the convenience and intuition of the input, so for "2-up and down vowels", enter the corresponding combination of 1-up and down vowels and "." You can do that. For example, "ㅛ = [ㅗ + ·] = ㅡ + ㅡ + · (= ** 0)". Also [ . . . ] Are disassembled and labeled for clarity. May be considered as a vowel element or a subsequent control. In other words, it is natural to think that "ㅛ" is a follow-up alphabet of "ㅗ". In other words, after entering "ㅗ", select the subsequent control (in the example, [0] button 1) and enter the following alphabet of "ㅗ" (reference control method, chain control method). It is possible to set "ㅛ = [· + ㅗ] = · + ㅡ + ㅡ (= 0 **)", but when referring to Fig. 4-5, "·" is displayed in the middle of the input so that the complete Hangul characters are displayed. There is a point. "ㅠ = [ㅜ + ·] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + · (= *** 0)”. The number of strokes of "ㅠ" input is increased by one stroke than in the conventional input method, but "ㅠ" does not have much effect on the increase of the total input stroke since it is a collection of few frequent uses.

Likewise, an upward vowel may be input by repeatedly pressing a button to which "-" is assigned, and a downward vowel may be input by repeatedly pressing a button to which "-" is assigned. If the up vowel is input, "ㅡ" = "" ", =>" ㅛ "in response to the repeated pressing of the assigned button, and the down vowel is input," ㅡ "=> "TT" => "ㅠ" Likewise, the left vowel or the right vowel can be input by repeatedly pressing a button to which "ㅣ" is assigned.

The same applies to the button to which "|" is assigned. In other words, if the left and right vowels are input according to the repeated pressing of the button to which "ㅣ" is assigned, it becomes as follows: "ㅣ => ㅏ => ㅓ" (=> "ㅑ => ㅕ"). For example, if you display an input value, "ㅣ = #", "ㅏ = ##", "ㅓ = ###",. . . Becomes Putting "ㅑ" and "ㅕ" in parentheses means you may or may not want to type it. Here, three strokes ("###") are required to input the vowel "ㅓ", which is used frequently in many applications. Also for input of "ㅑ", "ㅑ = [ㅏ + ·] = ㅣ + ㅣ + · (= ## 0)" and "ㅕ = [ㅓ + ·] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + · (= ## # 0) ". In addition, inputs such as "ㅔ", "ㅐ" and "ㅖ" and "ㅒ" are not natural. Of course, the existing input method (Samsung Electronics) or a combination of vertical / horizontal vowels can be applied to inputs such as "ㅔ", "및", ",", and "있으나", but the input should be understood by the user. There are many rules. If you use a combination of horizontal and vertical vowels, you can use "ㅔ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ" and "ㅐ = ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ", but you can use small or short strokes (the first stroke in "ㅔ", "ㅐ" There is some unnaturalness in combining the middle stroke from "to"-". In order to solve this problem, "ㅣ" => "ㅏ" => "ㅓ" => "ㅐ" => "ㅔ" can be set according to the repeated pressing of the button to which "ㅣ" is assigned. ㅖ "can be input by the combination of" ㅐ "," "", and "*", respectively. It is also a vowel (eg "ㅔ"), but the number of repeated presses (eg five times) is excessively high in the input of a commonly used vowel. Also, it is natural to enter "ㅐ = [ㅏ + ㅣ] =.." And "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] =.." For the input of "ㅐ" and "ㅔ". There are also disadvantages.

In the additional case above, the vowel is input by using the repeated pressing of the vowel button. Enter one stroke to the maximum number of repetitions to generate. For example, if you press "ㅡ" button repeatedly, "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "TT" (that is, if it takes up to three strokes), "ㅋ = ㄱ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ (= 1 ****) ". The same is true in other embodiments. Also, there is a disadvantage in that a large number of repeated pressing is required to input one phoneme. Like the repeat selection method, it is always possible to input consonants by pressing the Consonant button repeatedly.

The following description reveals the essence of the present application. Currently, the input method and keypad of Samsung Electronics are widely used, and the applicant's prior application technology using "Korean three vowels and combinations" does not conflict with the existing technology with Samsung Electronics since Samsung Electronics is the largest company in Korea. Despite this, small and medium-sized enterprises without patent expertise are worried about hiring the applicant's technology. The following additional examples are presented here.

In the case of using the vowel elements of "ㅡ", "·", and "ㅣ", the input of "ㅐ" and "ㅔ" was not natural. In addition, when the up and down vowels and the left and right vowels are input by repeatedly pressing the “ㅡ” and “ㅣ” buttons, the number of input strokes increases. In the following example, the natural Korean vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ" or "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ" are used. See if you can. All keypads in Figure 4- * are compatible. In particular, a drawing showing "ㆍ" on the [0] button and a drawing showing "ㅏ" (or "+", "-ㅏ", "H", "ㅏㅓ", etc. as a variant of "ㅏ") You can think of the [0] button marked with "·" as a button marked with "ㅏ", and the user can recognize and use the [0] button marked with "ㅏ" in "0". It is shown that the [0] button marked with "ㅏ" or the like in the example drawing is used to input "占" which can be regarded as "collection element" or "subsequent control".

The same parts as in the case of using the "-", "-", "-" which are presented to explain the present embodiment are described mainly to avoid the description and to overcome the case pointed out as a disadvantage. First, it is an example of using "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ". You can enter "ㅐ" and "ㅔ" repeatedly by pressing the "ㅣ" button repeatedly. The order selected by the repeated pressing of the "|" button may be arbitrarily determined. For example, if "ㅐ" is selected first, then "ㅐ = ㅣ + ㅣ (= ##)" becomes "ㅔ = | + ㅣ + ㅣ (= ###)". Entering "ㅐ" as "ㅣ + ㅣ" allows for natural adaptation from the user's point of view, as the shape of "ㅐ" can be seen as two vertical lines. As mentioned, the user may be reminded that by pressing "ㅣ" once more after "ㅐ" the small stroke in the middle of "밀" is pushed to the left. An example would be "dog = 1 ##" and "crab = 1 ###".

"ㅒ" is inputted by the combination of "ㅐ" and "..." (also the order of combining may be arbitrarily determined), and "ㅖ" may be input naturally by the combination of "ㅔ" and "...". For example, referring to Fig. 4-5, "ㅒ = [ㅐ + ·] = ㅣ + ㅣ + · (= ## 0)" becomes "ㅖ = [ㅔ + ·] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + • (= ### 0) ". 4-10 to 4-13, "ㅒ = [ㅐ + ·] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= ## 0)", and "ㅖ = [ㅔ + ·] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= ### 0) " In Figures 4-10 to 4-13, the user presses the [0] button containing "ㅏ" in the circle or the number "0" to "·" or "follow-up alpha" (ie, "ㅒ" to "ㅐ"). It's easy to know what you're typing. This is also the same below. Another example would be "ㅒ = [ㅐ + ㅡ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ## *)" and "ㅖ = [ㅔ + ㅡ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ### *) "Can also be. You can also use the "-" button as a control button (subscript or follow-up control). Likewise, the order in which the "-" button is combined may be the same as the "-" button pre-input or post-input, as long as it does not conflict with other vowel inputs. This shows that the vowels other than the vowels inputted by the repeated pressing of the same button can be input by various combination methods.

By repeatedly pressing the button to which "ㅏ" is assigned, it can be entered as "ㅏ" => "ㅓ" (=> "ㅑ" => "ㅕ"). That is, "1-" left-right vowel "or" left-right vowel "is to be input by repeatedly pressing the button assigned" ㅏ ". The selection order according to the repetitive pressing may be determined in consideration of the dictionary order and the frequency of use. When inputting up to "1-left-right vowel (ie," ㅏ "," ㅓ ")", it is similar to the input method of <Table 1> and FIGS. 4-20 and 4-21. In consideration of the frequency of vowel input by repetitive pressing, it is possible to have "ㅏ" => "ㅓ" => "ㅕ" => "ㅑ" depending on the repetitive pressing of the assigned button. Of course. Here too, the number of times of repeated presses when inputting vowels such as "ㅑ" and "ㅕ" increases. At this time, using the input of "ㅑ", "ㅕ" suggested in another embodiment, "ㅑ = [ㅏ + ㅡ] (= 0 *)" and "ㅕ = [ㅓ + ㅡ] (= 00 *) Entering “left and right vowels” using the repeated press of the button assigned with “ㅏ” can also be applied to input using three vowels, “ㅡ”, “ㅓ” and “ㅣ”. For example, use "반복" => "ㅏ" (=> "ㅕ" => "ㅑ") to make the input "반복" (repeat). Or "ㅓ") to allow the user to enter a "left and right vowel", including a vowel assigned to the button by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to it. It also allows you to enter vowels that have similarities in appearance, allowing natural input while placing the minimum number of characters on the keypad. For example, if you press the button assigned with "ㅏ" once, "ㅏ" is entered and press twice to become "ㅓ", that is, if you press the button assigned with "ㅏ" twice, the previously entered "ㅏ" Since "ㅓ", which is a form in which left and right are changed around a vertical line, is input, the user can easily recall a rule that changes to left and right symmetry when the "ㅏ" button is input twice.

The input of the left and right vowels, the left vowels, or the 1-left and right vowels in the form of a graph by repeatedly pressing the button to which "ㅏ" (or "ㅓ") is assigned is as shown in FIGS. 4-28. Compared to the existing input method of combining vowel elements, "ㅏ", which is a frequently used vowel, can be entered in one stroke, and "ㅕ", which is a less frequently used vowel (or "ㅑ", depending on the selection order). Since the input stroke of ") is increased by one stroke, the total input stroke is much smaller than the existing vowel combining method. In addition, since the vowel can be input by repeatedly pressing the same button, the convenience of input can be also increased. Similarly, when vowel "ㅗ" or vowel "TT" is used instead of vowel "ㅏ", it is easy to see that up and down vowels (or 1-up and down vowels) can be entered by pressing the button repeatedly.

If you press the button to which "ㅏ" (or "2-") is assigned, you can enter up to two left and right vowels ("ㅑ", "ㅕ"). There are disadvantages to losing. Here, as suggested in the application, "ㅑ = [ㅏ + ㅡ] = ㅏ + ㅡ (= 0 *)" and "ㅕ = [ㅓ + ㅡ] = ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅡ (= 00 *)" have. This basically shows that the combination of vowels other than the vowels ("ㅏ", "ㅓ") inputted by repeated presses can vary.

In the input of the vowel "ㅘ", it can be easily understood that "ㅘ = [ㅗ + ㅏ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= ** 0)". As described above, the up bar, the up and down bar, or the 1-up and down bar can be input using the repeated pressing of the "-" button. "Up or down vowel" is written as "up (down) vowel". Likewise, if you enter a 1-up and down vowel like "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "TT" by pressing the button repeatedly assigned "ㅡ" here, the 2-up and down vowel "ㅛ" "ㆍ = [ㅗ + ·] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= ** 0)" as a combination of "·" and "ㅠ = [TT + ·] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= ** * 0) "causes" 충돌 (= 00 *) "to have the same code value as" ㅘ (= 00 *) "and will crash. Therefore, by repeatedly pressing the "ㅡ" button, the up vowel can be input so that "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "ㅛ". In other words, it becomes "ㅛ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ (= ***)" and does not conflict or overlap with "ㅘ = ** 0". The downward vowel can be entered as shown in the previous application (eg, Table 1 and other examples). For example, you can do "TT = ㅡ + ㅏ (= * 0)" and "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ (= * 00)".

For input of the rest of the vowels, "[= [ㅜ + ㅣ] = TT + ㅣ = * 0 #", "ㅝ = [ㅜ + ㅓ] = TT + ㅓ (= * 0 00)", and "ㅞ = [TT + ㅓ + ㅣ] = TT + ㅓ + ㅣ (= * 000 #) If you want to enter both up and down vowels with the button assigned to "ㅡ", repeat the button assigned to "ㅡ". According to the press, "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "TT" => "ㅛ" => "ㅠ" There is a disadvantage in that the number of inputs is increased in input such as "ㅛ" and "ㅠ". In case of inputting vowel “ㅝ”, it is “ㅝ = [ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ (= *** 00)”. Since there is no "ㅝ = [TT + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ (= *** 00)", it is not "ㅝ = [TT + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= *** 0 ) ", Which means you can press" ㅜ "and then press" 한번 "once to enter" ㅝ ". Press" ㅏ "and" ㅓ "to the" 버튼 "button. "+", "-ㅏ", "H", etc. 4-12 to 4-14, it is advantageous to input "ㅝ" more naturally, as shown in the embodiment of the prior application to the input of "ㅛ", "ㅠ" of the vertical / horizontal form You can also enter a combination of the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", for example "ㅛ = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ## *)" and "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * ## ) "

Some of the above items can be summarized in a tabular form as follows, and in a graph form as shown in Fig. 4-29. Only a few vowel input cases are entered, in which a single vowel is input but the same button does not exceed three times. Not all explanations are tabulated, and not all the contents of the table are tabulated. The most important feature of the present embodiment is that when the user wants to define a rule for inputting a vowel by repeatedly pressing the three vowel element buttons, the input of "ㅐ" and "ㅔ" which is the most unnatural and difficult to process is performed. One point for natural input by repeated pressing of, One point for inputting "ㅏ" and "ㅓ" using the repeated press of "ㅏ" button, or "ㅡ" by repeated pressing of "ㅡ" button , "ㅗ", "ㅛ" and the like so that you can enter the point. In the present embodiment, the vowel input by repetitive pressing of the vowel button, which is an essential part, is indicated by gray fill in the graph. Using these vowels that can be input by repetitive pressing, the remaining vowels can be entered naturally, and in the input of the remaining vowels, various combination methods are possible for one vowel. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that vowel combinations in other embodiments may be applied, alternatively or additionally, as long as there is no conflict in the input of a particular vowel.

collection Vowel decomposition 3 collections combined 4- * Button Input Values in the Preset Pad One ㅏ ㅏ 0 2 ㅐ ㅣ + ㅣ ## 3 ㅑ   ㅏ + ㅡ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ or ㅏ + ㅡ 000 or 0 * 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ or ㅐ + · or ㅐ + ㅡ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 000 # or ## 0 or ## * 5 ㅓ ㅏ + ㅏ 00 6 ㅔ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ### 7 ㅕ   ㅓ + ㅡ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ or ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅡ 0000 00 * 8 ㅖ ㅔ + · or ㅔ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ### 0 or ### * 9 ㅗ ㅡ + ㅡ ** 10 ㅘ ㅗ + ㅏ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ **0 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ **0# 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ** # 13 ㅛ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ *** 14 TT ㅡ + · ㅡ + ㅏ *0 15 ㅝ TT + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ * 000 16 ㅞ ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ * 000 # 17 ㅟ TT + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ *0# 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ * 00 19 ㅡ ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ * # 21 ㅣ ㅣ #

Another embodiment is as follows. In the above embodiment, "ㅐ" is inputted by the repeated pressing of the "ㅣ" button, and "ㅓ" is inputted by the repeated pressing of the "ㅏ" button. On the keypad assigned "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅐ = [ㅏ + ㅣ] =..." It is natural to think of typing. Of course, in the examples related to Table 7, "ㅐ = [ㅏ + ㅣ] =.." You can also enter But "ㅐ = [ㅏ + ㅣ] =..." Because it can be entered as "ㅣ", it can be entered as "ㅣ" => "ㅓ" (=> "ㅔ") by repeatedly pressing the assigned button. In other words, "1-" vowel input is entered by pressing the "ㅣ" repeatedly. Since "ㅓ = ㅣ + ㅣ (= ##)" here, "ㅔ" is a combination of "ㅓ" and "ㅣ" and naturally "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] = ㅓ + ㅣ (= ###)" Becomes For example, for an input of "1 ##", the input would be "ㄱ => GI => geo", so the user would fill the left (that is, the consonant) stroke of "ㅣ" with two buttons assigned to "ㅣ". You should be familiar with the input rules.

Likewise, the up vowel is inputted by pressing the "-" button repeatedly. That is, "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "ㅛ" is inputted by repeatedly pressing the "ㅡ" button. For "1 **" input, "a => that => high", so the user only knows the input rule that the upper (that is, consonant) strokes are filled by repeated pressing of the button assigned to "ㅡ". do. The inputs of the vowels "TT" and "ㅠ" can also be entered by the method described in the earlier application and other embodiments (eg, Table 1). For example, you can do "TT = ㅡ + ㅏ (= * 0)" and "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ (= * 00)".

For the input of "ㅐ", "ㅐ = [ㅏ + ㅣ] = ㅏ + ㅣ (= 0 #)". Input of "ㅕ", "ㅒ", "ㅖ", and "은", "ㅐ", "ㅔ" and "•" (for example, the button assigned "ㅏ" in "0" on the keypad) We can do it by input. "ㅕ = [ㅓ + ·] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= ## 0)", "ㅒ = [ㅐ + ·] = ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅏ (= 0 # 0)", and "" = [ㅔ + ·] = | + ㅣ + ㅣ + · (= ### 0) ". Where "ㅕ = [ㅓ + ㅡ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ## *)", "ㅒ = [ㅐ + ㅡ] = ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= 0 # *)", and "ㅖ = Various combinations are possible, such as [ㅔ + ㅡ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ### *) ". "ㅑ" is inputted by the repeated selection method of the modified alphabet of "에" or the subsequent alphabet, and can be inputted as two strokes of the button to which "ㅏ" is assigned. That is, "ㅑ = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00)". It can also be seen that "ㅒ = [ㅑ + ㅣ] = ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= 00 #)". The rest of the vowels (vowels) can easily be entered using any combination of the previously mentioned vowel inputs. "ㅘ = [ㅗ + ㅏ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= ** 0)" to "ㅚ = [ㅗ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ (= ** #)" and "ㅙ = [ ㅗ + ㅏ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= * 0 #) "to" ㅟ = [ㅜ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ (= * 0 #) " + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * 0 ##) "to" ㅞ = [ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * 0 ###) " can do.

In the above embodiment, the essential contents are summarized by using three vowels "ㅡ", "ㅏ", and "ㅣ", but by pressing the button repeatedly assigned "ㅣ", "ㅣ", "ㅓ", Enter "ㅔ" or "ㅣ", "ㅓ" (since "###" as "ㅔ = ㅓ + ㅣ"), and press "버튼" repeatedly to " 모음 "," ㅑ "and the" ㅡ "assigned to the" 반복 "," 반복 "," ㅗ "," ㅛ ", etc. The overall simple and easy to understand collection The input method is presented. In the end, "ㅡ", "·", "ㅣ" are used, and "ㅔ", "ㅐ", etc., which were unnatural in inputting vowels with repeated presses, were changed to "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ". Using a combination of three modern Korean vowels, and using repeated presses, we showed that the rest of the vowels can be entered naturally. The user inputs "ㅗ" repeatedly by pressing "ㅡ" button once more after entering "ㅡ" and "ㅓ" by pressing "ㅣ" button once more after entering "ㅣ". It is easy to understand because it is consistent. In addition to the vowels entered by repeated pressing, vowels can be entered easily and naturally in various ways. The remaining vowels could be entered as a combination of the default vowel and subsequent control buttons ([0] button). The user has already explained that a button to which "ㅏ" is assigned (a button marked with "ㅏ" in the number "0" in the drawing) may be used in association with "*" in some cases. Some of the above contents are arranged in a table form as shown in Table 8, and in a graph form as shown in FIGS. 4-30. Not all explanations are listed in a table, and not all the contents of the table are arranged in a drawing. 4-30, the vowels inputted by repetitive pressing, which are the most essential part, are indicated by gray fill. The case where there are several methods for input of the same vowel indicates that they can all be applied or can be selectively applied. For the intuition of the input method, when the same button is pressed three times or more in one phoneme input, the avoided contents are summarized. In the input of a specific vowel, other embodiments are not duplicated or collided with the vowel input method of another embodiment. It is also apparent that the method in E.sub. May be applied selectively.

collection Vowel decomposition 3 collections combined 4- * Button Input Values in the Preset Pad One ㅏ ㅏ 0 2 ㅐ ㅏ + ㅣ ㅏ + ㅣ 0# 3 ㅑ ㅏ + ㅏ 00 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ or ㅐ + · or ㅐ + ㅡ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ or ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅏ or ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅡ 00 # or 0 # 0 or 0 # * 5 ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ ## 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ### 7 ㅕ ㅓ + · or ㅓ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ## 0 or ## * 8 ㅖ ㅔ + · or ㅔ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ### 0 or ### * 9 ㅗ ㅡ + ㅡ ** 10 ㅘ ㅗ + ㅏ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ **0 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ **0# 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ** # 13 ㅛ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ *** 14 TT ㅡ + · ㅡ + ㅏ *0 15 ㅝ TT + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ *0## 16 ㅞ ㅜ + ㅔ = ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ *0### 17 ㅟ TT + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅣ *0# 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅏ + ㅏ * 00 19 ㅡ ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ * # 21 ㅣ ㅣ #

Next, an additional example of combining vowels using three vowels "ㅡ", "ㅓ", and "ㅣ" is shown. Since the examples of "-", "", and "|" are similar to those of Table 8 and related examples, detailed descriptions are omitted. In the example of 4- * shown as an example, it is assumed that "ㅓ" is arranged on the [0] button (that is, the [0] button is the "ㅓ" button).

Since the vowel “ㅓ” can be entered as a button 1 assigned with “ㅓ”, it is possible to enter “ㅣ” => “ㅏ” (=> “ㅐ”) by repeatedly pressing the button assigned with “ㅣ”. . "ㅐ = [ㅏ + ㅣ]", so if you enter "ㅏ = ㅣ + ㅣ (= ##)", naturally "자연 = [ㅏ + ㅣ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= ###)" do. The vowel "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] = ㅓ + ㅣ (= 0 #)" can be entered naturally. As in the above-described embodiment, "ㅖ = [ㅔ + ·] = ㅓ + ㅣ + ㅓ (= 0 # 0)", "ㅒ = [ㅐ + ·] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ (= ## # 0) ". "ㅕ" can be entered by pressing the button repeatedly assigned "ㅓ". "ㅚ = [ㅗ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ (= ** #)" and "ㅘ = [ㅗ + ㅏ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= ** ##)" = [ㅗ + ㅏ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= ** ###) " "ㅠ = [ㅡ + · + ·] = ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ (= * 00)" would cause "ㅝ = [TT + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ = (= * 00)" All. In this case, "ㅠ" can be a combination of horizontal and vertical vowels as "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * ##)". The input of the string "ㅠ" to "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * ##)" is also applicable to other embodiments.

Alternatively, as described above, the up and down vowels are input as "ㅡ => ㅗ => ㅜ => ㅛ => ㅠ" by repeatedly pressing the button to which "ㅡ" is assigned, and "ㅘ = [ㅗ + ㅏ ] = ㅗ + ㅏ (= ** ##) ", where" ㅝ = [TT + ㅓ] = TT + ㅓ = *** 0 ". The remaining double vowels can be treated as input to the vowels constituting the double vowels.

For input of the remaining vowels, the examples of the other embodiments may be similarly used. The above contents are shown in Table 9, and the results are shown in FIGS. 4-31. The biggest feature of the above embodiment is that when the remaining vowels are combined by using the three vowels "-", "ㅓ", and "ㅣ", "|" => "ㅏ" = repeated pressing of the button to which "|" is assigned. > "ㅐ", "반복", "ㅕ" by pressing the button repeatedly assigned "ㅓ", and the resulting natural vowel combination method is suggested. . The rest of the vowels can be entered in a variety of ways using the vowels entered by one-time press and repeated press.

collection Vowel decomposition 3 collections combined 4- * Button Input Values in the Preset Pad One ㅏ ㅣ + ㅣ ## 2 ㅐ ㅏ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ### 3 ㅑ ㅏ + · ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ ##0 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ or ㅐ + · ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ + ㅣ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ ## 0 # or ### 0 5 ㅓ ㅓ 0 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ 0# 7 ㅕ ㅓ + ㅓ 00 8 ㅖ ㅔ + · ㅓ + ㅣ + ㅓ 0 # 0 9 ㅗ ㅡ + ㅡ ** 10 ㅘ ㅗ + ㅏ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ** ## 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ** ### 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ** # 13 ㅛ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ *** 14 TT ㅡ + · ㅡ + ㅓ *0 15 ㅝ TT + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ + ㅓ * 000 16 ㅞ ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ + ㅓ + ㅣ * 000 # 17 ㅟ TT + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ *0# 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ * ## 19 ㅡ ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ * # 21 ㅣ ㅣ #

Embodiments related to Table 9 using "ㅡ", "ㅓ" and "ㅣ" correspond to the embodiments related to the contents of Table 8 among the examples using "ㅡ", "ㅏ" and "ㅣ". to be. Embodiments related to Table 7 as an embodiment using "-", "'", and "|" are many parts similar to those of Table 7, and thus detailed descriptions are simply omitted. You can make "ㅓ => ㅏ (=> ㅕ => ㅑ)" by repeatedly pressing the button to which "ㅓ" is assigned. That is, the left and right vowels are input by repeatedly pressing the "ㅓ" assignment button. The same is true for "ㅣ" to be "ㅣ => ㅐ (=> ㅔ)" as the repeated press of the assigned button. However, "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] = ㅓ + ㅣ (= 0 #)" can be set so that "ㅣ" becomes "ㅣ => ㅐ => ㅒ" by repeatedly pressing the assigned button. have. When "ㅡ" becomes "ㅡ => ㅗ => ㅛ" (that is, the up vowel input) or "ㅡ => ㅗ => TT (=> ㅛ => ㅠ)" That is, (1-) up and down vowel input), "ㅘ = [ㅗ + ㅏ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= ** 00)", but there is no vowel that combines "ㅓ" after "ㅗ". "ㅘ = ** 0" can be set. The inputs of the remaining vowels can be applied similarly, omitting tables and graphs.

The characteristics of the above-described embodiment (Table 7, Table 8, Table 9 and related description) are as follows. "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ" Enter the vowel using the three vowels, the left and right vowels (or 1-left vowels) by pressing the button assigned "된", "," Repeated pressing of the button to which "|" is assigned may include "ㅣ", "ㅓ", "ㅔ", or "ㅣ", "ㅐ", "ㅔ". In addition, when inputting a vowel using three vowels, "ㅡ", "ㅓ", and "ㅣ", the left and right vowels (or 1-left and right vowels) are input with the button assigned to "ㅓ", "ㅣ Repeated presses of the button assigned "" will either enter "ㅣ", "ㅏ", "ㅐ" or enter "ㅣ", "ㅐ", "ㅒ". You can also enter a vowel using "ㅡ", "X", "ㅣ", but you can arrange the up vowels (or up and down vowels or 1-up and down vowels) by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to "ㅡ". Can be.

In Table 7, Table 8, Table 9, and related embodiments, a collection in which "-", "ㅏ", "ㅣ" or "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ" is input by a single press or repeat press of the assigned button Other vowels may be selectively used as long as they do not collide with vowel input in other embodiments. For example, after inputting "TT" in Table 8 (multiple methods can be applied), press the button to which "ㅣ" is assigned ([#] button in this example). "ㅟ" was entered and pressed again to enter "ㅝ", press again to enter "ㅞ". This is natural because in Table 8, "ㅣ", "ㅓ", and "ㅔ" are inputted by the repeated pressing of the button to which "ㅣ" is assigned. Likewise, after inputting "ㅗ" in Table 9 (also the input method of "ㅗ" may be other than the method in Table 9), press "ㅚ" once to enter "ㅚ" Press again to enter "ㅘ" and press again to enter "ㅙ". In the related embodiment of Table 9, "|", "ㅏ", and "ㅐ" are naturally input by pressing the button repeatedly assigned "|". The use of repeated pressing rather than pressing the left and right buttons in the double vowel input may help to improve the convenience of input. Since the input methods "ㅚ", "ㅘ", and "ㅙ" in the related embodiment of Table 9 do not conflict with the "ㅘ", "ㅘ", and "ㅙ" input methods in the related embodiment of Table 8, In the embodiment, the "ㅚ", "ㅘ", and "ㅙ" input methods in the related embodiment of Table 9 may also be applied. Similarly, the "ㅟ", "ㅝ", and "ㅞ" input methods in the Table 8 related embodiment do not conflict with the "ㅟ", "ㅝ" and "ㅞ" input methods in the Table 8 related embodiment. In the embodiment, the "ㅟ", "ㅝ", and "ㅞ" input methods in the related embodiment of Table 9 can be applied.

Here, when "-" is assigned to "1-up-down" by pressing the button repeatedly, "-" is assigned to "-=" by pressing the button repeatedly. In Table 8, if the "(" input method ("ㅘ = [ㅚ + ㅣ] =…") of Table 9 is applied, as in Table 8, "ㅗ = [ㅗ + ㅏ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= ** 0) "need not be set, so" ㅛ = [ㅗ + ·] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= ** 0) ". Likewise, "ㅠ = [ㅜ + ·] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ (= *** 0)". In Table 8 and related examples, "ㅕ = [ㅓ +.] = | + | + ㅏ (= ## 0)". In addition, "입력" is input by repeated pressing (2 times) of "ㅏ" button. When you solve this, you can see as "ㅑ = [ㅏ + ·] = ㅏ + ㅏ (= 00)". In inputting four up, down, left, and right vowels (ㅑ, ㅕ, ㅛ, ㅠ), 1-up, down, left, right vowels (ie, ㅏ, ㅓ, ㅗ, TT) corresponding to each 2-up, down, left, and right vowels You can see the regular input of a combination of controls or subsequent controls. Of course, the control button was assigned a "ㅏ" button (for example, a "0" button with "ㅏ" in "0" on the keypad). In Table 8, "ㅖ", "ㅒ", etc. are already input consistently as a combination of corresponding vowels "ㅔ", "ㅐ" and "· (variant alphabet control or follow-up control)". You can see the input by the rule. (Of course, you could also enter "ㅒ = [ㅑ + ㅣ] =…"). The costumes "ㅔ" and "ㅐ" are called "2-vertical vowels" and "ㅔ" is "1-left + 2-vertical." It is called a vowel. "ㅖ" may be called "2-left + 2 vertical vowels". Also, "ㅐ" is called "1-center + 2 vertical vowels" and "ㅒ" is called "2-center + 2 vertical vowels".

After entering “ㅣ”, press once more to become “ㅓ” and press “ㅡ” button once to enter “ㅡ” and press once more to become “ㅗ”. The vowels that are entered do not have to be displayed together (eg, the "*" button is not displayed together with the [*] button). Of course, it is obvious that all or part of the vowels that are input by repeated pressing are displayed on the keypad buttons together. The user can only enter "ㅣ", "ㅓ", ("ㅔ") by pressing the button repeatedly assigned "ㅣ", and "ㅡ", " ㅗ "," TT "can be entered, 1-up-down-left-right vowel and [0] button in the example drawing (think like" · ") to enter 2-up, down, left and right vowels , "ㅚ" followed by "ㅣ" button repeatedly to input "ㅣ", "ㅙ", "ㅟ" followed by "ㅣ" by repeatedly pressing "ㅘ", "ㅙ" You just need to be aware of what you can enter.

The above is summarized in the form of a table as follows. Not everything described is in a table, and not everything in the table is a graph. In the related embodiment of Table 9, the "ㅚ", "ㅘ", and "ㅙ" input methods in the related embodiment of Table 8 are applied, and the 1-up and down vowel (ie, " Enter ㅗ "," ㅠ "), and enter the combination of 2-up, down, left, and right vowels and the corresponding control buttons (in the example, [0] button assigned" ㅏ "). Almost like 10. However, only the part of inputting "ㅓ => ㅕ" and the part of entering "ㅏ" and "ㅑ" by the repeated pressing of the button assigned with "ㅓ" will be different. Do not present in the form of tables and graphs. As mentioned, "ㅏ" is much more frequently used than "ㅓ" and therefore worse than in Table 10 and related examples.

In Table 10 and related embodiments, three strokes (three strokes with a button assigned to "ㅡ") are required for the "TT" input, but because of the repeated pressing of the same button (zero fingering distance), There is no big difference. In addition, out of nine vowels (ㅏ, ㅣ, ㅡ, ㅓ, ㅗ, TT, ㅕ, ㅐ, ㅔ) that occupy about 90% of the frequency of use, the rest of the vowels except "ㅕ" and "ㅐ" (all uses) It is possible to reduce the fingering distance of vowel input by inputting about 80% or more of the frequency) by pressing one button or repeated pressing of a specific vowel button and using the combination of adjacent buttons for the input of the remaining vowels (about 20% of total frequency). It can be seen that. In addition, you can enter “ㅡ”, “ㅏ”, and “ㅣ” which occupy 50% of the total use frequency in one stroke, so you can keep the input stroke by using the minimum button (three buttons). It can be seen that.

collection Vowel decomposition 3 collections combined 4- * Button Input Values in the Preset Pad One ㅏ ㅏ 0 2 ㅐ ㅏ + ㅣ ㅏ + ㅣ 0# 3 ㅑ ㅏ + ㅏ 00 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ or ㅐ + · or ㅐ + ㅡ ㅏ + ㅏ + ㅣ or ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅏ or ㅏ + ㅣ + ㅡ 00 # or 0 # 0 or 0 # * 5 ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ ## 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ### 7 ㅕ ㅓ + · or ㅓ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ## 0 or ## * 8 ㅖ ㅔ + · or ㅔ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅏ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ### 0 or ### * 9 ㅗ ㅡ + ㅡ ** 10 ㅘ ㅚ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ** ## 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ** ### 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ** # 13 ㅛ ㅗ + · ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ **0 14 TT ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ *** 15 ㅝ ㅟ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ *** ## 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ *** ### 17 ㅟ TT + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ *** # 18 ㅠ TT + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅏ ***0 19 ㅡ ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ * # 21 ㅣ ㅣ #

In the above, except for the vowels of the 9 vowels belonging to 90% of the high frequency usage (eg some vowels such as "TT", "ㅐ", etc. according to the embodiment), the vowel input is performed by repeatedly pressing the same button. Reduced fingering distance and improved input convenience. In the exemplary drawing, a keypad inputted by repetitive pressing of a specific vowel button may also be applied to the button. For example, in the example of using "ㅡ," ㅏ "," ㅣ ", when entering" ㅣ "," ㅓ "by pressing the button repeatedly assigned" ㅣ "," ㅣ ㅓ "in the [#] button (Or "ㅣ ㅓ ㅔ"), and when "ㅏ" and "으로" are entered by pressing the button repeatedly assigned "ㅏ", "0" is displayed for the [0] button, and "ㅡ" If you enter "ㅡ", "ㅗ", or "ㅛ" by repeatedly pressing the assigned button, "ㅡ ㅗ" (or "ㅡ ㅗ ㅛ") is displayed, but among Korean vowels that take a geometric form In addition to using frequently, the basic types of vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" (up to "ㅏ" or "ㅓ" depending on the embodiment) are displayed on each button, and the vowels entered by pressing repeatedly are hidden. One of the features of the present invention is that it is easy to understand the input rules while constructing a simple keypad. To the airway.

In the lattice and hard vowel input, it is possible to input the combination of the maximum repeatable number +1 stroke for the flat consonant and the vowel input. For example, if "ㅣ", "ㅓ", "ㅔ" is input by pressing the "ㅣ" button repeatedly, it takes up to 3 times to input the vowel, so "ㄲ = ㄱ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ = 1 #### " However, since the number of repetitive presses for inputting one phoneme of the input becomes too large and unnatural, the input of the modified alphabetes (lattice, hard, and falling consonants) of the consonants is the same as that of the button to which the corresponding consonant is assigned. The repeated selection method by repeated pressing or the modified alphabet 3 + other input method can be applied. Of course, it can be set to "ㄲ = + ㅣ 長 = 1 # ~" using "Long Press", which is described later. However, inputting a phoneme required for normal Korean input by long press interrupts the input flow. not. (In this example, “ㅣ 長” is long press “ㅣ” and “# ~” is long press [#] button.)

The input of the falling consonant "ㅎ" can be seen that there is no vowel input as "0 *" in the embodiment of Table 8 to Table 10. Therefore, if "ㅎ" is assigned to the [0] button, you can enter "ㅎ = [· + ㅡ + (ㅇ)] = ㅏ + ㅡ (= 0 *)". Of course, the dropped consonant "ㅎ" can be inputted by the repeated pressing of the button to which the consonant "ㅇ", which is regarded as the basic alphabet, is applied (2 buttons with the assigned "ㅇ"). There may be ambiguity. In Table 7, "ㅑ = [ㅏ + ㅡ] = ㅏ + ㅡ (= 0 *)". If this is not applied (there is another way to enter "ㅑ" in Table 7), the consonant "ㅎ = 0 * "can be entered without ambiguity, and if" ㅑ = 0 * ", it can be entered without ambiguity with" ㅎ = 0 ** ". If there is no vowel input with the [0] button 3 strokes, the use of the [0] button 3 strokes for the input of "ㅎ" has been described in the earlier application, in which case ambiguity may also occur. An example of a falling consonant "ㅎ" may not necessarily be "ㅎ". As mentioned in the election, "b" among the consonants where no lattice and light consonants exist is set as the basic alphabet, and "ㄹ" is modified alphabet ( Or "d" as a missing consonant. This means that you can enter consonant input assigned to a button assigned with "ㅏ" as "0 *" which does not exist as a vowel input.

In Korean automata of generalized 2 keyboard type keyboard, "ㅢ" is inputted by combining "ㅡ" and "". However, since the keyboard has a large number of vowel buttons, only some vowels such as "의", "ㅝ", "ㅞ", "ㅘ", and "," are inputted in combination with the vowel buttons (that is, vowels). The only difference is the combination rule. A vowel combination using three vowels ("ㅡ", "ㅣ", "ㅏ" or "ㅡ", "ㅣ", ".") Is the only difference that more vowels are entered depending on the promised combination. 4-20 is a graph showing the vowel processing according to the collection combinations based on Table 1. In Fig. 4-20, "start" means the start of the vowel processing process. When 10 * ... "is pressed, the vowel process begins at the next consonant (ie" a = 1 "), the pressed vowel" 0 ". This is done with [a] + [ When ㅡ] is input, the system recognizes that the vowel combining process is started when the [ㅡ] button, which is a vowel button that can be combined, is started and the next input value is pressed. If [a] + [a] followed by [a] is pressed, the end of the vowel combination process started from the input of [a]. It is normally aware of the full expression, and the input value to "pole" and the self-evident.

로 표시된 것은 ㆍ(아래아) 와 "ㅏ"를 동시에 연상시킬 수 있는 장점이 있음도 쉽 게 알 수 있다. 4-21 is shown as a graph including other parts from Table 1 above. In Figure 4-21, the vowels indicated by the dotted lines and the vowels indicated by the gray fill are overlapping, and as the vowel input method indicated by the gray fill indicates more improved input efficiency, the priorities are applied and the contents indicated by the dotted lines are optional. It may or may not apply. The vowel “된” included in some of the single vowels (eg “ㅏ” in “feel”) or element collections (eg “과” in “and”) only when entering the mock indicated by gray fill in FIGS. Can be recognized and input as "입력", and the vowel "ㅏ" used in the rest of the cases is reminiscent of (bottom). On the [0] button

It is also easy to see that there is an advantage to associate with (bottom) and "ㅏ" at the same time.

In the program implementation, the consonants and vowels recognized by the input values of the keypad may be given and processed as input values of the 2 bee keyboard Korean automata program. However, in view of the infrastructure and various applications of the character input system, It is pointed out that it is not desirable for precise implementation.

In the above, even if the person who is not in the field of the art knows Hangul and the basic knowledge in the software, the description is enough to understand the present system, but I will briefly present the flow chart in the old woman. A vowel button (e.g. [0] button) assigned together with a consonant (ie, a dropped consonant) is called "(dropped) consonant vowel button" for convenience. Input the lattice sound and the hard sound by the control method (control and apply the input, "ㅋ = ㄱ + ㅡ + ㅡ", "ㄲ = AZ + ㅡ + ㅡ"), and drop the consonant (eg "ㅎ") It is also assumed to be input by the control processing method (eg "ㅎ = ㅇ + ㅡ + ㅡ" or "ㅎ = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅡ" or "ㅎ =. + ㅡ + ㅡ").

In the flow chart of Fig. 4-22, the parts (1) to (4) are the same as the Korean automata in the conventional 2 beol keyboard, and only the parts (A) and (B) shown in gray are viewed. It can be seen that this part reflects the characteristics of the input method according to the output system. Part (B) indicates that a consonant assignment vowel button (e.g. [0] button) that cannot be combined is pressed after a series of vowel buttons are input, and the consonant input assigned to the vowel button is recognized. In Fig. 4-22, it is indicated that the part (B) is indicated by a dotted line may be omitted. In Fig. 4-22, if the first input value is the dropped consonant assignment vowel button, it is very simple to treat it as the input of the dropped consonant consonant assigned to the vowel button. Therefore, the flowchart is not shown for the sake of brevity. Likewise, when the vowel button is pressed as the initial input value, the vowel combining process as a single word is not shown for convenience. The flow chart of Fig. 4-22 is as simple as possible to understand that the Hangul input technique and the vowel input technique presented in the present invention can be operated as simply as possible, and the details are different and modified in actual implementation. Of course, it is obvious that it is also included in the scope of the present invention. For example, the details may vary slightly depending on whether the "Unicode" system or the "KSC5601 complete" system is used in the computing environment that uses the complete door system itself. For reference, FIG. 4-23 shows the process of Hangul automata in the 2-Bol keyboard, which is generalized to remove the characteristic parts ((A) and (B)) in the input method shown in FIG. However, in the section for checking whether there is a vowel corresponding to the "collection combination rule" in (3) of Figure 4-22, the vowel combination rule presented in the present invention (Table 1, various graphs and description of the present invention) This is too natural.

Applicant has shown that the vowel input method (vowel combination method) proposed in the present invention can be applied irrespective of a specific consonant input method, but also shows a flowchart in the case of applying the repetitive selection method to consonant input in an old woman core. Same as 24 Applicants may apply the repetitive selection method (selected in the order of flat consonant-lattice-light consonant, in the order of flat consonant-hard consonant-lattice consonant) or modified alphabet 3+ other input method proposed by the applicant in the present invention and the application. It is obvious that the same can be applied to all consonant input methods as well as similar (identifying consonants by repeated pressing of consonant buttons-input of consonant buttons does not affect the combination of vowel buttons). . In section (4), the consonants can be identified according to the procedure specific to the specific consonant input technique. Part (B) may of course be absent. In the case of ambiguity in order to keep the flow chart concise, the part which confirms the previously entered letters by using the arrow [>] button or a specific function button is not expressed but is already generalized and widely used. Even if you are not a worker, everyone knows it, so don't indicate it. Similarly, it is also possible to use the consonant input method of Samsung Electronics which inputs consonants by the repetitive selection method.

Likewise, in the Korean input system adopted by LG Electronics, consonants are identified by combining the consonant button, "capture button", and "dose button" (eg "ㄷ = ㄴ ++"). Obviously, the vowel input technique proposed in the present invention can be applied to a consonant input technique for identifying consonants by a combination of a button and a specific function button. Similarly, the input of consonant buttons and certain function buttons does not affect the vowel combination. Again, the flow chart of this case is briefly presented to the old woman as shown in Figs. 4-25.

As far as I've explained, it is possible to use the vowel combination technique proposed in the present invention, regardless of the specific consonant input technique, as mentioned in the previous application, in a system that processes Korean characters by recognizing Korean (Hangul) consonants and vowels. It can be obvious. The flow chart is also shown in the old woman's heart as shown in Fig. 4-26. Naturally, when the consonant button or the vowel button or a specific function button is pressed in Fig. 4-26, the vowel combination technique of the present invention is applied even when the consonant of a specific consonant input method can be identified (Fig. 4). In (4) of -26). Likewise, it is applicable to all methods of combining Korean vowels by combining three Korean vowels (eg, "ㅡ", "ㅏ", "ㅣ") on any type of keypad assigned with consonant and vowels. Do. For example, in the example drawing, when inputting the missing consonant "ㅎ" with three [0] buttons (note that ambiguity may occur, the input of consonant "ㅎ" has already affected the vowel input). It is obvious that the vowel combination method of the present invention can be applied to the promised time delay or the use of the [>] button. Thus, even if consonants and vowels are assigned together, and consonant combinations affect vowel combinations, they are already widely used, as a result of promised time delays or input of certain function buttons (eg right arrow [>] button). It is too obvious that the vowel combination method of the present invention can be applied by intentionally confirming an input letter and treating it as being made at the beginning of a word. In the flow chart of Fig. 4-26, when the "end letter button" is pressed, it is already widely known that it is necessary to recognize the content already input and proceed from the "start" state. Again presenting in the form of a flow diagram in the old woman heart as shown in Figure 4-27, only the part of checking the pressing of the letter completion button in Figure 4-26 is added.

This may be regarded as the content that is applicable in other parts (embodiments) of the content described in any one part (embodiments) in the present application, which is also a collection using other parts (e.g. four vowels) of the present invention Of course, it can be applied in the combination method). For example, as mentioned above, the repetitive selection method, the modified alphabet 3+ input method, the control processing method, etc. are all applied to the input of the modified alphabet (lattice, light consonant, dropped consonant, etc.) or the input of some consonants. It is obvious that some of the methods can be applied selectively (e.g., the lattice sound is input as the control processing method, the hard alphabet is input as the repetitive selection method, etc.). It is also easy to see that this is also applicable to an input system that uses the "long press" of a particular button, as described below, to identify a specific consonant (a promised consonant). Likewise, in case of inputting some consonants in combination with the capture button and inputting some consonants by repeated selection method as in the input system adopted by LG Electronics (consonant input does not affect the vowel combination). It is too obvious that the vowel combination method of the present invention is applicable. The same is true when the consonant input method of the input system adopted by LG Electronics is slightly modified and “배치” is placed on a separate button, and the input is performed with one button. (Currently, LG Electronics' hiring system is entering "ㅂ = ㅁ + Planning")

4.12. Collection input method using 4 vowels of modern Korean (eg "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "ㅓ") and Korean input system using the same

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 4-18 and 4-19, a Korean input system for processing vowels may be configured using any combination of four vowels including “o” and “ㅣ”. For example, four vowels are available, including the frequently used vowels "ㅏ" and "ㅓ". These four vowels have a frequency of about 60% of the total vowels. Table 11 shows an example of using a combination of four vowels.

Since it can be applied in much the same manner as described in the case of using the three vowels, detailed description thereof will not be given. In Figures 4-18, the vowel "ㅓ" is indicated in the number "8", and is shown outside in Figure 4-19, but as before, this is the same meaning. When the consonants are not assigned to the [8] button and the [0] button as shown in the example of FIGS. 4-18 and 4-19, consonants are assigned to the buttons to which "-" and "|" are assigned. The same may be applied to the case described above.

In Figs. 4-18 and 4-19, the positions (assigned buttons) of the vowels “ㅏ” and “ㅓ” may be interchanged. In addition, the definition of the vowels combined by the four vowels based on the drawings of FIGS. 4-18 and 4-19 may be defined as a combination in which "ㅏ" and "ㅓ" are interchanged in Table 11.

The user can operate the [0] button to which the vowel “ㅏ” is assigned as the lower button, and use the [8] button to which the vowel “ㅓ” is assigned as the button with two lower buttons. It is easy to associate this with the shape of the number "0" and the shape of the number "8". After the system senses the start of the vowel process, it interprets the input as a vowel according to the rules set out in Table 11.

Similarly to the foregoing description, in the input of "ㅏ", "# 0" may also be recognized as "ㅏ", and in the input of "ㅓ", "0 #" may also be recognized as "ㅓ". . Similarly, if any vowel (eg vowel "ㅗ", "TT") is used as the four vowels with the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" instead of "ㅏ" and "ㅓ".

Using the four vowel buttons that contain the vowels "ㅡ", "ㅣ" and the arbitrary vowels "X" and "Y", the following example is used to enter a vowel by combining the four vowel buttons used in modern Korean. Can be as shown in the table. In the following table, the vowels used as the vowels "X" and "Y" among the 19 vowels except the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" of Korean vowels are the buttons assigned the vowels "X" and "Y" respectively. (Ie, [X] button, [Y] button) It is obvious that each can be input by one stroke.

collection 4 collections combined X Y One ㅏ ㅣ + X 2 ㅐ ㅣ + X + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + Y 4 ㅒ ㅣ + Y + ㅣ 5 ㅓ X + ㅣ 6 ㅔ X + ㅣ + ㅣ 7 ㅕ Y + ㅣ 8 ㅖ Y + ㅣ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ X + ㅡ 10 ㅘ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X 11 ㅙ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X + ㅣ 12 ㅚ X + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ Y + ㅡ 14 TT ㅡ + X 15 ㅝ ㅡ + Y + ㅣ or ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅡ + Y + ㅣ + ㅣ or ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅡ + X + ㅣ 18 ㅠ ㅡ + Y 19 ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ

To make this more general, you can input a vowel by a combination similar to the above table using any of the three vowel buttons in Korean. For example, the vowels "A", "B", "X", and "Y" may be element collections, and the remaining vowels may be input by a combination similar to the above. It is also apparent that the vowels "A", "B", "X", and "Y" can be entered with one button to which each vowel is assigned. For the convenience of the user and to minimize the number of strokes, it would be desirable to use four vowels containing "-", "|", "와", and "ㅓ".

Also in the input of consonants in Figs. 4-12 and 4-13, it is possible to input as "ㅎ = 0 ** = ㅏ + ㅡ + ㅡ" and "ㅇ = 8 ** = ㅓ + ㅡ + ㅡ". Is the same. Here, the consonant "O" with a high frequency of use is assigned to the [8] button along with the vowel "ㅓ", but it is inconvenient for input, but the arrangement of the consonant "O" may be appropriately modified.

Further examples of the vowel input method using four vowels of modern Korean are as follows. In the case of using three vowels, enter "ㅏ", "ㅑ" by pressing "ㅣ" repeatedly and enter "TT" and "ㅠ" by pressing "ㅣ" button repeatedly. This is an example of inputting the remaining vowels using a combination of horizontal and vertical lines. In the following example, the following example shows the use of four vowels "ㅗ", "ㅗ", "ㅡ", and "ㅣ" to secure the naturalness of the input rule. You can naturally enter vowels that contain "\" or "\". Similar to the case of using three vowels, detailed explanations are avoided.

collection Vowel decomposition 4 collections combined (B) Not applicable at application (A) (B) One ㅏ ㅣ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ A (A-3) 2 ㅐ ㅏ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ or ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ ㅏ + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ or ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ 5 ㅓ ㅓ 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ B (B), ㅠ (B) 7 ㅕ ㅡ + ㅓ 8 ㅖ ㅕ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ ㅗ 10 ㅘ ㅗ + ㅏ ㅗ + ㅣ + ㅣ 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅗ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅗ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ ㅣ + ㅗ 14 TT ㅡ + ㅡ 15 ㅝ TT + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ or ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ or ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ TT + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ B (B), ㅠ (B) 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅟ (B) 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

4.13. How to input a specific (single) collection by continuous input of a specific button to which a specific vowel element (or collection) is assigned

In the illustrated drawings (FIGS. 4-5 to 4-9), the vowel element buttons are not assigned to the vowel / beep control and falling consonants, and are assumed to be used purely as the vowel element buttons. Therefore, it is assumed that there are separate control buttons, or the sound of beating and sounding is selected by repeatedly pressing the button to which the basic consonant is assigned, and the falling consonant is selected by repeatedly pressing the button to which the consonant is regarded as the basic consonant. .

The use of Korean vowels is in the order of "ㅏ", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", and "TT", and these six vowels account for about 77% of the total. In the input method using the vowel element, it was shown that a specific single vowel can be input by using the vowel element "." Which does not exist as a vowel itself. Furthermore, in the vowel combining process (from the beginning of the vowel combining to the end of the vowel combining), it is possible to detect the continuous input of only the same vowel element button so that a certain single vowel is recognized.

Pressing the button to which the vowel element "-" is assigned once will recognize the vowel "-" and press it once again in succession. For example, in entering "gum", you can enter "1 * 05" as a combination of vowel elements, but you can also enter as "1 ** 5". Likewise, when the button with the vowel element "ㅣ" is pressed once, "ㅣ" is recognized, and if it is pressed once again, "ㅏ" can be recognized. For example, inputting "persimmon" means "1 # 05" or "1 ## 5".

As described above, when entering a single vowel using the button assigned the vowel element ".", It is recognized as an intermediate process for inputting the vowel "ㅓ", "ㅕ", "ㅗ", "ㅛ" and so on. Until you recognize the end of the process, just "." Will be output as However, when using the buttons assigned with vowel elements "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", the vowel element (or collection of elements) after the consonant (ie, the vowel combining process start state) as described in the control method of the voicing / hardening By using the property that "does not come out continuously (that is, 'ㅡ + ㅡ') and that the vowel element" ㅣ "does not come out consecutively (that is," ㅣ + ㅣ "), Definite recognition and output For example, when "1 ## (5)" is input, "a => period => may be displayed as (=> deduction)" depending on the input. In this case, if it can be recognized decisively, other vowel elements can be additionally combined as if inputted by a combination of vowel elements. That is, in the illustrated Fig. 4-5, "1 ** # = ears" and "1 ### = dogs" can be made. If a specific vowel is recognized by repeatedly pressing the button to which the vowel element is assigned, and another vowel element can be combined to become another vowel, the previous input is recognized when the input of the vowel element that cannot be combined is recognized. The value can be recognized as the end of the vowel combining process, and the current input value can be recognized as the start state of the vowel combining process.

It is also possible to enter another single vowel by pressing the button to which the vowel element is assigned three or more times. For example, if the button assigned to "ㅡ" is pressed three times, it may be able to recognize "ㅠ" (where "Guo" may be entered as "Kyu + ㅣ = 1 *** #"). . Likewise, if the button to which "ㅣ" is assigned is pressed three times, the "되도록" may be recognized as mentioned, or "ㅑ" may be recognized (of course, "ㅐ" and "ㅑ" are compatible. If you enter '3' in 3, you can enter '4' in 4). Again like "." It is possible to enter "ㅕ" with 4 strokes and "ㅛ" with 3 strokes of this assigned button. (In this case, it is assumed that the drop consonant is not assigned to the button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned. Only the vowel element is assigned.) As mentioned in the input of the dropped consonant, FIGS. As a criterion, the vowel element "." Can be definitely recognized as "1000 = chaff" and "10000 = bridge" by using a property that cannot occur three or more times in a row. However, in the case of three or more inputs, there is no significant difference in the input of a combination of vowel elements or the convenience of input, and it is insufficient in the intuition of the input method.

The above result shows that the input convenience of some vowels with a high frequency of use is increased. To recap, it can be seen that the repetitive selection method is applied to a specific vowel (TT, ㅠ, ...) with similarity in shape as a subsequent collection of "ㅡ". Likewise, it can be regarded that the repeated selection method is applied to a specific vowel (eg, ㅏ, ㅐ, ㅑ, ... or ㅏ, ㅑ, ㅐ) as a subsequent collection of "|". Similarly, it can be regarded that a specific vowel (eg, ㅓ, ㅗ, ㅕ, ㅛ, ...) can be inputted by the repetitive selection method by using a button assigned with ".". In the method of using four vowel elements, the "ㅓ" and "ㅗ" are inputted by the repeated pressing of the button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned, and the repeated pressing of the button to which the vowel element ".." is assigned. You can also enter "ㅕ" and "ㅛ" by.

Using the button assigned the vowel element "ㅡ", in the order "ㅡ, TT, ㅠ, ...", "ㅣ, ㅏ, ㅐ, ..." or "ㅣ, ㅏ, ㅑ for" ㅣ " , ㅐ, ... ", and using the button assigned vowel element". "To input vowel" ㅓ "," ㅗ "beginning with vowel element". " For illustrative purposes only, and other specific collections may be entered in a different order.

Herein, the concept of the present invention may be utilized in a method other than the method of using three or four vowel elements. For example, in an input system where six vowel buttons have six element collections such as "ㅡ", "ㅣ", "ㅏ", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", and "TT", "ㅑ" means [ ㅏ] button 2, "ㅕ" is [ta] button 2 tata, "ㅛ" is [ta] button 2 tata, and "ㅠ" is [ta] button 2 tata. Likewise, two [ㅏ] buttons can be used to enter a more frequent “ㅐ”. Again, the same vowels among the vowels "ㅏ", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", and "TT" do not appear in succession, so they can be recognized immediately upon input. If you can enter 10 basic vowels like this, you can enter the rest of the vowels as a combination of these 10 vowels (eg 'ㅝ = ㅜ + ㅜ' or 'ㅝ = ㅠ + ㅣ', 'ㅞ = TT + ㅓ + ㅣ '). Similarly, it is possible to input other vowels (e.g. compound vowels, extended vowels) with three or more specific vowel buttons.

This means that a vowel element "." Can be entered by a repetitive selection method with a vowel "ㅑ" as a subsequent alphabet whose default collection is "ㅏ". This, too, with the convenience of input by repeated pressing without ambiguity, it can give a user a feeling of familiarity with the input similar to the process of writing by pressing a button. In addition, the button assigned with the vowel element "." Can be added separately, so that the input system with seven vowel buttons can be input by repetitive pressing of the element collection button or by combining with the vowel element ".". For example, "ㅕ" can be entered in combination with the [ㅓ] button, two strokes, or the [.] Button and the [ㅓ] button.

5. How to overcome ambiguity through indexes

When applying the iterative selection method, ambiguity may occur because several words are represented by one code. In the input example of Fig. 4-1, it is pointed out that there is an ambiguity in which "Goi" can be recognized as "Ho" and "Ho". In general, however, words are entered in word units. For example, the word "very" exists, but the word "meyer" does not exist. In Fig. 4-1, both have the same code value. Therefore, the terminal prepares and registers an index for words that may cause ambiguity for a specific keypad and a specific alphabet input method on the terminal (client) or server side. When “very” or “heavy” is input, when both are not distinguished by time delay, etc., if the word “very” is registered as the correct word in the index, the word that the user wants to input (hereinafter for convenience) "Target word") can be seen that "very". This applies only when ambiguities are indistinguishable from the system, and if it is possible to distinguish them by the time delay value defined by the system (terminal or server side system) or by the user-defined time delay, it must be followed accordingly. Do. In other words, if a user intentionally breaks (using a time delay or a blank or right-handed button or other specific button) and enters "Goi", the word is a target word, even if it is semantically wrong. Should be printed.

The way to prepare the index can be to register only the correct words ("very bad" in the example) for words where ambiguity can occur, or just the wrong words ("hot guy" in the example). . You can also register both the correct word and the wrong word, and the system only needs to know which word in the index is the correct word or the wrong word.

This can be applied to all cases of applying the repetition selection method on the keypad. For example, ambiguity such as "country <=> Kuka" occurs in Samsung Electronics' input method, which can be applied to the same. In addition, similar to FIG. 4-1, when a pair of Jamo is placed on each button and the syllable 1 button, the 2 sound, the 3 sound, and the vowel 1 are selected, the syllable completion button is pressed in units of syllables. This can also apply. When the user inputs "very", even if "troublesome" is output temporarily, it can be corrected to "very" by referring to the index at the end of the word (for example, inputting a space).

At this time, if the word index exists on both the client side and the server side, the client side index is first searched to identify the correct word, and when the identification fails, the server side index is secondarily searched and finally corrected. You can identify words.

To distinguish between units of words, as anyone can think of, can be identified by the elements that distinguish them. For example, you can think of spaces between spaces, between the beginning and the end of words, between the spaces and the end of inputs, between spaces and mode switching, and so on. Determining the correct word by referring to the index is performed on a word-by-word basis, so that an index reference can be made and the correct word can be determined when inputting an element that distinguishes words.

This can be applied to any case where ambiguity occurs by applying the iterative selection method. For example, ambiguity can occur if the final consonants are the same consonants belonging to the same button. For example, "Country" <=> "Kuka". When entering codes by alphabet, the syllable (letter) units are entered without recognition, so in many cases, unconsciously entering "country" results in "guka". In this case, if it is not possible to know which of the two words is the target word by time delay or the like, the system (terminal or server) can find the target word by referring to the index. In this case, even though the final "a" of "country" and the first "a" of "ga" are pressed in succession, in most cases, the target word is "country". The method of identifying the target word with reference may also be efficient.

In addition, it is obvious that this is applicable to all languages in which the repeated selection method is not limited to Korean. For example, "AB" or "BA" if the input of [2]-[2]-[2] is "AB" or "BA" for English input or in the English mode of another language keypad. If "is registered in the index as the correct word, then it can be recognized and provided to the user as the target word. If a plurality of words that generate ambiguity are all registered in the index as the correct word, the word with high frequency can be provided to the user first, and the user can finally confirm the target word.

If there is an ambiguity about the input of a word, if all the words corresponding to the input are recognized as correct words even when referring to the index, the user may be given feedback by appropriate means (visual and audio). .

The method of allowing the user to confirm the target word is to list a plurality of words that are recognized as correct words in the display window in order of frequency (or priority) and use the up / down scroll or the numeric buttons corresponding to the displayed order. This allows the user to determine the target word. Alternatively, select a control that displays only the most frequently used words and displays the next word if it is not the target word (called "next word control" for convenience). If the target word is not the target word, the user can continue to search the target word by selecting the next word control again. In this case, after searching for the target word, the target word is confirmed by input of any other button (for example, input of any button other than selection of the next word control such as selecting another alphabet or blank or mode switching). Can be.

The selection of the next word control can be applied to either the "partial full selection method" or the "repetitive selection method (standard / simple)" described in the earlier application. If the next word control is arranged at the position of the reference grid of a particular button, the next word control will be selected with that particular button.

6. How to use simple code and short input method / parallel input method

6.1 Alphabet Code

When accessing an information system using an information communication terminal, input of an alphabet is mandatory. Alternatively, the alphabet to be input can be entered by number coding. Many miniaturized telecommunication terminals usually adopt a keypad type interface. Here, the code refers to all kinds of codes, for example, telephone numbers, securities (listed company) codes, city codes, department codes, subway station codes, bank codes, etc., are innumerable. The advantage of encoding the various names is that input can be simplified.

The information communication terminal includes all types of information communication terminals, such as a personal computer, a mobile communication device, a smart phone, a PDA, a two-way text transmission and reception device, and an ATM. It also covers terminals without communication functions, such as electronic organizers. Information systems include all types of systems, including systems that can be accessed visually through a GUI, as well as systems that can only be accessed by sound, such as ARS. The system also narrowly means the server side system, and broadly includes the client software of the terminal that is compatible with the server system.

It is useful to memorize various codes by using the alphabet placed on the keypad. In the memorization of the code, there may be a method by simple naming, initial naming, and full naming. The summary is as follows.

Simple naming is the assignment of a code to a number associated with the word or phrase you want to code (collectively referred to as "word" below). For example, in the case of Korean, in the case of the company name code, the code of "Gasan Electronics" is referred to as "1799" associated with a, ㅅ, ㅈ, ㅈ as a simple code based on FIG. 4-2. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to know the simple code of a specific word by highlighting the a, ㅅ, ㅈ, ㅈ associated with the simple code "1799" in the "gasanja", and furthermore, from the phrase You can also extract In the case of simple naming, the code of a number of letters belonging to a word to be coded is defined as a code, and thus the code of "additional electron" is not necessarily "1799". For example, the simple code of "stock" can be a simple code of values associated with, ㅅ, ㅣ, ㄹ. It may be referred to as "1749" associated with a, σ, ㅓ, ㅈ, or "13294293" associated with the entire alphabet constituting the "additional electron". For simplicity, the code associated with the whole alphabet constituting the phrase is called "total association simple naming" for convenience, and the designation of a simple code with respect to some alphabets of a particular phrase is called "some association simple naming" for convenience. In any case, simple naming (ie, simple code) can be thought of as specifying a code in terms of phrases associated with the alphabets that make up that phrase. The same applies to languages other than Korean. For example, in "captain", the "2786" associated with the consonant "CPTN" can be a simple code, which is a partially related simple code, which is called "consonant related simple code" for convenience.

If you create a consonant associative simple code for a word that starts with vowel, such as "escape", it becomes "727" corresponding to "SCP", which is the same as the consonant associative simple code of "scape". Therefore, it is possible to think of a simple code associated with the first vowel and the consonant in order to minimize the overlap between the defined simple code and the simple code corresponding phrase, while using the abbreviated simple code. For convenience, we call it "First Code + Consonant Simple Code." Like the other simple codes, the first vowel + consonant related simple codes also have the advantage of mechanically generating simple codes for specific words.

Not only words but phrases can also be coded by simple naming. Using the letter "syllable" that best connotes the meaning of the phrase "where to go", for example, in the previous application, "8314" mapped to o, c, a, d can be simplified. In the case of English, a simple code of "3886" associated with d, t, t, n, which has a phonetic value, for example, "date tonight" in the Election.

Initial naming is a special case of some associative simple naming. In the case of Korean, initial naming may have a method of specifying a number mapped to a consonant (first consonant) as a code based on a syllable (letter). This is called "syllable based initial naming" for convenience. In the case of "added electrons", the initial code by syllable-based initial naming becomes "1799" related to the consonant consonants of each syllable (letter). Syllable-based initial naming can also be applied to languages other than Korean. For example, in English, the initial code by the syllable-based initial naming of the word "entertainment" may be "3886" associated with e, t, t, and m. Syllable-based initial naming can be more useful in the case of Korean where one syllable constitutes one letter. As well as Korean, it can be usefully used in other languages such as Chinese and Japanese, where one syllable forms one letter. In Chinese, the syllable-based initial code of 北京 (Beijing: first to 'e' and four tones) and the last 'i' to two tones, is “25” associated with b and j based on Fig. 1-1. It becomes "14" based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4.

Similarly, initial naming is possible for a verse, where the initial code is "81" associated with the first alphabet of each word o, a in the phrase "Where to go" in the Election. In English, the initial code of the word-based initial naming for the phrase "dance with the wolf" given in the previous application is "3979" associated with d, w, t, and w. Word-based initial naming can be useful in any language to give code to the whole phrase.

For simplicity, we call it "Simple Code" (i.e., simple code in a broad sense) or "short code" for convenience. do. Totally related simple codes, consonant related simple codes, syllable based initial codes, and word based initial codes have regularity in generating their chords, so they can be used universally, and others have created simple codes based on such rules. Even if it is easy to use.

Full naming is the input value of a phrase to be coded by a specific character input method. Therefore, this may vary depending on the character input method applied, and it can be regarded as a code of a numerical value corresponding to a certain phrase in alphabetical units. In the case of "Seoul" as an example in the earlier application, the full code by the partial partial selection method (referred to in the earlier application) is "7745888944" based on Fig. 4-2. If the full code by the standard repetition selection method (mentioned in the earlier application) is "7448884". If the keypad is different from that of Fig. 4-2 or another alphabet input method is applied, there will be a full code value accordingly.

6.2 Traditional Chinese Character Input Method

In the Chinese input method, as in the method of inputting Chinese characters in Korean, it is common to input English corresponding to Chinese pronunciation and to input the selected Chinese characters when it becomes a convertible Chinese character using the "Hanja conversion key". In other words, when entering the Chinese pinyin in Roman alphabet, the system searches for the corresponding Chinese characters and provides them to the user. See Figure 5-1. In Chinese, the full code can be determined based on the English pronunciation of Chinese.

6.3 Unique Simple Code

If the simple code can be decrypted on the client side (i.e., the client side has a specific phrase and a simple code value corresponding to the specific phrase), the phrase corresponding to the input simple code is transmitted to the server side. Can be. Even if the simple code can be decoded on the client side, if the server requires simple code depending on the nature of the application, the simple code itself (that is, the numbered sequence) can be sent to the server side. You can interpret This means that simple code decryption can be done on the client side or on the server side.

When a simple code is defined and used for a plurality of phrases, there may be a plurality of phrases corresponding to the same simple code. The ambiguity that can occur between simple codes is called "second ambiguity" for convenience. In this case, inside the system, it is possible to create a unique code value by adding a serial number to a simple code having the same value, but the user mainly uses the simple code associated with a specific phrase, which causes secondary ambiguity. In such a case, it is natural that the system should be able to recommend such phrases to users according to their use priority. If different phrases have the same simple code, the serial number can be used as a priority for recommending the user to the user by attaching the serial number to the simple code according to the frequency of use of the phrase within the system. Of course, it does not have to be a serial number, and the system may have priority information separately.

For example, if the simple code of "Securities information" is equal to the syllable reference initial code "9196", and the simple code of "stake information" equals the syllable reference initial code "9196", You can add a serial number and use the serial number as a priority that recommends it to the user. If the frequency of use of "securities information" is high, the priority may be given to "securities information" = "91961", and "sovereign information" = "91962". Similarly, if the initial syllables of 先生 (xiansheng: vowel a) are equal to the syllable-based initial codes of “97”, sequential numbers are assigned according to the frequency of use of each word. The serial number can be used as priority. If the frequency of use of xianshen g is higher than that of xuesheng, xiansheng = 971 and xuesheng = 972. The simple code created by adding the serial number will be referred to as "Unicode Simple Code" for convenience, and the simple code with redundancy without attaching the serial number is simply called "Simple Code". Code ".

In the example of xiansheng and xuesheng, if the user enters only “97”, the system can provide the xiansheng and xuesheng to the user, let the user double-select, and Has recognized this from the beginning and entered "971", the system can recognize it as "xiansheng".

Here, by displaying the "x, s" used as the basis of the syllable-based initial code, it is possible to give the user a better visual effect.One of the methods of displaying the embossed text is capitalized like XianSheng. In addition, the system may interpret the simple code “97” from the capitalized words.

6.4 Examples of Simple Codes

The following is an example of assigning a simple code (syllable standard initial code) to a city name. This can be useful in railway information systems.

. Seoul = 78, Suwon = 78, Daejeon = 39, Sintanjin = 739,. . .

Here, the syllable-based initial codes of Seoul and Suwon are the same, so in order to avoid this in the system, simple codes such as "Seoul = 781" and "Suwon = 782" can be unique. If the user sends only "78" to the system, the system will give appropriate feedback (for example, provide a list of Seoul and Suwon or speak it by voice) and let the user select either Seoul or Suwon. If the user first recognized this and entered "781", the system would recognize it as "Seoul".

If the server-side system does not require the simple code "78" but needs the word "Seoul" itself, the client side interprets the simple code "78" and sends "Seoul" to the server side. Alternatively, even if the simple code can be interpreted on the client side, if the server requires the simple code itself according to the characteristics of the application, the input simple code itself may be sent to the server side.

Another example of assigning a simple code (all-related simple code, syllable-based initial code, consonant-related simple code, first vowel + consonant-related simple code) to a city name is based on Fig. 1-1. The syllable-based initial code of) becomes "25" associated with b and j, the total associated simple code becomes "2345464", and the consonant related simple code becomes "2564" associated with b, j, n, g.

Here are some examples of securities stocks (listed companies): This can be useful in various securities information systems.

. Donghwa Pharmaceutical = 3098, Digital Shipbuilding = 39397, Handong Freetel = 83643,. . .

For example, in the case of "Digital Chosun", it is possible to give a visually better effect to the user by highlighting and displaying "c, r, r, r, r" used as the basis of syllable-based initial codes.

An example of a bank code is as follows: This can be useful in ATMs and various financial information systems.

. National (Bank) = 14, Hana (Bank) = 82,. . .

Here, it is obvious that the user can utilize the simple code defined in this way by inputting the phrase by interpreting and displaying it to the user. This is called a "shortcut input method", and the following will be described in detail together with the "parallel input method".

6.5 Automatic reassignment of priorities based on frequency of selection

Furthermore, if the priority of "Securities Information" and "Sovereignty Information" was first and second, respectively, but the number of times a particular user selects "Sovereignty Information" significantly, the priority of "Sovereign Information" May be adjusted to be higher than the priority of "securities information". There are various ways as described, but you can achieve this by changing the serial number. If the system has priority information separately, it is possible to change the priority information.

The criteria for determining whether the number of times to select "sovereign information" is remarkably large may be determined by the system or may be (re) designed by the user. For example, if the selection criteria is different from a predetermined priority at least 8 times out of 10, the existing priority may be automatically corrected. Depending on the option, you may be asked to confirm the correction.

The same can be applied to other languages, and the same can be said for the case where “sovereign information” and “securities information” are replaced with “xiansheng” and “xuesheng” respectively.

6.6 Automatic designation of simple code and incidence of simple code

In particular, consonant-related simple codes, syllable-based initial codes, and word-based initial codes other than the totally related simple codes have regularity in generating simple codes as described above. Therefore, when a user specifies a simple code for a specific phrase, a simple code is generated. If you enter a specific phrase with the rule specified, you can automatically extract the corresponding simple code and save it in the system. In addition, by displaying the alphabet associated with the simple code, it is possible to increase the ease of use. In the case of English, the alphabet related to the simple code is highlighted. It can be highlighted using capital letters.

In addition, the earlier application proposed "shortening input method" and "shortening / pool parallel input method". The simple code for the shortcut input can be defined in the system, the user can change it, or the user can specify the simple code for the new phrase.

In deciding simple codes for new phrases, simple code generation rules such as all-related interest code, partial-related simple code, consonant-related simple code, syllable-based initial code, and word-based initial code can be used. . For example, if a user wants to use the word-based initial code as a simple code in generating a simple code for "dance with the wolf", enter "dance with the wolf" in the simple code generation mode, and Enter the word-based initial code "3983". Likewise, when generating a simple code for "Stock information", if you want to use the syllable-based initial code as a simple code, you must enter "Stock information" and "9196" in the simple code generation mode.

However, if a user designates a simple code for a specific phrase, the user remembers the type of simple code desired by the system and inputs a phrase to generate a simple code, without having to input the code for the specific phrase. Simplecodes can be assigned automatically. In the above example, the syllable-based initial code is set in the system, and by entering only "securities information", the simple code for "securities information" can be automatically designated as "9196". Similarly, the syllable-based initial code can be set in the system, and by entering xiansheng, the simple code for xiansheng can be automatically assigned to "97".

In the case of English, it is possible to use capital letters by displaying the alphabet to be used as a simple code. Therefore, the simple code designation method can be specified in advance by using an uppercase letter as the simple code, and when "DaTe ToNignt" is input, "3886" corresponding to the uppercase "DTTN" is automatically designated as the simple code or "ToNignt ShoW". "8679" corresponding to the uppercase "TNSW" can be designated as a simple code automatically.

6.7 Shortcut Input Method and Parallel Input Method of Phrase Using Simple Code

When a simple code (initial code is a special case of the simple code, it is included in the simple code unless otherwise specified) is entered as a phrase corresponding to the simple code in the system (client side system or server side system). It is possible to recognize and process. Therefore, if a phrase corresponding to a specific simple code is recognized and shown to the user, it can be used to input a word.

In fact, in the foreign alphabet input method, an index is assigned to the terminal (client-side system) for each word, and the corresponding word is displayed according to the priority of each word when the user enters the code. The character input system is implemented by allowing words to be determined. You can find two Internet sites at http://www.tegic.com and http://www.zicorp.com. Such a method will be referred to as "total associated shortened input method" or "foreign method" in the present invention for convenience. Or, since the typical input system using this approach is Tegic's “T9”, it will be called “T9LIM: T9 Like Input Method”. Figure 5-2 shows an example of input from the T9 system of Tegic. As shown in Fig. 5-2, in order to input meet, the user inputs 622. If you enter "," the system initially gives you "off", but if you enter "6228", "meet" is displayed.

Comparing Tegic and Zi's methods with the alphabet input method proposed by the applicant, the applicant's alphabet input method gives a unique code in alphabetical units and inputs a target alphabet or target phrase by full code. In the foreign method mentioned above, the whole associated simple code is given in word units, and the target word can be input by the simple code.

The disadvantage of foreign methods is that you can enter only predefined words by assigning codes on a word-by-word basis.If you have different words with the same code, use a toggle button or a move button to enter words that are not frequently used. By selecting and confirming target words, input is not easy, words that are not target words may appear temporarily during input, occupy a large amount of storage capacity of the system, and are expensive to implement.

Here, it is pointed out that a simple code (some association or all association) is given to a commercial phrase (a concept including both a commercial word or a common phrase) and a target phrase can be input using the simple code. Simple code for common phrases can be defined in the system and provided to the user, or can be assigned by the user. Alternatively, the user should be able to modify the simple code predefined in the system. What the user can specify randomly has the advantage that the user can easily know the simple code value for a particular common phrase.

In the present invention, a method of inputting a target phrase using a simple code (including partially associated simple code, all associated simple code, and initial code) is called a "shortened input method" for convenience, and a method of inputting a target alphabet by a full code. For convenience, it is referred to as a "pull input method" as compared to a short input method. In addition, as described below, the shortcut input method and the pool input method may be applied in parallel, and the method of applying the shortcut input method and the pool input method in parallel may be referred to as "short / full parallel input method" or simply " Parallel input method ".

The ambiguity caused by using the repeated selection method among the full input methods that assign a unique code in alphabetical units and input the code is called "primary ambiguity" or "alphabet ambiguity" for convenience. I'll call you. On the other hand, there is an ambiguity in which different words exist for the same code in a manner in which a code is assigned to all words and a target word can be entered through the code as in a foreign method. Tea ambiguity "or" phrase ambiguity ". In the present invention, simply ambiguity means primary ambiguity.

If a simple code is first interpreted as a simple code (i.e., a short input method is applied first or a short input mode is used as a basic input mode), and there is no simple code corresponding to the input value, the second code is a full code. It is possible to construct a scenario such as recognizing a full input method (i.e., applying a second full input method), and, on the contrary, checking whether a full code is performed first on an input value (that is, applying a full input method first or a basic one). Scenarios such as applying full input mode in input mode, or recognizing as simple code (i.e., applying the shortened input method secondarily) if a full code is not formed are possible. The first interpretation of the input value as a simple code can be regarded as the application of "shortened input mode" as the basic input mode, and the first interpretation as "full input mode" as the basic input mode. It can be seen as applying. It is preferable that users who use commercial phrases mainly in text input should apply the shortcut input method (that is, use the shortcut input mode as the basic input mode), and if not, the full input method is applied first. It may be desirable to use the full input mode as the default input mode.

In this case, when the basic input mode is set to the full input mode, the input value is first interpreted as a full code. Therefore, even if a simple code is input, the input value can form a full code. A word other than the target word may be input. For example, in the case of applying the standard repetition selection method as the full input method in FIG. 4-2, the simple code of the word "corn" is set to "877" (using syllable-based initial code), and the input is primarily performed. As it is considered full code, it can be recognized as "F". This is when the corn of the second and third letters correspond to the same button, such as "corn", "corn", "inexhaustible", "war", "excellent", "wajangchang", "woodangtang", and the like. On the contrary, when the short input mode is set as the basic input mode, the input value is primarily interpreted as a simple code, and thus, even when the full code is input, it may be recognized as a word other than the target word. In other words, this is the ambiguity between the simple code and the full code, which is called "third ambiguity" for convenience.

This third order ambiguity can be overcome by a toggle method or a list selection method similar to the existing method. Alternatively, there may be other methods, such as switching from the full input mode to the short input mode or the short input mode to the full input mode in word units before inputting an ambiguity. This can be done by entering the word hiragana or hiragana in katakana mode, or by selecting the word hiragana / katagana conversion control in the word unit by setting the "a / a" control as presented in the applicant's application. It is similar to what you can do. For example, if the default input mode is the full input mode, the system recognizes it as a simple code from the beginning and inputs the value by inputting it after placing the "short / full" control and selecting it. The target word can be provided to the user. In the case of using the shortcut input mode as the basic input mode, the input value input after selecting the "shortcut / full" control can be recognized and processed as a full code from the beginning. The "Short / Pull" control can be pre-entered or post-input for the target word as well, but it would be convenient to pre-populate in this case.

The determination of whether the input value is a full code or a simple code when the parallel input method is applied may be made in units of words as referring to an index in order to remove the first ambiguity. It may be determined whether it is a simple code.

When the full input method is set as the default mode and the parallel input method is applied, the simple code is input at the point where it is determined that the full value is not formed by checking whether the input value forms a full code for each code input. The efficiency of the parallel input method can be increased by showing the phrase corresponding to the user by referring to the simple code index. Similarly, when the parallel input method is applied to the short input method as the default mode, the full input method is set at the moment of comparing the input value and the index every time a code is input and confirms that there is no word that matches the input value in the index. It can be judged by the full code of. This means that the third order ambiguity that occurs in the middle of the input can be removed at the beginning of the input by applying the rules of each full input method. This can be applied to the case of using the alphabet input method which is not presented in the previous application as the pull input method. For example, based on the full input method (standard repetition selection method, partial partial selection method) presented in the previous application, it is as follows.

In the case of Korean, for example, when the standard repetition selection method is applied based on Fig. 4-2 as a full input method, the second input value and the third input value of all syllables by the full code must always have the same value. If this condition is violated, the input value can be determined and processed as a simple code. In the case where the consonant is allowed to be processed as a combination of basic consonants, the judgment criteria may be applied accordingly. This is applicable in all cases where the standard repetition method is applied.

In addition, in all languages, when the partial full selection method is applied as the full input method, two input values correspond to one alphabet, and the second input value is limited to the first input value among the two input values. have. For example, in the case of English, when only left and right linear combinations are used as shown in Fig. 1-1, when the numbers are not selected by the partial partial selection method, the buttons in the first row ([1], [2], [3]) are used. ) Is used as the first input value corresponding to one alphabet, the value that can come as the second input value is also the button ([1], [2], [3]) on the first row. Similarly, if the second row of buttons ([4], [5], [6]) is entered after [2] + [1] is entered, the next value to form the full code is also the second row. It is one of the buttons [4], [5], and [6]. As soon as the input value violates this, the system considers the input value as a simple code and can recommend the word corresponding to the simple code to the user according to the priority. For example, in the parallel input method in which the full partial selection method is the full input method and the full input method is the basic input mode, as shown in FIG. 5-3, when the user enters 4357, the simple code of “help” is 2nd. As soon as input value 3 is input, the system recognizes that the input value is not full code, and the input value is regarded as simple code and can be processed.

If the partial partial selection method is applied to Fig. 4-2, the next button that can come to the input of the first [1] button to form a full code is the [1] or [2] button. In case of breaching this, it is determined that the input value is a simple code rather than a full code, and the target word corresponding to the input value can be recommended to the user according to the priority by referring to the index. When four alphabets of P, Q, R, and S are assigned to the [7] button as shown in Fig. 1-3, as indicated in the earlier application, one alphabet of four alphabets is placed on the grid forming the upper and lower adjacent combinations. In this case, when the [7] button is entered to form a full code for one alphabet, the next button is the third row of buttons ([7], [8], [9]). ) Or only the up / down adjacent button ([4] button) can come, so if it is violated, the input value can be treated as a simple code. This is applicable to all languages where the partial partial selection method set out in the earlier application is applied.

For example, in the state where “25” is stored as the syllable-based initial code in the simple code of Beijing (Beijing) in the simple code index based on Fig. 1-1, the partial full selection method is used as the full input method. With the full input mode set as the default input mode, when the user inputs "25", the system enters the full value "25" as soon as [5] is entered after the first [2] input. Recognizes that it cannot achieve (since [2] is one of [1], [2], [3]). "北京" corresponding to "can be provided to the user. In the case of Chinese, a Chinese character (漢字, 北京) can be provided to the user in a phrase corresponding to the simple code “25” exemplarily illustrated (since the kanji “北京” is a target word). For languages that use non-Chinese phonetic characters, the system will provide the user with a “Beijing” corresponding to the simple code “25”. If there are several phrases corresponding to the simple code “25”, it can be provided in the form of a list or the user can select a desired phrase by repeatedly pressing a specific button. See also.

After all, applying the parallel input method as shown in Fig. 5-4 is to register a simple code for a frequently used word such as “北京 (Beijing)” in the index, and parallel input of the general full input method and short input without mode switching. However, when entering a word registered as a simple code is to be able to enter in a few strokes.

In the case of Fig. 4-5, since only one basic consonant is assigned to each button, when a syllable-based initial code that can be used universally in Korean is used as a simple code, the short input method and the full input method are applied in parallel. In addition, there is a good characteristic that can be input without the third ambiguity. In other words, if the user enters the syllable-based initial code when the parallel input method is applied, the input value cannot form the full code from the second input (when the sound and the sound are input by the control processing method). You can search for and recommend the appropriate words to users based on their priorities. The same is true for full code input.

As mentioned above, one of the "cores" of the present invention is that it is possible to determine whether the input value is a simple code or a full code during the input when the parallel input method is applied. This applies not only to the case of using the pool input method proposed by the applicant, but also to the case of using another pool input method. For example, there is a method of inputting an alphabet by combining a first button to which each alphabet is assigned and a second button corresponding to the ranking of the alphabet in the first button. In other words, P = [7] + [1] in Figure 1-1. In this case, since the second button becomes one of the [1], [2], and [3] buttons in Fig. 1-1, the system regards the input value as a simple code when the input value violates this rule. You can handle it. In particular, the full input method proposed by the applicant has a good characteristic that it is easy to know whether the input value is full code when the parallel input method is applied as in the above example.

Also, as mentioned in the Applicant's earlier application, the interpretation of the simple code or full code may occur on the client side or on the server side. And in looking up the index to overcome the primary ambiguity (alphabetic ambiguity) in the previous application, the simple code or full code is interpreted as a scenario in which the client side index is first referred to and the server side index is secondarily referred to. This can also be applied. Conversely, it is possible to refer to server-side indexes primarily and to client-side indexes secondly. Furthermore, the input value is first interpreted as a simple code, but the client side index is first referred to, the server side index is secondary, and if the simple code for the input value cannot be retrieved, it is interpreted as full code again. However, if the client side analyzes first and the client side does not have such an analysis function, the server side analyzes can be performed secondarily. As another example, the input value may be interpreted as a simple code primarily, but may be provided to the user by referring to both the client-side index and the server-side index, and the user may select the target word. Similar modifications are possible in applying the analysis method (simple code, full code) and the analysis location (client side, server side). In other words, various combinations are possible in the application of the analysis method (simple code, full code) and the analysis place (client side, server side). That is, in the order of (A)-(B)-(C)-(D) or the order of (A)-(C)-(B)-(D) in FIG. ), (B), (C), (D) means that it can be applied in the order by all the various combinations.

The advantages of applying the short input method and the full input method in parallel are as follows. First of all, the full input method can be used, so the user can input all words even if they do not exist in advance other than the pre-defined words. / All association), and the number of input strokes can be greatly reduced by specifying a partial association simple code. In addition, there is an advantage that can be given a word-based initial code not only for words but also for phrases. However, the foreign method uses the index of the word unit to input all the words. Therefore, in order to minimize the case where the same code is given to different words, the entire associated simple code has to be used.

In addition, the system must have a "index" that contains a specific phrase and code value for that phrase, requiring much less storage than a foreign method that has a "index" for every word. do. And this "index" requires the system to have "index" for the correct word or "index" for the wrong word in order to eliminate ambiguity. Can be used jointly.

In all languages, the phonetic consonant is a consonant, so the technique of extracting consonants and making abbreviations has been widely used. In the case of English, for example, in the military term "captain", the consonant "CPT", which has a phonetic value, is extracted and used as an abbreviation, "PVT" in "private" and "SG T" in "sergent". "Abbreviation", "staff sergent" abbreviation "SSG", "sergent first class" abbreviation and so on. Of course, the "captain" and "private" is composed of two syllables, respectively, but the consonants extracted from the abbreviation can be regarded as consonants representing each syllable. Thus, in the case of "captain", "278" associated with "CPT" can be specified as a simple code.

In this way, the short-term input method can be applied to the common phrases by specifying a partially related simple code. Phonetically, syllables are defined as "psychological entities." Also, having a note in a syllable is consonant. If only the collection "AAI" is extracted from the example captain, it is almost impossible to infer the captain. However, extracting the consonant "CPTN" or "CPT" makes it easy to infer the captain. Even if you remove the vowel for each word in English and list only the consonants, you can usually infer the original sentence. In other words, the use of the partial association simple code in association with each consonant that constitutes the syllable means that the user can naturally adapt to the shortcut input method and can be convenient for the user.

Particularly in English, the use of abbreviations is common, and in the case of listed companies, a certain number of abbreviations are designated, so simple codes can be used based on these abbreviations.

Allowing the user to specify a simple code (partial association, total association) for a particular phrase has the advantage of making it easier to remember code values for common phrases. Furthermore, if a user requires only a few common phrases (for example, use less than 10 common phrases), they do not assign codes associated with the alphabet of common phrases. 1, 2, 3,. . . You can also assign a simple code.

6.8 Grouping Simple Codes / Phrasebooks and Specifying Search Ranges

If you specify a simple code for a large number of phrases, there is a possibility that a lot of redundancy may occur. By grouping the phrases corresponding to the simple code, the simple code is searched only for a specific group of phrases. ) Can be reduced. A phrase does not necessarily belong to one group, but may belong to several groups.

For example, the names of listed companies, city names, commercial phrases, ... In addition, the group of common phrases can be grouped in a tree form with subgroups of social, political, ... In this example, two-step grouping is presented, but tree-type grouping is possible in three, four, or more steps. See Figures 5-6. If the user (or the system) restricts the simple code search range to the listed company name group, the system searches the named phrase corresponding to the simple code entered only in the category of the listed company name when entering a specific simple code. Difference in ambiguity can be reduced. Similarly, if the search range is a commercial phrase, it can be a search range including all sub-groups below the common phrase group. If a social field group is designated as a search range among common phrase groups, only the group including the social field or less (in a tree-type group structure) will be search range.

The tree-like group in Figs. 5-6 can be thought of as a folder in the Windows Explorer. The search range can also be automatically redirected by the system. For example, if a hierarchical structure of administrative districts is stored as a subgroup of city names, and the user selects a specific city, then the search range for the next input is naturally the name of the sub-district unit of the specific city. Will be For example, after the user selects "Seoul" in the city, the next choice would be "gu" in Seoul, and once the user selects "Yangcheon", the next choice would be " East ”.

6.9 Use of a relay server

The simple code can be interpreted on the client side or on the server side, and the phrase corresponding to the simple code is dedicated to the client side or other server side in charge of decoding the simple code (including the full code in some cases). There may be a relay server provided. See FIG. 6-1. In addition, in FIG. 6-1, if the client side decodes the simple code primarily and does not interpret the phrase corresponding to the input simple code, the phrase corresponding to the simple code input from the relay server is analyzed and interpreted secondly. In case of failure, it is possible to interpret the phrase corresponding to the simple code input from each server again three times. The third simple code decryption server (called "third server" for convenience) is a server equipped with an input simple code or an application using a phrase corresponding to the simple code.

If a relay server is provided, even if the tertiary server needs a phrase other than the simple code, the user enters the simple code and the third server does not have to store the simple code and the phrase corresponding to the simple code. In addition, it is possible that the relay server interprets the simple code input from the user and delivers the phrase corresponding to the simple code to the tertiary server.

Each time a code value of a simple code is inputted, the phrase corresponding to the simple code is searched for the index stored and the feedback is provided to the client side or each server side, or the word unit may be provided.

6.10 Word Division

In the present invention, the word unit means from the beginning of the word to the end of the word. This can be identified by the combination of the word and any element that can differentiate the word (word start, space, mode switch, enter,…). For example, a space to a space, a space to a mode switch, etc. may identify that a word is input through a word start to a word end. Word-by-word feedback can be fully implemented in any language that supports the current network environment.

6.11 Downloading simple codes / correspondence phrases

Furthermore, a simple code on the server side and a phrase corresponding to the simple code can be downloaded to the client side without the user directly inputting and storing the phrase.

The downloading unit may be downloaded in one phrase unit, or may be downloaded in a group unit (group of tree structure) of the above-mentioned phrases. If you select the upper group, you can download the lower group. You can download while maintaining the tree structure of the server-side phrase group, or you can download phrases belonging to the group and its subgroups as a group specified by the user on the client side. If you have a relay server whose main function is to decode Simplecode, the relay server may handle this function.

7. Entering Symbols

As presented in the previous application, it has been explained that the national alphabets can be arranged in the order of "closest to the reference grid", followed by the number and the English alphabet. It has been explained that national language alphabets and numbers can be selected. Likewise, in applying the subsequent control processing method, not only the national alphabet belonging to a specific button, but also a number and an English alphabet can be input through the subsequent control processing method.

The present invention further provides a method (that is, by means of a hidden control processing method) that can be efficiently input without displaying various symbols and the like, which were displayed and inputted on a keypad in an earlier application. do.

In other words, put the symbol control in the appropriate grid among the grids where the controls are placed, and input the symbol by combining the symbol control with a button that can mean a symbol (a button other than the control button). Here, for example, a button that can mean a symbol is a [5] button because a period can easily be associated with "ㅁ" in the period.

For example, in the embodiment of the present invention (Fig. 4-2), the symbol control can be placed at the position of the grid which can be selected by pressing the [*] button twice in succession. That is, the relationship between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet such as a (representative alphabet), ㅋ (2nd), symbol (3rd), .... For control pre-input, when entering "period", ㅁ = {Symbol} + ㅁ = [*] + [*] + [5]. When input after control, ㅁ = ㅁ + {Symbol} = [5] + [*] + [*]. If the symbol control is placed at the position of the grid selectable by pressing the [*] button three times, the input of the [*] button is added one by one in the example.

If only one symbol control is provided, only about ten symbols can be input even if one symbol means is given to each of the ten numeric buttons. For example, the meaning of the symbol is given to each button as follows.

[1] button:? The meaning of the word ("ㄱ" is placed, similar in shape to?)

* [2] button:! Meaning ("ㄴ" is placed, the same as the first letter of "exclamation mark")

[3] button: The meaning of $.

[4] button:. . .

[5] button:. Meaning ("ㅁ" is placed, the same as the first letter of the "period")

[6] button: Meaning of * ("ㅂ" is placed, same as first letter of "asterisk")

[7] button: The meaning of, ("ㅅ" is placed, same as the first letter of "comma")

[8] button: meaning of "(" ㅇ "is placed, same as the first letter of" quotation code ")

[9] button: The meaning of ~ (the collection "ㅡ" is arranged and looks similar to ~)

[0] button: Meaning of @ (number 0 is placed and looks like @)

As described above, a symbol can be input by combining a button and a symbol control that can be associated with various symbols. The meanings of the symbols on each button are as follows: the association between the national name / shape of the symbol and the arranged alphabet, or the association between the English name / shape and the arranged English alphabet, and the assigned numeric name / shape. The meaning of the symbol can be given by considering the relation with This may not be the same as it may be different depending on the taste of the individual, and may also allow the individual to (re) set the meaning of the symbol for each button.

Through this, the frequently used symbols can be treated as if they are the subsequent alphabets belonging to the easily associated number buttons. In the above example, the question mark is associated with the [1] button with "a" placed in consideration of the similarity in shape, because the period that is used more frequently than the question mark starts with "ㅁ".

Similarly, in assigning meanings to symbols for each button, English name / shape or numeric name / shape can be used. The example below can be used interchangeably with the national language.

[1] button:? Meaning (with the letter "q" placed in the first letter of "Question mark")

[2] button: The meaning of, ("c" is placed, same as the first letter of "Comma")

[3] button:. Meaning ("d" is placed, the same as the first letter of "Dot")

[4] button:! Meaning ("i" is placed and looks like "!")

[5] button:. . .

[6] button:. . .

[7] button: Meaning of / ("s" is arranged but same as first letter of "Slash")

[8] button:: Meaning (the number "8" is placed: and looks similar to)

[9] button:! Meaning ("x" is placed and associated with "eXclamation mark")

[0] button: Meaning of @ (number 0 is placed and looks like @)

The meaning of symbols based on the English language can be usefully used even in non-English speaking languages using keypads in which English is mixed. In addition, setting colons with similarities in the shape of the number 8 also has the advantage that they can be used universally regardless of language. Similarly, comma may be regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [9] button with a similarity to the number 9, but not in the above example.

The symbol control can be set to the appropriate button. In English, if you do not place any other control on the [*] button in Figure 1-1, select the symbol control with the [*] button 1 (i.e., place the symbol control at the position of the [*] button reference grid). You may. In the case of European languages with a modified alphabet with subscripts, the symbol control can be placed at the reference grid of the [0] or [#] button. However, if you put the symbol control on the [0] button, it is better not to give the meaning of the "@" symbol as in the example above.

If the symbol control is placed on the [*] button and the control input is applied, when entering colon (:) in Fig. 1-1 in English, it is as follows:: = [8] + {symbol} = [8] + [*] do.

As shown in the example above, only one symbol can be entered if you assign one symbol meaning to each button and place the symbol control on only one grid of the control button. In addition, in order to give meaning to each button, as in the example of English, the button assigned "s" may be assigned meanings such as slash, semi-colon, period, but only one of them is given the meaning of slash. Since the meaning of the dot is also assigned to the button assigned to "d", the exclamation mark inevitably takes into account the similarity of shape, and the button assigned to "i" is assigned to "!". Given meaning.

Therefore, a large number of symbol controls (eg, symbol control 1, symbol control 2,...) Can be selected to control the number of symbols can be input through the control processing method. For example, assign a dot meaning to a button assigned "d" (or a "period" to a button assigned to "ㅁ"), and use a similar comma as a follow-up alphabet of dot. Can be processed.

For example, a symbol input associated with a button to which a basic consonant with lattice or hard consonants is assigned may be “dot (.) = 3 ****”. Since “3 *** = large”, the [*] button can be used to enter the symbol promised 4 times. After entering in dot (.) Like “comma (,) = 3 *****”, it is possible to input by pressing the [*] button once more, which means that the Korean syllable does not start with the vowel “ㅡ”. It is used. The input of comma (,) can be understood in terms of chained subsequent control processing.

If no sound is to be input by the control method (ie no sound control), it is natural that "symbol control 1" is selected for [2] button 2 (skip control processing). Similarly colons and semi-colon of similar shape can be regarded as subsequent alphabets assigned to the same button and entered by the control method. The same applies to other symbols.

If you use two symbol controls as "Symbol Control 1" and "Symbol Control 2" in this way, you should give meaning to each button and remember it, and there is a limit to the number of symbols that can be entered. do. Therefore, you can enter more symbols by grouping symbols with the same techniques as dot and comma, grouping colon and semi-colon, and placing multiple symbol controls.

It is also desirable to group the symbols so as to be convenient for the user. The present invention shows examples of symbol groupings that can be used in general. First, the deformation form of dot may be set as a group based on the shape of various symbols. For example, dot (.), Comma (,), colon (:), semi- colon (;), quotation mark ("), .., question mark (?), Exclamation mark (!),. It is possible to group them together as a dot, that is, a group of symbols in the form of a dot, that is, "zero-dimensional", where? And! Are both zero- and one-dimensional. In the case of subgroups, the frequency of use can be considered as mentioned in the previous application, but it is better to allow the user to set them. When the number of symbols to be considered is large, it may be convenient to input the symbol control afterwards. On terminals with a display window, it can be seen that the symbol changes as the control button is pressed.

The association of the grouped dot (0-dimensional) symbols to a particular button can also be set for the user's convenience. For example, if you can represent a group and the most commonly used symbol is dot, then it can be considered as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [3] button containing the dot's "d". In the example of FIG. 7-1 in which the symbol control is added to FIG. 1-1, the symbol control button is set to the [*] button, and after the control is applied, dot = [3] + [*] and comma = [3]. + [*] + [*], colon = [3] + [*] + [*] + [*], semi- colon = [3] + [*] + [*] + [*] + [*] ,. . . Becomes Or, if it is a 0-dimensional form and is considered to be a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [0] button, it will be combined with the [0] button rather than the [3] button. Or, the dot form is the most basic form, so it can be regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [1] button.

Next, you can group the lines in the form of "one-dimensional" symbols. For example, slash (/), hat symbol (^), question mark (?), Exclamation mark (!), Parentheses 1 ((), parentheses 2 ()), angle brackets 1 (<), angle brackets 2 (>), square brackets 1 ([), square brackets 2 (]), tilde (~), minus (-), arrow1 (<-), arrow2 (->),. . . Can be grouped as such. Also, as described in the earlier application, sub-orders may be assigned in consideration of the frequency of use, and associating this with a subsequent alphabet of a specific button may set an appropriate button as described above. For example, it is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [1] button or as a subsequent alphabet of the [5] button in which the letter “l” is placed.

Then, the combination of lines, that is, "two-dimensional" forms, can be grouped into groups. For example, at (@), ampersent (&), asterisk (*), sharp (#), dollar ($), won symbol (W + =), yen symbol (¥),. . . , heart1 (♡), heart2 (♥), clover 1 (♧), white triangle 1 (◁), white triangle 2 (▷), white triangle 3 (∇),. . . , Black triangle 1 (◀),. . You can group like., ☏, ☎, ☜, ♨ and so on. Again, sub-orders can be considered in terms of their frequency of use, and associating with a particular button can be done with the appropriate method. However, it is necessary to associate it with a button other than the button that associates the symbol of the 0-dimensional form and the symbol of the 1-dimensional form.

As above, when grouping symbols into three groups of 0D, 1D, and 2D forms (referred to as "three groups" for convenience), there is an advantage that only three related numeric buttons are remembered, but are not frequently used. When entering a symbol, it is necessary to press the control button several times. Thus, if you show an example of subdividing the group further (called "detailed group" for convenience),

First, two-dimensional symbol groups are divided into symbol groups (eg *, #,%, ...) that form a combination of lines and symbol groups (eg ◁, ◀, ...) that form a single closed curve. Can be. In addition, in the group, symbols that form a figure such as ☏, ☎, ☜, ☞, ♨, ... can be placed in a separate group. This can also be done with subsequent alphabets belonging to the appropriate buttons. If these groups are to be set apart, these symbols may or may not be excluded from the preceding symbol group, as are other cases.

Next, one- or two-dimensional symbols are used in mathematical expressions: +,-, *, /, root (√), sigma (∑), integral (∫),. . . Etc. may be placed in a separate group. You can also place it in a subsequent alphabet that belongs to the appropriate button.

Also symbols that can indicate directions: →, ←, ↑, ↓, ↗, ↙, ↖, ↘, ◁, ▷, ◀,. . . Can be divided into groups. You can also consider the latter alphabet in conjunction with the appropriate button.

And a variety of parentheses that can form another group relatively reasonably: (,), [,], {,}, <,>,. . . Can be placed in another group. Also, in grouping in the form of parentheses, the left parenthesis and the right parenthesis may be grouped respectively.

In the case of not having only three major groups and allowing subgroups to be entered by them, they said that the alphabet belonging to the detailed group may or may not be left in the three major groups. It should be placed in a subordinate order.

By applying the above symbol grouping to Fig. 1-1, an example in which each group of symbols is regarded as a subsequent alphabet of a specific button is as follows. The symbol group of the 0-dimensional form is regarded as a follow-up alphabet belonging to the [0] button, the symbol group of the 1-dimensional form is regarded as a follow-up alphabet belonging to the [1] button, and the symbol group of the 2-dimensional form is assigned to the [2] button. It is regarded as a belonging alphabet, and the symbol group in the form of single closed curve among two-dimensional symbol groups is regarded as a follow-up alphabet belonging to the [8] button. Recognizes a subsequent alphabet belonging to a mathematical symbol group as a follow-up alphabet belonging to a [6] button, a direction sign group to a subsequent alphabet belonging to a [3] button, and a parenthesis sign group to any of the remaining numeric buttons It can be considered as a follow-up alphabet. As described above, in the case of associating a symbol group with each button, this is only one example, and can be set at the user's convenience.

In summary, the symbol can be regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to a specific button, and can be grouped into three groups (0, 1, and 2 dimensions) in the process of control, or a little more subdivided into 10 groups. It is one of the cores of the present invention to show that almost all symbols can be input by grouping. In addition, in considering each group of symbols as a follow-up alphabet belonging to a specific button, it is treated as a follow-up alphabet belonging to a button associated with a group of symbols by name, dimension, shape, etc. It is one of the cores of the present invention to be able to use a "hidden follow-up control method" while maintaining the alphabetical arrangement.

In the present application, the [*] button or any one of the up and down buttons is mainly used as a control button for a symbol, and the [#] button can be used as a subsequent control button for numbers and English alphabets. For example, if the [#] button is already used as a subsequent control button, additional controls for numbers and English alphabets can be placed on the available grid on the [#] button. In this case too, in the selection of the control, as mentioned above, the control that cannot be combined with the representative alphabet can be skipped so that the next available control is selected.

8. How to use the move button

8.1 Use of control buttons as control buttons

According to the previous application, control buttons in which various controls are arranged may be placed on any button in the 4 * 3 keypad, or may be placed on a separate button other than the 4 * 3 keypad. And in earlier applications, especially in languages with a large number of alphabets and a large number of modified alphabets, you may have experienced a lack of buttons for use as control buttons in a 4 * 3 keypad. In the present invention, it is pointed out that the primary function of the left / up / down movement button that is not used relatively frequently in the character input mode can be used as a control button mentioned in the present application and the present invention and shows such an example. In other words, in the character input mode, a separate button outside the 4 * 3 keypad is used as a control button, and the up / down / left movement buttons are used as the control button.

8-1 illustrates a button of a clamshell terminal which is typically used at present. The dashed [i] button is for accessing the Internet. This button may or may not be present depending on the terminal. In this case, the right shift button is used for blank input, and in Korean, it is also used as a syllable (letter) confirmation button for removing the first ambiguity. In the menu selection mode other than the text input mode, the up / down / left navigation buttons are useful as a navigation button for selecting a menu. However, in the character input mode, the up / down / left navigation buttons are not frequently used, and the up / down navigation buttons are not frequently used. For convenience, the up / down / left buttons are called “up / down left button” or “up / down left button”, and the up / down move button is called “up / down button” or “up / down button”. The same point is used when referring only to the movement button in either direction.

8.2 Arrange bottom button

First, the up, down, left and right buttons are usually placed above the number buttons. However, to use the primary function of these buttons as a button for entering various alphabets in the character input mode, it is useful to be placed at the bottom of the 4 * 3 keypad along with the [*] and [#] buttons which are mainly used as control buttons. It can be seen. 8-2 and 8-3 illustrate this. However, this is not necessarily required. For convenience, the example of the present invention will be described as an example in which a move button is disposed below the 4 * 3 keypad.

Here, it can be seen that the 5 * 3 keypad can be configured by combining the 4 * 3 keypad with the up and down buttons. This means that when applying the partial full selection method, each button can be divided into 15 grids of 3x5. Likewise, it is not necessary to arrange the up, down, left, and right buttons to form a 5 * 3 keypad as shown in FIG. 8-3.

8.3 Move Button Left or Right Position

The up, down, left and right navigation buttons can also be placed on the left or right side of the 4 * 3 keypad. In this case, in applying the partial partial selection method, the 4 * 4 keypad can be configured by combining the 4 * 3 keypad and the move button. 8-4 shows an example in which the up, down, left, and right moving buttons are provided on the right side of the 4 * 3 keypad.

This tends to increase in the size of the liquid crystal in the terminal, there is an advantage that the size of the liquid crystal of the terminal can be configured larger. In addition, the side battery mounting method of the mobile terminal presented in the applicant's Korean patent applications 10-2000-0002081, 10-2000-0005671, 10-2000-0067852, 10-2001-0002137 has good characteristics when applied in parallel.

8.4 Various use cases as control buttons and buttons for alphabet input

In the following, an example of using the move button is given. It is not limited to the following cases.

8.4.1 Example of use as symbol control button

In the Korean language, the sound control and the sound control are sometimes disposed on the [*] and [#] buttons, respectively. In addition, the sound control and sound control are arranged in the [*] button, the basic control and extended control are arranged in the [#] button, and the expansion control is arranged in the [#] button. In such a case, if the symbol control is placed on the [*] button or the [#] button, the beep, the beep, etc. first appear according to the input after the control button, and then the symbol is selected. The same is true for other languages.

However, if the symbol control is separated and placed on any one of the up and down buttons, the symbol can be entered immediately by entering the combination of the button associated with the symbol group and the symbol control button with the symbol control. 8-5 shows an example in which the primary function of the down shift button is used as a control button for selecting a symbol control. An example of applying post-control input to a symbol group in the 0-dimensional form is dot = [3] + [v], comma = [3] + [v] + [v], and colon = [3] + [v]. + [v] + [v], semi-colon = [3] + [v] + [v] + [v] + [v],. . . Becomes like this:

8.4.2 Example of using vowel element buttons in Korean

In particular, in the case of using the vowel elements (ㅡ, ㅣ,.) In the Korean example in the previous application, the vowel elements "." And "ㅎ" were placed together, which caused inconvenience to input "ㅎ". By disposing on any button of the up, down, left and right buttons, such inconvenience can be overcome. If the symbol control is placed on the down button and the vowel element "." Is on the up button, two buttons are used on the up, down, left, and right buttons. Alternatively, you can have three Korean vowel elements on the up and down buttons.

Like the symbol control on the button with the sound control, the Korean vowel element "." At the reference grid position of any of the up and down buttons. In addition, symbol controls may be placed in the order close to the reference grid. 8-6 is such an example. In this case, since the vowel element "." Is not used alone, it is possible to select the vowel element and the symbol control without ambiguity even if the vowel element and the symbol control arranged by the repeated selection method are selected. In Fig. 8-6, when the [v] button is pressed once, the vowel element "." Is selected, and when pressed twice, the symbol control 1 is selected, and when the third time is pressed, the symbol control 2 is selected.

8.4.3 Example of using a subscript control button in Japanese

In the case of Japanese, the arrangement of the 50th melody is corresponding to each button, the 2nd and 3rd rear controls are placed on the [*] button, and the 4th and 5th subsequent controls are placed on the [#] button. ), You can put the control for long sound / bass sound / semitone sound on any of the up and down buttons. See Figures 8-7.

8.4.4 Examples of subscript control buttons for vowel input in Arabic

In Arabic, controls for handling subscript vowels can be distributed to any button (s) of the up and down buttons.

8.4.5 Example of Control Buttons in Thai

In the case of Thai, one control button was used as a subsequent control button without separating the consonant control and the vowel control. Any of the up, down, left and right buttons can be additionally used as a control button. Alternatively, it can be used as a control button of the guitar.

8.5 Example of using shortcut / pull switch control button

When the parallel input method is applied, there is a third order ambiguity between simple code and full code. In order to eliminate this problem, a method of providing a "short / full" switching control of word units is presented. For example, if you want to use the full input method as the default mode and enter a word by the short input method when applying the parallel input method, first select the "Shortcut / Pull" switching control and enter a space (right button). It was to enter a simple code. Of course, the order of the spaces and the "short / full" toggle control can be reversed. Here, the word-based "shortcut / full" switching control can be placed on any of the up and down buttons. Alternatively, a control that combines the "short / full" switch and the space (right button) can be placed at the reference grid position of any of the up, down, left and right buttons. See Figures 8-8.

If it is assumed that the English alphabet of Fig. 1-1 is arranged on the number buttons of Figs. 8-8, and the basic alphabet input mode is in the full input mode, the simple word "4357" associated with the help is inputted and the word help is entered. If you want to enter, "~ full code input + [^] + [4] + [3] + [5] + [7] + [>] + full code input ~" can be entered. In other words, limiting the movement function of the up / down button [^] and combining the "short / full" switching function of word unit and the space function, the system immediately follows the "[4] + ..." button when the [^] button is pressed. Recognizing that this is a simple code rather than a full code, we can refer to the index and recommend the user the closest word to the input [4]. As soon as the input of [4] + [3] + [5] + [7] is finished and the blank button ([>] button) is pressed, the word is terminated, so the "short / full" mode switching of word units is terminated and the system Will wait for full code input again. If the [^] button is pressed again after the input of the simple code 4357, the system also recognizes that the word is terminated and confirms the help corresponding to the simple code 4357 and waits for the input of the simple code again.

If only one right button (blank button) is used in the parallel input method, there may be a third order ambiguity that occurs between the full code and the simple code as mentioned in the earlier application. Each time, we had to check whether a simple code existed or achieved the promised full code. However, the system can recognize the input value of the full code or simple code in advance by providing a button that combines the "short / full" mode switching in word units and the space, thereby reducing the calculation and retrieval. It will be possible.

8.6 Use Cases in Calculator Mode

The four navigation buttons are useful as the plus or minus (+,-, x, /) buttons most often used in calculator mode regardless of their position. You can also add or subtract symbols from the buttons, but the calculator may not be used as often as the alphabet input, so it may not appear on the buttons. This is because each button in the alphabet input mode will be used as a move button or a control button.

It is also possible to place an operator that can be used in a calculator on a subtraction subtraction button and select it by the (hidden) iterative selection method. Operators (binary operators) that are often used in calculator mode use properties that do not appear repeatedly. For example, there can be no calculation of 2 ++ 1. 24 can also be solved by pressing 2x4 to select the "square" operator by repeatedly pressing the multiplier (x) button. In other words, it is equivalent to iteratively selecting that the power (x) button has a square (xx) operator as a post-speed operator. Likewise, (O3) can be solved by pressing 3 // 2 to select the "square root" operator by repeatedly pressing the (/) button. Since other binary operators do not appear in duplicate, they can be placed as successive operators belonging to the appropriate addition and subtraction control buttons and selected by the iterative selection method.

Three buttons of up, down, left, and right navigation buttons can be added to the subtractor (+,-, /) operator and the (x) operator can use the [*] button.

9. Activating help function

In each input mode, functions not displayed on the buttons (up / down / left / right) can be displayed on the screen (liquid crystal) to add convenience. In this case, there is a disadvantage in that it consumes a part of the liquid crystal. Of course, the user who uses the function of each operator button does not need to display it while consuming the space of the liquid crystal, but it can be very helpful for users who do not. have. Referring to FIG. 8-1, FIG. 9-1 is an example of a case in which the up, down, left, and right buttons are arranged in a similar form, assuming that the up, down, left, and right buttons are arranged to the right of the 4 * 3 keypad as shown in FIG.

In this way, displaying a function of a button (that is, an operator assigned to the button or a symbol group associated with each button) according to the user's convenience and intention is referred to as "activating a help function" for convenience. Activation of the help function can be done for each mode (e.g. alphabet input mode, calculator mode) or for each of the required functions (e.g. the use of the numeric buttons or control buttons associated with the symbol group in the alphabet input mode). Can also be.

Likewise, the numeric buttons associated with the function of the control button or the symbol group presented in the previous application can also be displayed in the liquid crystal when the user needs them. See Figure 9-2. Fig. 9-2 shows an example in which the number buttons associated with each symbol group are iconized and displayed on the liquid crystal based on the classification of symbol groups described above. For convenience, only the first symbol selected from the symbol group associated with each number button is added to the number button icon.

10. How to use the delete button

In using the delete button, it can be used as the "cancel final input" introduced in the earlier application. For example, in Figure 4-2, the user inputs "a", enters "1" + [*], and enters "ㅋ". Pressing the delete button cancels the last input ([*]) and returns to "a". It can be done. This can be useful for entering subsequent alphabets by repeatedly pressing the control buttons. If the cancel button is pressed continuously, the alphabet already input is deleted as usual. For example, if you press the Cancel button once while entering "Kana-K", it becomes "Kana-a". If you press it again, it becomes "Kana", and if you press it again, it becomes "A-ga". In the case of Roman letters, if you enter "ab a .." (the last "a .." is a modified alphabet consisting of ".. + a"), press the Delete button once to become "aba", then press " ab "and press it again to become" a ". That is, alphabets already formed are deleted in alphabetical units.

11.Unification of numeric keypad of keyboard and keypad of telephone terminal

It is apparent that the keypad disclosed in the present application and the present invention can be applied to all fields in the form of telephone keyboard, such as a keypad or door lock configured by software on a numeric keypad of a mobile terminal or a standard keyboard or a screen. In addition, although the numeric keypad provided on the standard keyboard has a different arrangement of the keypad and the numeric buttons presented in the earlier application and the present invention, it is obvious that the arrangement on the keypad button of the prior application and the present invention can be applied to the keypad provided in the keyboard. . For example, in the present application and in the present invention, the alphabet disposed on the [1] button is placed on the [1] button of the numeric keypad provided on the keyboard, and the same way as described below, the alphabet input, utilization of simple codes and various codes It can be used for memorization.

However, in order to reduce confusion and add ease of use, the numeric keypad of the telephone keypad can be used to configure the numeric keypad of the keyboard. In other words, in the arrangement of numbers on the numeric keypad of the keyboard, the [1], [2], and [3] buttons are placed on the buttons in the first row as in the keypad of the telephone, and the buttons [4], [5] are placed on the buttons in the second row. Put the, [6] button and the [7], [8], and [9] buttons on the three row buttons. In addition, you can place the [*] and [#] buttons as you would on a phone keypad.

12. Language restriction input method

The language limit input method means reducing ambiguity in character input by using a combination of consonants and vowels in word generation of a specific language, which will be described in detail below.

It is obvious that any of the contents mentioned in one language below can be applied to other languages without special mention. Furthermore, similar concepts can be applied to languages that do not use the Roman alphabet.

12.1 Chinese Repetition Selection Method on the Alphabetic Separator Keypad in Roman Alphabet

12.1.1 Composition of Chinese Virgins and Mica

(^e) 는 거의 사용되지 않는다고 함)가 있다고 한다. 성모는 자음에 해당하고, 운모는 모음에 해당한다 고 한다. 중국대륙에서는 중국어음을 표기하는 방법으로 한어병음방안을 이용하 고, 대만에서는 주음부호를 이용하여 중국어음을 입력한다고 한다. 한어병음은 라틴자모즉 로마알파벳을 이용하여 중국어음을 표기하는 것이다. 주음부호와 그 에 대응되는 한어병음(로마알파벳)을 괄로안에 표시하면 다음과 같다. Chinese has 21 virgins and 16 micas (double

(^ e) is rarely used). Our Lady corresponds to the consonant, and the Mica corresponds to the vowel. Chinese continents use the Chinese Pinyin method as a method of marking Chinese sounds, and in Taiwan, Chinese sounds are input using the main phone sign. Chinese Pinyin is written in Latin using the Latin alphabet, or Roman alphabet. The main phonetic code and its corresponding Chinese Pinyin alphabet (Roman alphabet) are shown in brackets as follows.

The following describes the combined mica in Chinese. Combined mica is said to combine three vowels i, u and ..u, followed by other mica. The following table is the list of possible combinations in the Mica List.

In the above table, it is possible to combine ia but not io.

12.1.2 Input of Chinese Pinyin Using Roman Alphabet

After all, as you can see from the table above, if you are using the Roman alphabet, you can enter all 21 Virgin Marys in a combination of 18 Roman alphabets, and 16 mica combinations of 7 mica or Roman alphabet vowels and Romans. All combinations of alphabetic consonants can be entered.

In addition, ^ e and ..u of short mica are regarded as the modified alphabet of e and u, respectively, and can be input by the control processing method. Next, the five basic vowels have four tonal codes, which can also be entered by the control method. After all, in the case of Chinese using Roman alphabet, five Chinese alphabets can be used to input all Chinese mica. This inputs the modified alphabet that does not exist in the English alphabet (ie, Roman alphabet) by the control processing method, which is already shown in the input of French and German. The following is an example of setting the sub-relationship between the basic alphabet (basic vowel) and the subsequent alphabet (subsequent vowel) when entering Chinese mica by the control method.

In the example above, the alphabet with the first to fourth tones of the first and fourth tones is the next alphabet, and ^ e is rarely used. Sub ranks may vary depending on the frequency of use, of course. For example, you can make ..u a 2nd follow-up alphabet instead of 6th and place the sub-orders of the remaining follow-up alphabets one after the other.

Using the [*] button, the control button as an input example, and when after the control input applied, ^- e = e + [*], ^/ e = e + [*] + [*], ^v e = e + [*] + [*] + [*], `e = e + [*] + [*] + [*] + [*], ^ e = e + [*] + [*] + [*] + [*] It becomes like + [*]. When the partial partial selection method is applied to "e" displayed on the keypad in Fig. 1-1, e = [3] + [2], and -e = [3] + [2] + [*]. If the alphabet displayed on the keypad in Fig. 1-1 is selected by the partial full selection method, the full code of 人 (r ^/ en: 2nd star) becomes "7832 ** 65". It is obvious that any other input method (e.g., simple repetitive selection method) may be used to input "e" displayed on the keypad.

After all, only one control button is used to simplify the input method. The same applies to the case of using the main phone sign without using the Roman alphabet (for example, the input method is applied on the keypad displaying the main phone sign corresponding to the English alphabet in FIG. 1-1).

12.1.3 Chinese Restriction Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

You can enter all the Chinese Virgins in 18 Roman alphabets, of which only zh, ch, and sh appear consecutive Roman alphabets. In Chinese, syllables composed of only mica without the Virgin are written in Chinese Pinyin, with y, w, and so on. For example, "衣 = yi (one star)" and "五 = wu (three star)".

And, as mentioned in the previous application, it can be very convenient to use syllable-based initial codes as simple codes in Chinese, where Hanja (漢字) Hangul consists of one syllable. Therefore, it is desirable to have 18 possible Roman alphabets assigned to each number button. In the present invention, 18 roman alphabet consonants are grouped by two and are assigned to the [1] to [9] number buttons.

b p / d t / g k / z j / c q / s x / m n / l r / h f

The above example is a grouping based on the similarity of pronunciation. When using a simple code, if there are many phrases (words or phrases) corresponding to the same simple code (syllable standard initial code), similar phrases with similar pronunciation are based on the same syllable. It was considered to have initial code. The above example is just one example and many variations are possible. Grouping can also be based on the similarity of pronunciation, and can be grouped according to various criteria, such as the English alphabet dictionary order and the English alphabet main note phonetic dictionary order. Another advantage of grouping similar sounds into the same group and assigning them to the same button is that in all the languages that use the Roman alphabet, the consonants of similar pronunciations are less likely to occur. To lose. In addition, even in the use of simple chords (especially syllable-based initial chords), even if there are many phrases corresponding to the same simple chords, the phrases are similar phrases, so the user can minimize confusion and use simple chords. Can be natural.

Another is that zh, ch, and sh exist as Mother of China, so that z and h are not grouped into the same group. (In Chinese, syllables are usually composed of "Our Lady + Mica". In this embodiment, the syllables are grouped into the same group. However, it does not matter much. However, when inputting w, y, v, etc. not shown in FIG. 10-1, s, All you have to do is assign h, w, and so on, and enter them with the assigned button 3)

The nine groups illustrated above may be arbitrarily assigned to nine buttons [1] to [9] as shown in FIG. 10-1, and a repeat selection method may be applied to the input of each alphabet. Due to the characteristics of Chinese, the Roman alphabet consonants do not occur continuously except for zh, ch, sh. Therefore, even if you enter the alphabet by the iterative selection method, it is possible to enter without ambiguity. For example, in FIG. 10-1, b = [1] and p = [1] + [1]. Which alphabet of the alphabet assigned to each button is to be selected as one stroke may be determined so that an alphabet with a high frequency of use may be selected as one stroke according to the frequency of use of the alphabet.

The Roman alphabet "v", which is rarely used in Chinese, can be placed in any of nine groups. For example, you can add an additional "v" to a group with similarly pronounced "f" (or not assign it explicitly) and enter "v" with the corresponding button 3. W, and y used in "衣 = yi (1 star)", "五 = wu (3 star)", etc. are also placed in the appropriate consonant group (or not assigned explicitly) and inputted by the iterative selection method (eg enter w and y as the three buttons to which each alphabet belongs. For example, if y is placed in a group to which / l and r / belong, enter “l” with one button ([8] button in Fig. 10-1) and “r” with two keys, 3 Enter “y” with ta, enter w “m” with 1 key (when [7] in Fig. 10-1) when w is placed in a cold group. "," Followed by three "w".

By applying the iterative selection method, it is called “Chinese Restriction Selection Method” for convenience to greatly reduce the ambiguity by alternating Roman alphabet consonants and vowels when entering Chinese Pinyin. This property is commonly referred to as “Language Restricted Repeat Selection Method (LRRSM)” for convenience when applied to all languages, not just Chinese, and “Chiese” when it is specifically applied to Chinese. Restricted RSM ”. Repetition selection method for language restriction is Korean or Hindi, and assigns a pair of basic consonants and basic vowels to each button, and when applying the repetition selection method, the consonants and vowels are alternately used to input with less ambiguity. It's the same context. In addition, in the method using the vowel element of Korean, it is similar that the vowel control can be selected by the repetitive selection method using the property that the vowel “ㅡ” does not appear continuously. It can be said.

In particular, as shown in Figs. 10-1 to 10-4, the button to which the consonants are assigned (called "consonant button" for convenience) and the button to which the vowel is assigned (called "collection button" for convenience) are separated (i.e., Without assigning a vowel to the same button), it is a good feature to greatly reduce ambiguity by using the characteristics of each language combining consonants and vowels when applying the repeated selection method. Like this, in Fig. 10-1 to 10-4, the consonant button and the vowel button are separated, respectively, and each button has a predetermined number (eg, 1 to 3) of the consonants or vowels. Keypad (CVSK (Consonant Vowal Separated Keypad)).

It can be easily seen that the Roman alphabet consonants and vowels displayed on the keypad in Fig. 10-1 can be input without ambiguity even when the Chinese Chinese Pinyin is input by the repeated selection method. When the same one of the consonant buttons ([1] to [9] buttons in Fig. 10-1) is continuously pressed for the input of the Virgin, the system can easily know that the second consonant displayed on the keypad is input. This is because the same Roman alphabet is not used in succession to enter the Virgin Mary. In this case, the button pressed twice is assigned to w, y, v, etc., and when the same button is pressed once more (that is, pressed three times), as described above, inputting w, y, v, etc. The system can easily see what it is for. [7] If you enter "w = 777" with three buttons, it can be interpreted as "mmm" or "mn" or "nm", since the Virgin of Chinese is not constructed in this way.

As shown in Fig. 10-1, the six vowels of a, e, i, o, u, ..u are divided into three groups of two by three and three buttons (e.g. [*], [0] of the 4 * 3 keypad. ], [#] Button) and each vowel can be entered without ambiguity by repeated selection method. This is possible because the same Roman alphabet vowel does not appear twice in Chinese. For example, when a Chinese character is written in Chinese Pinyin, there is no such thing as "… aa ...".

However, if we look at the mica ai, ei, ou and the combined mica ia, ie, uo, we can see that a and i, e and i and o and u should not be grouped into the same group. If a and i are grouped into the same group and assigned to the same button (e.g. [*] button), the input of the corresponding button 3 strokes (ie '***') means 'ai'. This is because an ambiguity may occur that does not know whether ia 'is entered. 10-1 shows an example of grouping in consideration of such contents. The vowel grouping and placement of FIG. 10-1 is not absolute and may be modified as long as the above constraints are satisfied. In FIG. 10-1, each vowel can be input by a repetitive selection method. For example, i = [0], o = [0] + [0], iao = [0] + [*] + [0] + [0].

a and i and e and i and o and u are grouped together as “a, e, o” (see FIGS. 10-2 and 10-4), unless they are grouped into the same group (see Figures 10-2 and 10-4). “I, u, u” can be a group. Again, various modifications are possible. Assign these two vowel groups to any button (eg [*] and [#] buttons respectively) within the 3 * 4 keypad, and assign the consonant “w, y, v” as separate groups to the rest of the buttons ( Eg [0] button). When three alphabets are grouped in one group (eg "a, e, o"), they correspond to the corresponding button three strokes representing a combination of vowels (eg "ae", "ea", "aaa") Since the Chinese mica does not exist, "o" can be recognized without ambiguity with the corresponding button 3 strokes. In the example, when inputting "ao", the corresponding button is 4 strokes, and since "oa" does not exist as a Chinese pinyin, it can be recognized without ambiguity. Referring to Figure 10-6. In Figure 10-6, "v" is Chinese. Since it is not used for input of, it may not be displayed, and grouping “w, y” into one group and assigning them to the same button has the effect of assigning half consonants (ie, half vowels) to the same button.

In FIGS. 10-2, 10-4, and 10-6, “a, e, o” are grouped into the same group, only a combination of “ao” is possible. If only one button is assigned "a, o", that button three strokes can be recognized as "ao" without ambiguity. However, if three alphabets are assigned and the buttons are selected in the order of “a-o-e” according to the number of button presses, ambiguity may occur as to whether the button is pressed three times as “ao” or “e”. . Therefore, in this case (three or more vowels are assigned to the same button and one combination of two of the three vowels is possible), the two vowelable vowels can be selected as 1 and 2 strokes, respectively, The ambiguity can be removed by using language restrictions by selecting one stroke, three strokes (or two, three strokes, and the button five strokes can be recognized as “ao”). In summary, in setting the selection order according to the number of button presses in the three alphabetic groups, the selection order is determined so that the alphabets that can appear in succession are not selected by the corresponding buttons 1 and 2 respectively.

10-1 to 10-4, when entering the Virgin in the Roman alphabet, the same button can be pressed up to two or three times, the system recognizes the number of repeated presses of the button, the target according to the number of repeated presses Identify the alphabet In the case of mica input with Roman alphabet, if the same button can be pressed three times in succession in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-3, the [0] button is pressed to input the “io” of the combined mica “iou”. It is only a case of pressing three times in a row. For the user's input, the system will temporarily recognize “0 = i” and confirm when a button other than the [0] button is pressed. If the [0] button is pressed once more, the system will temporarily display “00 = o”. If the button other than the [0] button is pressed once more, the system can determine “000 = io” when the [0] button is pressed again. This is because “oi” is not used and “oi” is not used. In case of the [*] button, the system can be pressed up to 2 times, so the system recognizes “* = a” temporarily and “**”. = e ”This is because the same Roman alphabet vowels do not appear in succession when entering Chinese Pinyin, and the vowels assigned to the same button do not appear in succession.

The reason that the input system can be configured without any ambiguity (or significantly less ambiguity in non-Chinese) on the consonant separation keypad is that the same consonant button (e.g., the [1] button in Fig. 10-1) is repeated once or continuously. The system recognizes that one of the consonants in the same button is pressed while being pressed. Then, when another consonant button (for example, the [9] button in Fig. 10-1) is pressed, the system enters a continuous consonant. Because it is recognized. Another reason is that about two alphabets are allocated instead of about three alphabets for each button. As mentioned in the elector's case of grouping consonants and vowels in pairs, the probability of ambiguity is significantly reduced when two letters are assigned, as compared to when three letters are assigned per button. In addition, when two letters are assigned to each button, the batter delay time and batter delay time suggested by the applicant can be applied more effectively.

10-7 show procedures of the general repetition selection method in the consonant separation keypad except for the portion (R). 10-7, the input value is assumed to be a consonant button or a vowel button for convenience. In other words, it is assumed that there are no special uses or functions (e.g. subsequent control buttons for input of subsequent alphabets). 10-7 are not absolute and can only be referred to. In FIG. 10-7, the detailed procedure such as temporarily recognizing the alphabet corresponding to one press of the specific button with respect to the one-time pressing of the specific button is not displayed. However, this process may be performed in process (R0) of FIGS. 10-7. Language restrictions can be determined in step (R), and step (R) can be involved in any part of the flowchart. That is, if the first input value is one of the consonant buttons, the button that is consecutively pressed is assigned to only two consonants, and the alphabet assigned to the same button does not appear in succession (e.g., the [1] button in Fig. 10-1). ), At the moment when the same button is pressed twice in R1, the input value can be determined as one consonant (eg, “P” in Fig. 10-1). This is similar to removing ambiguity using language restrictions in FIG. 4-4 (confirm the target alphabet with no ambiguity or less ambiguity when applying the repeated selection method). It can be seen that the procedure of Figures 10-7 is much simpler than the procedure of Figures 4-4.

When the same or unequal consonant buttons are pressed in succession, when the vowel button is pressed, the system determines the target alphabet from the input values of the previously entered consonant buttons, proceeds with the vowel processing, and enters the first input in the vowel processing. The value becomes the vowel button last entered during the consonant process. The same applies to the case of changing from the vowel processing to the consonant processing.

The method of judging by the language restriction (R) in Fig. 10-7 is a list of consonant and vowels that can be combined (eg “ch”, “sh”, “zh”, “iao”, “iou”, “ia”, “Ie”, “uai”, “uei”, “ua”, “uo”, “ue”, “ai”, “ao”, “ua”, “uo”, “..ue”, “ou”… ) Or a list of non-combinable consonants and vowels (e.g. “bb”, “aa”, “ee”, “oa”,…), or where ambiguity may occur on a particular keypad. In cases where this ambiguity can be caused, it is generally possible to have the system recognize the target case as a target alphabet, except in the case of non-binding, for example, in Figure 10-2 (Chinese limitation). When you enter "ao = 0000", the system has "ao" in the vowelable list, while the system has "ao" as the target alphabet for the input value "0000". Another method is to press the [0] button up to four times in the absence of a user's mistake in the consonant separation keypad of FIGS. 10-2 and 10-4. This ambiguity may occur. In this case, only the special case may be considered as “0000 = ao.” The rest of the process may be performed according to the processing of FIGS.

It can be seen that the procedure of the parts omitted in FIGS. 10-7 is similar to the procedure indicated previously. 10-7 will be more generalized, and will be described with reference to FIG. 10-8. 10-8 has the same meaning as FIG. 10-7. In FIG. 10-8, the {1} part virtually means that the button input is made, and “n <-(n + 1)” indicated by the arrow entering the (1) part means that the number of button presses is increased by one more. it means.

In the case of Chinese syllables as Pinyin, when mica such as "en", "eng", "an", "ang", and "er" is used, the syllable ends with English consonants (English alphabet consonants) (Eg ren: 人). In other words, the English alphabet consonants that can come to the end of a syllable in the middle of a word or phrase are "n", "g", "r", and so on. The consonants that can come to an end of a syllable of the Pinyin are called "consonants which can be at the End of a Syllable of Pinyin" (CCESP) for convenience.

In the case of syllables in which such consonant syllables are used (ie, syllables in which mica such as "en", "eng", "an", "ang", and "er" is used), Ambiguity can occur when the consonant is the English consonant of the previous syllable. For example, in the case of Zhongguo (中國), "~ gg ~" can be recognized as "~ k ~". In this very special case, ambiguity can occur, which is caused by having the Pinyin syllable end consonants (e.g. "n", "g", "r" ...) be selected as the corresponding button two in each group to which they belong. Can be removed (when only two letters are assigned to the group to which "n", "g", "r", etc. belong, as in Figure 10-6).

In Fig. 10-6, "n", one of the consonant possible consonants of the Pinyin syllable, is selected as the corresponding button ([7] button), so that in the case of "rennai", "88 ** 7777 * #" is entered without ambiguity. It's like you can. You enter "7777" to enter "nn", which can be recognized as "nn" without ambiguity ("mmmm", "nmm", "mnm", "in the middle of a word or phrase in Pinyin). mmn "and the like are not possible). That is, if the selection order of "g" and "k" is "k-g" in Fig. 10-6, the pinyin can be input without ambiguity.

In order to remove ambiguity, two alphabets must be grouped in the group. If the three English alphabets "m, n, w" are grouped and selected in the order of "m-n-w" according to the number of button presses, as shown in Figure 10-4, "n" corresponds to the corresponding button 2 Even if it is selected as the other, entering "renmin (人民)" will cause ambiguity with "rewin" (where "rewin" does not actually exist in the Chinese Pinyin, the system will change the input value to "renmin (人民)". ) ", But" rewin "is a possible Pinyin combination).

Therefore, when it is possible to group three English consonants as shown in Fig. 10-4, the Pinyin syllable ending consonants ("n", "g", "r", etc.) are groups in which two English consonants are grouped. It can be seen that there is a need to group. And even when two consonants are grouped, it can be seen that ambiguity may also occur when "n" and "r" and "g" and "r" are grouped into the same group. . For example, if two English consonants "n" and "r" are grouped in the same group, typing "~ nr ~" will cause ambiguity with "~ rn ~". The same is true when "g" and "r" are grouped into the same group.

In Fig. 10- *, "n" and "g" are assigned to different buttons so that they can be entered without ambiguity. Of course, even if "n" and "g" are grouped in the same group, if only "n" and "g" are grouped, they can be entered without ambiguity. For example, if "n" and "g" are grouped into the same group and assigned to the [5] button, the [5] button is pressed three times (ie "555" is entered to enter "vowel + ng"). Can be recognized as "collection + ng" rather than "collection + gn". This is because it is possible to use language restrictions in the Pinyin where no "vowel + gn" appears in the middle of a word. When "n" and "g" are grouped in the same group like this, if the selection order according to the number of button presses is set to "g-n", when the button is pressed twice, "g" is displayed. When pressed, "ng" can be displayed, which naturally leads to WISWYG (What You See is What You Get, more precisely What You Press is What You See). In FIGS. 10-2, 10-4, and 10-6, the vowels "a", "e", and "o" are grouped into one group and assigned to the [*] button (example of Figure 10-6). If you select "o-e-a" in order of pressing the button, the system recognizes "a" and displays it again when the [*] button is pressed three times. When the button is pressed once more, the "ao" is displayed naturally to make the user more friendly.

When only "n" and "g" are grouped into the same group and assigned to a button (in this example, the [5] button), if "5555" is entered after the vowel button is pressed, it is recognized as "vowel + ngg". If "55555" is inputted, it will be recognized as "vowel + ngn". If "vowel + ng" is used relatively frequently in Chinese Pinyin, grouping "n" and "g" into the same group can increase the convenience of input. However, it is not a good approach because grouping consonants with similar pronunciations in the same group for the use of simple codes is natural.

When English consonants (eg 'm') other than "n" and "g" are grouped together, the order "m-n-g" or "m-g-n" to enter the pinyin without ambiguity If it is selected as (i.e., if a consonant other than 'n' or 'g' is selected as the corresponding button 1), it can also be recognized without ambiguity. For example, if you select "m-g-n" in the order of the number of button presses, pressing the button five times after the vowel button is pressed is recognized as "(collection) + ng" and presses six times. "(Vowel) + ngm" is recognized as "(vowel) + ngg", and seven presses can be recognized as "(vowel) + ngn" without ambiguity. However, it will not be desirable because the number of times of repeated presses when entering "ng" becomes excessive.

In Figs. 10-7, 10-8, and 10-9, "nX", "ngX", and "rX" (capital letter "X" refer to the English consonant in the consonant processing in the middle of the word but not at the beginning of the word). In the case of continuous consonants, the input values may be processed by consonant combinations possible in Pinyin. This is because at the beginning of a word, no English consonants occur consecutively such as "nX", "ngX", and "rX". After all, in the input of Pinyin, the English consonants that can appear in the middle of a word or phrase are theoretically maximum of four, such as "~ ngch ~", "~ ngsh ~", "~ ngzh ~", and Figs. 10-7, 10 You can use these language restrictions in consonants in the middle of words at -8, 10-9.

The English consonants were moved to the end of the syllables, so that even if ambiguity could occur, the method could be input without ambiguity. In the alphabet group assigned to each button, the selection order according to the number of presses of the buttons can be arbitrarily determined, which may be regarded as a detailed description of the contents presented in the previous application. Pinyin syllables end sounds are consonants that can be used both at the beginning and end of the syllables, so they can be seen as relatively frequently used consonants, and this ambiguity can be seen as not occurring often, even when ambiguity can occur. By referring to the Pinyin / Chinese index, you can exclude the non-existent Pinyin ("rewin" in the example). You will be able to determine the order in which they are selected.

In Fig. 10-1 containing the above contents, an average of 1.5 strokes can be entered for each Roman alphabet, and if the frequent alphabet is selected with one stroke in consideration of the actual frequency of use in Chinese, it can be input with fewer input strokes. will be.

12.1.4 Entering the Original Function of a Function Button Used as a Control Button

In FIG. 10-1, when inputting a modified alphabet attached to a Roman alphabet vowel, any “separate button” outside the 3 * 4 keypad may be used as a control button. For example, if utilized in the Chinese input mode, the left (左) side button ([<]) to the control ^{button, - e = e + [<} ], / e = e + [<] + [<], v e = e + [<] + [<] + [<], `e = e + [<] + [<] + [<] + [<], ^ e = e + [<] + [<] + [ It can be entered as <] + [<] + [<]. If you press the left button five times in succession, you can no longer select the control that combines with “e”. "E" is entered). Delete button (indicated by “[X]” for convenience) If used as a control button for variant alphabet input <sup>:</sup> -e = e + [X], <sup>/</sup> e = e + [X] + [X], <sup>v</sup> e = e + [X] + [X] + [X], `e = e + [X] + [X] + [X] + [X], ^ e = e + [X] + [X] + [X ] + [X] + [X] can be entered. If you press the delete button five times consecutively, the previously entered “e” can be deleted. In this way, a button with a different function can be used as a control button, but if the control is selected according to the number of times the control button is pressed, then the original function (e.g., a moving function) can be selected if no control is selected. have.

In the above example, after the left shift function is activated, the word starts, and thus the left shift function is input even if the left shift button [<] is pressed once. In other words, press “<” button 5 times after entering “e”, the cursor will move one space to the left with “e” only, and once again, it will move one space to the side again. This is applicable in all languages.

12.1.5 Chinese Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad (Entering Modified Alphabet in the 3 * 4 Keypad)

Here, it appears that you can enter a modified alphabet (including the case of a ton) with a subscript on the Roman alphabet set within a 3 * 4 keypad.

The combined mica list shows that vowels that cannot come after "i" are "i" and "u" (in other words, 'a' or 'e' or 'o'). You can also see that the vowels that cannot come after "u" are "u" and "i" (in other words, 'a' or 'e' or 'o'). Therefore, the arrangement of vowels as shown in Fig. 10-2 is possible. In FIG. 10-2, when attaching the tones to the left vowels "i, a, e", the [#] button to which the right "u" is assigned may be used as a control button. Likewise, when adding a tonal code to the right vowel “o, u”, use the left [*] button as the tonal code control button. For example, / o (secondary) = o + [*] + [*] = [0] + [0] + [0] + [*] + [*], and / a (secondary) = a + [#] + [#] = [0] + [#] + [#], ^ e = e + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] = [0 ] + [0] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#]. You can enter a mica ao = a + o = [0] + [0] + [0] + [0], and since vowel a cannot come after vowels a, e, etc. It can be identified in the system without ambiguity. The collection ^.. u has a similarity in shape to the vowel u, so you can enter the button to which u is assigned in two strokes.

This uses the property that the vowel u does not appear after a and e in the vowels "a, e, o" in Chinese, and the vowel i does not appear after vowel o. The constraints described above, namely a and i, and e and i and o and u, are not placed in the same group, but two vowels are assigned to three buttons, using the Roman alphabet vowel combining rule of Chinese Figure 10. You can see that it is not possible to use buttons assigned to vowels as control buttons, as in -2. In FIG. 10-2, the i and u are placed on the [*] button or the [#] button in consideration of the points for ease of recognition and the balance of arrangement, etc., in using these buttons as control buttons. The average input stroke of the vowel in Fig. 10-2 is also about 1.5 strokes as in Fig. 10-1.

As a variation of Fig. 10-2, some of the three letters assigned to the [0] button may be separated into "separate buttons" outside the 4 * 3 keypad. For example, any of the up / down / left buttons can be used to divide some of the alphabets.

It is possible to input the Chinese Pinyin without ambiguity while applying the repetition selection method in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, as shown in FIG. 10-1 and [9] and [0], [0], [ #] Button, and Roman alphabet's consonant and vowel appearance rules are used when Chinese is written as Chinese Pinyin.

12.2 English Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In the case of English and the like, the repetitive selection method can be applied in a consonant separation keypad (CVSK) similar to those of Chinese 10-1 to 10-4. This is because in all languages that use Roman alphabet, the structure of words consists of alternating consonants and vowels.

In English, when the consonant group is repeated as much as possible from "word start", it is called "CCCVCCCC" as in "strengths" (C is consonant, V is vowel). There can be up to three consonants at the beginning of a word, but only when it starts with "st ~" or "sp ~" (eg, spree, spleen, strength, etc.).

Similar to FIG. 10-1, the user inputs the English word "student" on the keypad assigned about 2 to 3 consonants (assuming that only "..u" is not assigned in FIG. 10-1 for convenience). In order to input "622 ~", the system can treat "622" entered after "Word start" as "st" instead of "sdd" (3 in certain words of English). The consonants of two dogs are said to start with "st ~" or "sp ~", and the system must remember these English word generation rules or alpha bet combination rules). When you enter "u" in "stu ~", you can see that the consonant group ("st" in the example) ends and the vowel ("u" in the example) comes because the button to which the vowel is assigned is pressed. If you input "2" to input "d" after "stu", you can see the consonant starts again. Likewise, when a user enters "~ ** 7722" to enter "~ ent" in "student", and "**" is entered, "a" appears in English as described in the earlier application. Since the system can easily know that "e" is entered rather than "aa", and can be interpreted as "mmt", "ndd", "nt", "mmdd", etc., for "7722". As mentioned above, by setting "delay time" and "other time" differently, the ambiguity caused by the iterative selection method can be greatly reduced.

In the current standard English keypad (Figure 1-1), which is assigned to each button with consonants and vowels mixed, the ambiguity that can occur when applying the repeated selection method reflects the word generation rule (alphabet combination rule) of a specific language. Can be reduced. However, when consonants and vowels are assigned to a single button, it becomes very difficult to apply the language restriction input method (especially the repetitive selection method as a full input method). For example, in FIG. 1-1, when a user inputs a "student" using a repetitive selection method, "stu ~" becomes "777888 ~", and it is assumed that the system recognizes "777" as "s". Also, it is not possible to know whether the following "888" is "ut (i.e. sut)," tu (i.e. stu) ", or" v (i.e. sv) ". "Since" ttt "cannot follow, the system can assume that it is not" ttt "for input value" 888 "). Similarly, when the user enters "333" to enter "~ de ~", it is not known whether it is "de" or "ed". "888777" entered before "~ de ~" is "sut", " It can be interpreted as "stub" and "sv", so for each of the three cases all of "~ de ~" and "~ ed ~" can come.

Even when the language-limited input method is applied, a lot of ambiguity occurs when the iterative selection method is applied as the full input method. The reason for the occurrence of consonants and vowels in the language-limited input method (ie, word generation rule and alphabet combination rule) This is because the input value is not used to input consonants or vowels. 10-1 When consonants and vowels are separately assigned as shown in FIG. 10-4, when a button to which vowels are assigned is pressed during application of the repetition selection method, the vowels are assigned. It is for inputting ground consonants, which can greatly reduce ambiguity because the system can recognize them.

In English using Roman alphabets, there are many cases where two or more vowels appear consecutively (eg, 'ai' in captain). Also, the same vowels (base vowels a, e, i, o, u) appear in real words in the case of oo and ee, like food and teen, and relatively rarely in uu, like vacuum. . Applicant has not yet seen a case of ... aa ... and ... ii ... in the existing words in the English dictionary. Therefore, when assigning the five basic English vowels to the [*], [0], and [#] buttons, selecting 'a' as one stroke and selecting the remaining two among e, o, and u are two strokes. In the case ambiguity is removed. For example, if you apply the repeat selection method with the vowel 'a, o' on the [*] button, two vowels aa are entered instead of two vowels aa. The system can be considered. Similarly, if you assign 'i, u' to the [0] button and apply the repeat selection method, when two [0] buttons are entered, two vowels ii are not entered, but a vowel u is entered. The system can recognize it. Although it is not absolute that a word does not appear consecutively like aa and ii, the ambiguity can be almost eliminated by setting different “delay time” and “other time” mentioned in the earlier application. The rest of the vowel 'e' can be assigned to the rest of the [#] buttons and entered as one stroke.

If you want to use one of the [*], [0] and [#] buttons as a special purpose button, you can put the vowel 'e' on any button to which the vowel is assigned. For example, you can put 'i, e, u' on the [0] button. The vowel u is entered using the [0] button 3 strokes, because the vowel u is the least frequently used vowel in English. In the end, i and e can be entered without ambiguity unless i, e, u are assigned to the [0] button and i does not occur in English in succession (ie ... ii ...). 1 and 2 strokes respectively, u is input to the [0] button three strokes, the ambiguity is unknown whether u, ie, ei. A low frequency of use of u means fewer cases.

As a result, the ambiguity can be greatly reduced by using a consonant separation pad, and furthermore, in assigning a plurality of vowels to one button, one vowel in which the same vowel does not appear continuously among English words existing in the dictionary When a vowel is input by a repetitive selection method in a button to which a plurality of vowels are assigned to be selected, the vowel can be input with almost no ambiguity.

This selection of one vowel that does not appear consecutively, and three vowels with the least frequently used vowels are equally applicable when two or three consonants are assigned per button.

In the above, the case of English using the Roman alphabet is described as an example, but the same applies to other languages using the Roman alphabet.

12.3 Indonesian Restriction Repetition Selection Method in the Keypad Separator

In Indonesian, roman alphabets are used to write words. The Indonesian syllables are said to be composed as follows. (C is consonant, V is vowel)

V: be-a tariff

VC: catch am-bil

CV: Rub go-sok

CVC: pon-dol cabin

CCV: tra-di-si tradition

CCVC: con-trak contract

CVCC: teks-tur fabric

CCCV: kon-struk-si construction

CCCVC: strip-tis nude dance

If more than three consonants are easy to see foreign words come from English, etc .. As can be seen from the above, even in the case of Indonesian, if you do not start with "st ~" or "sp ~", you can guess that three or more consonants are not repeated at the beginning of the word. Therefore, using the word generation rule (alphabet combination rule), it is possible to apply the Indonesian limit iterative selection method.

q and x are said to be used in natural science symbols such as physics and mathematics. In other words, it is thought that it is rarely used for character input. Therefore, q and x may not be arranged explicitly in a specific group, and may be input in three strokes as input. In addition, as in the case of Chinese, two or more Roman alphabets may be combined to express one Indonesian sound, and there are four types of ny, sy, kh, and ng.

Other consonants that are not ironed are bl, br, dr, dw, dy, fl, fr, gl, kr, ks, kw, pl, ps, rps, rs, sk, skr, sl, sp, spr, sr, str and sw. In particular, since "skr ~", "spr ~", "str ~" may appear at the beginning of a word, it can be used as a means for determining whether the input value is a full code or a simple code in the language restriction parallel input method described later. (As an applicant, “rps” may appear at the beginning of a word, but you can use it as well.)

Any method of grouping 19 consonants into nine groups except q and x among 21 English alphabet consonants is possible, but grouping may be performed by reflecting Indonesian characteristics. E.g,

BP / DT / GK / CJ / MN / LR / SZ / FV / HWY

Can be grouped as:

q and x can be grouped into appropriate groups. For example, you could put q in the “GK” group and group x in the “SZ” group.

Five vowels a, i, u, e and o are used to represent Indonesian vowels. There are also three double vowels ai, au and oi, and oi is very rarely used. Thus, it would be desirable to ensure that a and i, and possibly a and u, are not grouped in the same group, even when grouping five vowels into two or three groups. For example, grouping like ae / uo / i In addition, as in the case of English, it would be desirable to select a vowel in which the same vowel does not appear in succession (although the vowels appear less frequently) as one button to which the vowel belongs.

12.4 How to Select Japanese Repetition Repetition on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In Japanese input, the method of inputting Japanese pronunciation using Roman alphabet and converting it back to Japanese was widely used. Therefore, it is possible to input Japanese sounds using the Roman alphabet in the consonant separation keypad similar to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4 and convert them to Japanese.あ, い, う, え, お can be written as a, i, u, e, o respectively.な, に, ぬ, ね, and の can be expressed as na, ni, nu, ne, and no. The rest of the alphabet can also be written in a combination of Roman alphabet consonants and vowels.

In Japanese, two consecutive Roman alphabet consonants occur when a tactile sound or a consonant (in small letters) is used. In addition, when the Roman alphabet vowels appear consecutively, it is assumed that the combination of あ, い, う, え, お is not common in the word. It is rare. Therefore, the five vowels (a, i, u, e, o) of the Roman alphabet are divided into three groups similarly to Figs. 10-1 to 10-4, and assigned to three buttons and the vowels are entered by repeat selection. It can be seen that ambiguity does not occur much. In the case of Japanese, in particular, if “a” is entered, the corresponding Japanese is “あ”, and if “na” is entered, the corresponding Japanese is “な” (the same is true for the rest of the Japanese alphabet). Therefore, when the user inputs “na” and the system confirms that the input value is “na”, the system can provide “な” to the user.

The Roman alphabet consonants used in the Japanese notation of the 50th phonogram are 14 of k, s, t, n, h, m, y, r, w, g, z, d, b and p. In the notation of today, two Roman alphabets are concatenated (eg cha, sha), “y” is combined (eg kya), or “j” is used. Two or more Roman alphabet consonants occur in succession, such as ch, sh, ky, ny, hy, my, ry, gy, py, py, etc., and when a tactile sound is used. When the tactile sound is used, the same alphabet may appear consecutively among k, s, t, and p (eg ippai). Therefore, it can be seen that 16 (14 + c, j) roman alphabet consonants are essential for Japanese input, and thus, a consonant separation keypad can be configured to facilitate input of consonants essential for Japanese input. The remaining five roman alphabets (f, l, q, v, x) will also be needed to input English, but can be grouped around 16 alphabets. For example:

BP / DT / GK / CJ / H / MN / R / SZ / YW / => group into 9 groups

BP / DT / GK / CJ / H / MN / Y / SZ / RW / => group into 9 groups

BP / DT / GK / CJ / HR / MN / SZ / YW / => group into 8 groups

The five Roman alphabets required for English input can be added to each group as is the case for Chinese. In the case of grouping into 8 groups, the remaining 4 buttons can be used as vowel buttons on the 3 * 4 keypad, or if only 3 vowel buttons are used, the other one can be used for consonants necessary for English input. It may be.

12.5 Intentional Language Restriction

The language-limiting iterative selection method sacrifices the advantage of the "full-input method", which allows all words to be entered regardless of whether they exist in a dictionary, so users are not allowed to place these language restrictions. It is desirable to be able to set in advance. However, even in the "Language-Restricted Input Mode", which enables a language-restricted input method, when a user wants to enter a word that does not exist in the dictionary and deviates from the word generation rule (alphabetic combination rule), a specific function (e.g. For example, you can intentionally determine the target alphabet by entering a space, left advancing, or ending a word), and then enter all the alphabet combinations by entering the next alphabet. For example, in FIG. 10-1, when the user inputs "622 ~" in "English restricted input mode", the system recognizes "st ~" instead of "sdd ~", but if the user "sdd ~" If you want to enter "62", enter the space and left shift function, enter "2", or enter "62" and then "Word termination function (or control to effect word termination)". Enter any other means that can be activated and type "2". If the word termination function is activated after entering "62", the system recognizes it as "d" because "2" entered next comes out after "word start". In this way, intentionally entering the word termination function to overcome the language limitation in a specific language restriction input mode will be referred to as "intentional language restriction cancellation". The example of "sdd ~" is "Intentional English Restriction."

Likewise, in FIG. 10-2, if the user does not exist as a Chinese pinyin in the "Chinese restriction input mode (applied to the Chinese restriction repetition selection method)", but wants to input "ui" which is a vowel combination existing in English, "u" And then type in again the means for terminating the word (mentioned in the previous example), then type "i". Otherwise, if the button "i" is assigned after entering "u" in "Chinese Restriction Input Mode (Applying Chinese Repetition Selection Method)" based on Fig. 10-2, the variation alpha of "u" as mentioned in the previous application. A bet (e.g., a letter with a ton sign in "u" or a letter with a ".." in place of "u"-if "..u" is to be entered as a variant of "u") will be entered. (When it is applied to Chinese Repetitive Selection method, it is used as control button when inputting button assigned "i" after vowel "u" and "o".) After all, the user can enter a combination of words (for example, all English combinations, such as English words) that do not exist in the Chinese Pinyin even in the Chinese restricted input mode. In other words, a user who mainly uses Chinese can set all the alphabet combinations that do not exist in Chinese without changing the setting again while the user is set to Chinese restriction input mode. . This is "intentional Chinese restriction release".

In the method using the three vowel elements of Korean in Figs. 4-5, the consonants or vowels as single letters can be equally applied. For example, in Figure 4-5, if you want to enter the consonant "a" and the vowel "ㅡ" as a single letter, enter [1] in the "word start" state, then enter the means for giving the word end function, Enter [*] again at the beginning of the word. This is because consecutive input of the [1] and [*] buttons results in a "g". In the standard keyboard (standard keyboard in English and Korean), when the right arrow button is pressed, the word termination function is activated without the "word ending" space being input. In the present invention, the right arrow button is additionally provided. Applicable

12.6 Language Unlock Delay

He said that "delay time delay" and "delay time delay" can be applied even when three or more letters are assigned to one button. For example, in the standard English keypad shown in Fig. 1-1, the battering delay time is set to 0.1 seconds, and when the [2] button is pressed twice within 0.1 seconds, the system can be regarded as entering B.

Likewise, when the [2] button is pressed three times in succession (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]), the first input value and the second input value (that is, the first [2] button and the second [2] button) If the delay time interval is within the time set as the battering delay time (eg 0.1 seconds), and the delay time interval between the second input value and the third input value is within the time set as the batting delay time (eg 0.1 seconds) ( That is, [2] + within 0.1 second + [2] + within 0.1 second + [2]), C can be recognized by the system. Alternatively, if the total input time is within two times the batting delay time (eg 0.2 seconds) when the [2] button is pressed three times in succession (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]), enter C. You can also let the system know.

In addition, in the case of English, for example, assume that there is no "..u" in Fig. 10-1, strictly strict quality of the vowel "a" in English, "i" does not appear in succession. If applied, when inputting an abbreviation such as "NII", "NII" will be able to be entered in the English limited repetition selection mode through "Intentional English Restriction" by the word termination function. However, after a certain period of time after entering "NI", NI can be confirmed even if the word termination function is not entered. This constant time may be set equal to the "other delay time" mentioned in the earlier application, but it may be desirable to set a longer time than the "other delay time". For example, if 2 seconds have elapsed after entering "NI", the NI will be confirmed and the system will return to the "Word Start" state even if the word termination function is not entered. For this convenience, it is called "temporary language restriction delay time" and it may be desirable to allow the user to set it. It is obvious that this can be applied equally in all languages.

The various delay times are summarized as follows.

Battering delay time ≤ time delay ≤ temporary language restriction delay time

All three delays may be set the same, but it may be desirable to set the other delay time longer than the batter delay time and the temporary language restriction delay time longer than the other delay time.

12.7 Portuguese Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In Portuguese, k, w and y are used only for abbreviations or foreign languages, but they will also be needed for character input. In Portuguese, double consonants are said to be:

bl, cl, dl, fl, gl, pl, tl,

br, cr, dr, fr, gr, pr, tr, vr

In addition, there are multiple consonants such as gn, mn, pn, ps, pt, tm, ch, lh, nh, rr, and ss. Therefore, in constructing a consonant separation keypad for the Portuguese restriction input method, it is necessary to make sure that the above alphabets which are consecutively above are not grouped into the same group. See, eg, Figure 10- *. However, “mn” is grouped into the same group, which can be modified as appropriate and placed into another group. The keypad of Fig. 10- * can be similarly applied to other languages based on the similarity of pronunciation (e.g. voiced and unvoiced sounds with similar phonetic values-e.g. / bp /, / dt /, / gk /... This is because there are few cases in which alphabets with similar pronunciations appear consecutively.

In Portuguese, there are five vowels: a, e, i, o, and u, of which a, e, o are the vowels I and e are the weak vowels. Two different vowels appear in succession: six (ai, au, ei, eu, oi, ou) in the "vowel + weak vowel" and one (ui) in the "vowel + weak vowel". It is called. That is, the vowels and weak vowels can be grouped into separate groups (eg, without “.. + u” in Figs. 10-6). In addition to such grouping, it is also possible to group the group into any number of groups so that the weak vowels and the vowels do not become the same group. For example, you can group like / a / e o / u i /.

12.8 How to Select Spanish-Loop Iterations on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In Spanish, there is an alphabet that is not in English, with “~ + n (the letter with n above n)”. k and w are used only for the notation of foreign words, but they will also be needed for character entry. In Spanish, double consonants are said to be:

bl, cl, dl, fl, gl, pl

br, cr, dr, fr, gr, pr, tr

In other words, when constructing a consonant separation keypad for the Spanish constrained input method, it is necessary that l and r should not be assigned together, and alpha bets that can constitute the double consonant should not be grouped into the same group and assigned to the same button. do. Reference may be made to the consonant groupings of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4 and FIGS. 10-6.

The Spanish vowels have five vowels a, e, i, o and u, of which a, e and o are the vowels I and e are the weak vowels. When two different vowels appear in succession, there are six kinds of “vowels + weak vowels”, six kinds of “weak vowels + vowels”, and two kinds of “weak vowels + weak vowels” (iu, ui). do. In the case of triple vowels, it is said to be combined like "weak vowel + strong vowel + weak vowel". That is, if the vowels and weak vowels are grouped into separate groups (for example, there is no “.. + u” in FIG. 10-6), only the case of the “weak vowels + weak vowels” becomes ambiguity. In this case, since both iu and ui are possible, the ambiguity can be overcome by applying the battering delay time or the battering time, or by using the method proposed by the applicant such as intentional language restriction cancellation. The same is true if the same vowels appear in succession, the same consonants appear in succession, and other ambiguities may occur.

12.9 Italian Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

In Italian, j, k, w, x, y are said to be used only for the notation of ancient or foreign language. You will need it for input such as English. In the grouping of consonants, the remaining consonants except for these five consonants may be grouped around, and the remaining five consonants may be appropriately grouped.

In Italian, the double vowels are said to be ia, io, ie, iu, ai, ei, oi, ui, uo, ou, eu. Also, except for iu and ui, it is a combination of strong vowels (a, e, o) and weak vowels (u, I). The triple vowels also have the structure of "weak vowel + strong vowel + weak vowel". Therefore, groupings of strong vowels and weak vowels, such as / a e o / and / u I /, can be used, and ui and iu can be ambiguous.

12.10 German Repetition Selection Method on the Consonant Separation Keypad

German consonants include ch, chs, ck, ds, dt, ng, nk, pf, ph, sch, sp, st, th, ts, tz and tsch. Also, the consonant grouping of FIG. 10- * may be referred to in grouping so that consecutive consonants do not group into the same group. In the case of “sch ~” in German, it is said that three or more consonants may appear in the dark so that it can be used in the language restriction parallel input method described below. Tsch may also appear dark, but is rarely used.

There are five short vowels in German, with the vowels “..” above a, o, u. The double vowels are au, ei, ai, eu, “..au”, ie, and so on. When entering vowels using only short vowels (basic vowels), it is necessary to group i and e into different groups, as there are cases of ie and ei. For example, it can be grouped like / a e o /, / I u / and many variations are possible.

If the same consonants or vowels appear consecutively, ambiguity can be avoided by various methods suggested by the applicant.

12.11 Vietnamese Restrictions

12.11.1 Inputting Vietnamese Restrictions on the Consonant Separation Keypad

Vietnamese syllables are said to consist mainly of "vowels", "consonants + vowels", "vowels + consonants", and "consonants + vowels + consonants". In particular, Vietnamese is said to have a basic syllable. Although evangelism is increasing, the large number of single syllables means that the input system is easy to configure on the alphabetic keypad.

In Vietnamese, there are five basic vowels: a, e, i (y), o, u and “v + a (vowel with a v on a. This is a vowel with 'x' on top of a vowel)”, “^ There are six variations of + a ”,“ ^ + o ”,“, + o ”, and“, + u ”. “Y” is said to pronounce “i” long. Only five basic vowels can be used to form a separate vowel keypad, and the rest of the vowels can be input by the control method. You can configure the Vowel Separator keypad with only a basic vowel and a sidebar, or you can configure the Vowel Split keypad with all 11 vowels.

Vietnamese double vowels and triple vowels have various combinations, so it is not easy to group five basic vowels into two or three groups similar to those shown in FIG. There are also six tones in Vietnamese, and five tones appear above or below the vowel. And there is no case where the same vowels appear consecutively in Vietnamese, which is a useful property for entering Vietnamese vowels. Therefore, it is conceivable to put five basic vowels into five groups, input the vowels by the hidden repetition selection method, and attach the tonal symbols to the basic vowels and the vowels by the control processing method. Where y can be regarded as a variation of i. Vowel / 'a', 'v + a', '^ + a' / 'o', '^ + o', ', + o' / 'u', ', + u' / 'i', It is divided into five groups of 'y' / 'e' and '^ + e' /. By modifying this, it is also possible to combine the groups with a small number of vowels into four groups. For example, / 'a', 'v + a', '^ + a' / 'o', '^ + o', ', + o' / 'u', ', + u' / 'i', It is divided into four groups of 'y', 'e', and '^ + e' /. If you have only five groups, you can enter the vowel without ambiguity by applying the iterative selection method. Any alphabet in each group may be displayed on the keypad using a representative alphabet, and the rest of the alphabet may not be displayed. It would be natural to have a predominantly short vowel become the representative alphabet, and in the case of dividing into four groups, it is possible to display both i and e. The selection order according to the number of button presses can be determined in consideration of the frequency of use.

Vietnamese consonants include “-+ d (“-”in the middle of“ d ”) that are not in English, and f, z, etc. are not used in English. '-+ D' is regarded as a variant of 'd' and can be applied to the (hidden) iterative selection method or control method. Some textbooks say that f, w, and z are not used in Vietnamese, and some textbooks say that w and j are used as half-consonants. At least f and z are not used, and w is rarely used. In the present invention, w is considered not to be used, but may be included in an appropriate group if necessary.

Also, there are ch, gh, gi, kh, ng, ngh, nh, ph, qu, th, tr, etc. Since gi and qu are morphological combinations of consonants and vowels, they are not considered here. Vietnamese is mainly composed of single syllables, which means that unlike other languages, syllables composed of “ja + m + ja” rarely occur continuously, except for the above consonants. It means that there are few cases. In conclusion, in applying the repeated selection method by dividing the consonants into several groups, if the consonants constituting the above consonants are grouped so as not to be grouped into the same group, the consonants can be input without ambiguity as in the case of Chinese.

For example, you can group into eight groups: b p / d t / g k / c q / s x / m n / l r / h v j. It can also be divided into six groups: b p v / d t / g k q / s x c / m n j / h l r / It would be possible to group into arbitrary groups. Unused consonants, such as f, z, and the like, may additionally be included in the appropriate group.

By dividing the consonants into eight groups and dividing the vowels into four groups, both consonants and vowels can be accommodated within a 3 * 4 keypad. By dividing the consonants into six groups, and by putting the vowels into five groups, the consonants and vowels can be accommodated in 11 buttons, and the other one can be used as a control button for attaching tones to the vowels. By dividing the consonants into six groups and dividing the vowels into four groups, the ten number buttons can accommodate both the consonant buttons and the vowel buttons, which is the effect of making the simple codes consist of numbers only when using simple codes. There is. The other two buttons can be used as control buttons for entering the tonal code and subsequent control buttons for removing ambiguity.

12.11.2 Vietnamese Restriction Input Method Using Pairs of Consonants and Vowels

Vietnamese vowels and consonants can be grouped in pairs and repeated selection methods can be applied. See also Korean. If you have 10 consonant and vowel pairs, the rest of the consonant and vowel can be entered by the control method.

12.12 Russian Constraints Input Method for Keypad Separator

Applicant's prior application PCT / KR02 / 00247 may be referred to to form a consonant separating keypad for Russian.

There are 33 alphabets in Russian. Ten of them are vowels, 20 are consonants, one half vowel (or half consonant), and two symbolic alphabets (light consonants and soft consonants).

The following is a list of 33 alphabets in upper and lower case alphabetical order.

АБВГДЕЁЖЗИЙКЛМНОПРСТУФХЦЧШЩЪЫЬЭЮЯ

абвгдеёжзийклмнопрстуфхцчшщъыьэюя

The 20 consonants are divided into voiced and unvoiced consonants as follows. The parentheses mean pronunciation.

Vowels are divided into light vowels and soft vowels.

In proper grouping of Russian consonants, voiced and unvoiced sounds having similar voices can be grouped. For example, / б (b) п (p) / д (d) т (t) /. To be classified as: Consonants that are not paired in pronunciation can be appropriately grouped as suggested in the earlier application. Some examples are as follows. Various variations are possible by grouping paired unvoiced and voiced sounds together.

10 groupings

Case 1: БП / ДТ / ГК / ВФ / ЗС / ЖШ / ЛР / МН / ХЦ / ЧЩ

Case 2: БВ / ГК / ДТ / ЖЗ / ЛР / МН / ПФ / СХ / ЦЧ / ШЩ

9 grouping cases: (b) п (p) / д (d) т (t) / г (g) к (k) / в (v) ф (f) х (x) / з (z) с ( s) / ж (zh) ш (sh) / ц (ts) ч (tsh) щ (shsh) / л (l) р (r) / м (m) н (n)

Eight grouping examples: (b) п (p) / д (d) т (t) / г (g) к (k) / в (v) ф (f) х (x) / з (z) с ( s) ж (zh) / ш (sh) ц (ts) ч (tsh) щ (shsh) / л (l) р (r) / м (m) н (n)

7 grouping cases:

. . . . . .

In the above example, the half consonant Й and the hard consonant code Ъ and the soft consonant code Ь may be included in the appropriate group. In addition, some alphabets (eg, Й, Ъ, Ь, and other alphabets) may be omitted and not displayed to keep the keypad concise in assigning these groups to each button.

Vowels can also be grouped into five groups using ten vowels and soft vowels. There are 10 vowel alphabets in Russian and 11 vowel sounds in pronunciation, but there are five basic phonemes: (a), (e), (i), (o), and (u). Of these, (e) and (o) are said to appear only under stress. In other words, the vowel phonemes (a) and (o) can be seen as vowels. The vowel phonemes in the position without stress are said to be the remaining three. Thus, you can have five basic alpha bets out of ten Russian vowel alphabets, and divide a vowel corresponding to a double vowel into one group and the other three basic vowels into one or more groups. This is because it can be expected that vowels of the same type are difficult to come out in succession (eg, bristle after vowel). For example, in two groups: а (a) о (o) / у (u) э (e) и (i) / or а (a) о (o) / у (u) э (e) It can be grouped into three groups, such as / и (i) /. The vowels paired with the basic collection can be placed in the group to which the basic collection belongs and the repetition selection method can be applied, or the control processing method can be applied by considering the variation alphabet of the basic collection.

By using the groups of consonants and vowels properly, a consonant split keypad can be configured within a 3 * 4 keypad (eg 5 vowels and 7 consonants, 3 vowels and 9 consonants). In Russian, as in English, many consonants are contiguous (eg CCCVC ...), but the typical syllable structure is called the repetitive structure of consonants and vowels (CV, CVCV, CVCVCV,…). This means that in most cases, it is possible to input Russian words without ambiguity (that is, with very little ambiguity) when the iterative selection method is applied on the alphabetic keypad.

12.13 Hindi Restriction Input Method on the Keyboard Separator

Applicant's prior application PCT / KR00 / 00601 showed a case of grouping the Hindi consonants into nine groups based on the similarity of the pronunciation, and in the present invention, grouped into ten groups. In the case of Hindi, too, group consonants with strong pronunciation similarities can be grouped into the same group. For example, in the above picture, group consonants with pronunciations of (k), (kh), (g), and (gh) are grouped into one group. The same is true for the rest of the pseudophony groups. Of the 35 consonants presented above, 33 consonants can be arbitrarily grouped into 9 or 8 groups, except for the lower (__ (ud), __ (udh)). __ (ud) and __ (udh) are considered variants of __ (d) and __ (dh), respectively, and can be placed in the group to which the basic alphabet belongs.

The following is a collection of Hindi described in the earlier application.

For convenience, the Hindi vowels are described as English pronunciation in parentheses next to the underline (underlined by the Hindi alphabet of the pronunciation) or simply as English alphabet in parentheses. For convenience, __ (aa) is (a-), __ (ee) is (i-), __ (oo) is (o-), __ (ae) is (e), and __ (aae) is ( ai).

The vowel __ (ri) is also classified as a consonant. Ten vowels, except the vowel __ (ri), can be grouped into five groups in pairs as above.

Hindi vowels are largely divided into (a), (i), and (u) short vowels and the long vowels of __ (a-), __ (i-), and __ (u-). The remaining four vowels are compound vowels. It can be represented by a combination of short vowels. I.e. __ (e) = (a) + (i) or (a) + (i-), __ (ai) = (a) + (e), __ (o) = (a) + (u) or ( a) + (u-), __ (au) = (a) + (o) Therefore, the basic vowels (a), (i), and (u) are divided into three groups and assigned to the three buttons, and the basic vowels corresponding to the basic vowels are assigned to the basic vowels. You can enter 2 assigned buttons and the other 4 composite vowels can be entered as a combination of the default vowels.

For example, if (a), (i), and (u) are assigned to the [*], [0], and [#] buttons, respectively, then __ (a-) = **, e = * 0 or * Enter 00. If ** 0 is pressed, the system recognizes __ (a-) when pressed to “**” but the next time “0” is pressed ** 0 is (a) + (e) = __ (ai) Can be recognized. Likewise, when ** # is pressed, the system recognizes __ (a-) when it is pressed up to “**”, but when the next “#” is pressed, ** # (a) + (o) = __ (au) Can be recognized.

This is possible if ten vowels in Hindi do not appear in succession in a word. Ambiguity may occur if the vowels of Hindi occur in succession. That is, when ** 0 is input, it is not known whether __ (a-) and __ (i) are input or __ (ai) is input. However, even though 10 basic vowels may appear in succession, if the frequency is small, the system recognizes the input as a composite vowel by default if the composite vowel __ (ai) can be represented as ** 0. Yesterday's restrictions may apply. In this case, if the user wants to enter a combination of long vowels and __ (a-) and short vowels __ (i), they can be solved using "Intentional Unlimited Language Delay" or "Language Unlimited Delay Time". In this example, type **, activate the word termination function for a certain time, or intentionally, and then enter 0.

In Hindi, too, the main syllable structure is alternating between consonants and vowels, but sometimes the consonants are continuous. If a consonant comes out after the consonant ends with a vertical line, the vertical line disappears, forming a combined consonant with the next consonant. Consonants without vertical lines are said to be combined with the next consonant, with a similar symbol "," below the alphabet. There are some other rules and some are irregular. In this case, it is easy to implement an automata that displays consonant consonants when the consonants are recognized as being input continuously (temporarily or definitely).

Even in countries where English is not the native language, English alphabets are used on the keypad to input English. Since India uses Hindi and English as official languages, it is possible to add naturalness to the use of simple codes and character input by assigning Hindi consonants and English consonants with similar pronunciation to the same button. For example, the following can be modified.

In the above, English consonants such as z, w, etc. may be added or added to an appropriate group as in the case of Chinese. Also, to simplify the arrangement on the keypad, only a part of the alphabets in each group may be displayed on the keypad (applied hidden repetition selection method). For example, in the above grouping, you can assign only __ (k) and __ (g) when assigning the first group to any button. The order to be selected according to the number of button presses in each group can be arbitrarily determined. You can also assign the collection __ (ri) to a button to which R L is assigned.

Again, only English vowels (English alphabet vowels) can be used to simplify the layout on the keypad. As shown in the previous example, Hindi vowels have a strong pronunciation similarity with English vowels, so it is very natural to write only English vowels. Furthermore, in the case of consonants, / G K /, / M N /, / D T /, / B P /, / R L / with strong similarities in pronunciation, as shown in the contrast table for Hindi consonants and English vowels above. . . By displaying only English consonants without displaying the Hindi consonants corresponding to the group of, the keypad can be more concise. Of course, even when the Hindi alphabet is omitted, in the Chinese example, as in the Chinese restricted input mode, the pinyin can be entered without ambiguity, in the Hindi restricted input mode, Hindi is entered without ambiguity according to the Hindi restriction.

Some of the contents described in the earlier application will be rearranged and the details will be further summarized.

(k)" 다음에 "

(a-)" 가 오면 "

(a-)"의 축약형(즉, 자음결합형) "

"이 "

(k)" 와 합쳐져 "

" 로 되는 것이다. 나머지 모음에 대해서도 같으며, 자음 다음에 특정 모음이 왔을 때, 결합형으로 표시되는 것은 이미 인도어 워드프로세서에서 널리 사용되고 있다. Hindi vowels are denoted "abbreviated form" as illustrated above, in combination with a preceding consonant when followed by a consonant. E.g, "

(k) "followed by"

(a-) "when"

(a-) "abbreviation (ie consonant)

"This"

(k) "and"

The same is true for the rest of the vowels, and when a certain vowel follows the consonant, it is already widely used in Indic word processors.

(a)" 의 축약형은 존재하지 않는 것으로 되어 있는데, 자음만 표기된 상태 (예. "

(k)") 가 모음 "

(a)" 를 포함하고 있는 것이라고 한다. 음성학적으로는 "

" 는 (k) 가 아닌 (ka) 라는 것이다. 가장 보편적으로 사용되는 힌디어 워드프로세서(예. "MS Word 2000 의 힌디어 IME" 를 포함하여 몇몇 제품. 이하에서는 특별히 다른 언급을 하지 않는 한 Microsoft사의 "MS Word 2000 의 힌디어 IME"을 의미) 에서는 자음 다음에 모음 "

(a)" 키가 눌러졌을 때, 자음 아래에 콤마형태(힌디어에서는 "할"이라고 함)가 결합된 글자를 출력한다. 예를 들어 "

(k)" 다음에 "

(a)" 키를 누르면, "

(k)" 를 인식하고 출력하는 것이다. 자음아래에 콤마형태가 붙은 자음(반자음=순수자음) 다음에 다른 자음이 입력되면, 소정의 규칙에 의하여 "복합자음"이 형성된다. 예를 들어 "

(k)" 다음에 "

(y)" 가 입력되면, 복합자음 "

" 가 되는 것이다. 이는 마치 한국어에서 종성으로 이중받침을 형성할 수 있는 자음들(예. "ㄹ" 과 "ㅁ")이 연속해서 입력되면, 작은 글씨로 종성 "ㄻ"이 입력되는 것과 유사하게 볼 수 있을 것이다. 복합자음 생성에는 규칙적인 형태도 있고, 불규칙한 형태도 있다고 하며, 자세한 내용은 힌디어 교과서를 참고하면 된다. 이상의 사항은 특별한 내용이 아니라 힌디어 초급교과서에 있는 내용이며 또한 이미 널리 알려진 여러 제품(힌디어 워드프로세서 등)에서 이미 널리 쓰이고 있는 내용이다. Similarly, as briefly mentioned in the previous application, there are certain rules (corresponding to Hindi spelling) that form concatenated letters between consonants when the consonants are combined with me to form a “composite consonant”, and are already widely applied in Hindi word processors. It is used. collection "

(a) "abbreviated form does not exist, only consonants are marked (eg"

(k) ") is a collection"

(a) ". Phonetically,"

"Is not (k) but rather (ka). Some products, including the most commonly used Hindi word processors (eg" Hindi IME in MS Word 2000. " In MS Word 2000, the Hindi IME (which stands for IME)

(a) When the "key" is pressed, it prints a letter with a comma ("H" in Hindi) combined below the consonant. For example,

(k) "followed by"

(a) "key, the"

(k) "is recognized and output. If another consonant is input after the consonant with a comma-shaped consonant (half consonant = pure consonant) under the consonant, a" composite consonant "is formed according to a predetermined rule. "

(k) "followed by"

(y) ", the compound consonant"

This is similar to entering the final word "성" in small letters when consecutive consonants (eg "ㄹ" and "ㅁ") that can form a double support in Korean are entered. There are some regular and irregular forms of compound consonants, and you can refer to the Hindi textbook for more details. It is already widely used in products (Hindi word processors, etc.).

(a)" 키가 입력되었을 때, 이를 자음아래에 할(콤마형상)이 붙은 자음이 생성되도록 할 수 있음은 자명하다. 예를 들어, "

(k)" 또는 "

(k)"를 포함한 다른 알파벳이 [1]버튼에 배정되어 있고, [1]버튼 한번 누름으로 "

(k)" 를 입력하고 나서, "

(a)" 가 배정된 버튼 (예. [*]버튼)을 누르면, "

(k)" 로 인식하는 것이다. 기존의 워드프로세서 제품의 경우에서 언급한 바와 같이, 여기서 "

(y)" 가 입력되면, 복합자음 "

" 가 되는 것은 동일하다. 다만, "

(k)" 까지 인식된 후, "

(a)"가 배정된 버튼이 한번 더 눌려지면 "

(a-)" 이 인식되어, 결과는 "

(k) +

(a-) =

" 이 되는 것은 선출원에서 출원인이 제시한 내용이다. 마찬가지로 "

(k)" 까지 인식된 후, "

(u)"가 입력되면, "

(k) +

(o) =

" 가 된다. (선출원에서 이미 언급한 대로, 복합모음을 기본모음(a, i, u)의 조합으로 입력시, "

(o) =

(a) +

(u)" 이므로)Similarly, in the present invention, the vowel after the consonant "

(a) It is obvious that when a key is entered, a consonant with a comma is created below the consonant. For example,

(k) "or"

Another alphabet, including (k) ", is assigned to the [1] button.

(k) "and then"

If you press the button to which (a) "is assigned (eg [*] button),

(k) ". As mentioned in the case of conventional word processing products, here"

(y) ", the compound consonant"

"To be the same. But,"

(k) "and then"

If the button assigned to (a) "is pressed once more,

(a-) "is recognized and the result is"

(k) +

(a-) =

"This is what the applicant has given in the earlier application. Likewise"

(k) "and then"

(u) "is entered, the"

(k) +

(o) =

"(As already mentioned in the previous application, when entering a combination of base vowels (a, i, u),"

(o) =

(a) +

(u) "

(a)" 키가 입력되므로 현실적으로는 자음버튼이 한번 이상 눌러지고 다음에 모음 "

(a)" 키가 눌러지고 다시 자음키가 한번 이상 눌러지는 것이다. 따라서 본 발명을 적용함에 있어서 힌디어 자음 입력에 "반복선택방법" 을 적용하더라도 모호성 없이 힌디어 단어를 입력할 수 있음을 의미한다. One syllable word in Hindi is said to be in the form of "(consonant) + vowel + (consonant)". Consonants in parentheses mean that the consonant may or may not come. Similarly, a two-syllable word is said to be in the form of "(consonant) + vowel + consonant + vowel + (consonant)". In other words, two vowels with consonants in between form two syllables. The same goes for words with more than two syllables. Even if the consonants are compound consonants, the vowels between the consonants and the consonants that form the compound consonant "

(a) "key is pressed so the consonant button is pressed more than once and the vowel"

(a) "key is pressed and the consonant key is pressed more than once. Therefore, in applying the present invention, even if the" repetitive selection method "is applied to the Hindi consonant input, it means that a Hindi word can be input without ambiguity.

(a-)" 의 경우 "

(a-)"으로), 이는 명백히 사용자의 편의성에 반하는 것이다. 자음 다음에 입력되는 경우가 아닌 경우, 사용자는 모음으로 시작하는 단어를 입력하기를 의도하는 것이므로, 자동으로 모음이 기본형(예. "

(a-)")으로 인식되고 표시되어야 할 것이다. 현재 워드프로세서에서는 "shift" + "

(a-)" 버튼을 입력해야 기본형으로 인식되고 출력된다. 본 발명에서는 키보드를 사용하는 워드프로세서에서, 자음 다음에 입력되는 경우가 아닌 경우(예. 단어의 처음) 힌디어 기본형 모음이 자동으로 인식되는 발명을 추가로 제시하는 것이다. If the vowel appears first in the word, it does not need to be abbreviated. In other words, if the vowel button is not pressed after the consonant is recognized (e.g. vowel key input at the beginning of a word), the vowel key input is recognized as "basic" rather than "abbreviated". It is preferable to output. Similarly, the Hindi word processor is abbreviated when it is entered after a word or after a vowel rather than after a consonant (eg "

(a-) "means"

(a-) ", which is obviously contrary to the user's convenience. Unless it is entered after a consonant, the user is willing to enter a word that begins with the vowel, so the vowel automatically forms the basic form (eg. "

(a-) ") and should be displayed as" shift "+"

(a-) "button is input to recognize the basic form and output. In the present invention, the Hindi basic vowel is automatically recognized when the word processor using the keyboard is not entered after the consonant (eg, the beginning of a word). It is to further present the invention.

(a)"키가 눌러지면, 기본형 모음 "

(a)" 가 인식되는 것이다. 본 발명에서 적용하는 예를 들면, 단어의 시작상태(예. 입력모드로 진입 직후, 또는 공백 입력 직후)에서 모음 "

(a)" 가 배정된 버튼(예. [*]버튼)을 한번 누르면, 기본형 모음 "

(a)" 가 인식되고, 다시 모음 "

(a)"를 한번 더 누르면, 모음 "

(a-)"가 인식되는 것이다. For example, on a keyboard, the vowel "at the beginning of a word (eg immediately after a space is entered)

(a) When the "key" is pressed, the basic vowel "

(a) "is recognized. For example, in the present invention, a vowel "

(a) "button (eg [*] button) once, the default vowel"

(a) "is recognized, and the collection"

(a) "again, the vowel"

(a-) "is recognized.

(a)" 버튼이 길게 눌러지면, 기본형 모음 "

(a)"로 인식하는 것이다. 다음으로 모음 "

(u)" 버튼이 짧게 눌러지면, 모음 "

(a)" 버튼의 길게누름과 모음 "

(u)" 버튼의 짧게 누름의 조합을 기본형 모음 "

(o)" 로 인식하고 출력하는 것이다. 마찬가지로 "

(k)" 다음 "

(a)" 가 눌러지면 "

"이 되고, 다시 "

(a)" 가 한번 더 눌러지면, "

=

(k) +

(a-)" 이 되고, 다시

(i) 가 입력되면 "

=

(k) +

(ai)" 가 된다. 그러나 마지막

(i) 를 길게 눌러줌으로써, "

" 를 입력할 수 있는 것이다. 여기서

(i) 가 한번 더 눌러지면 "

" 이 된다. 정리하면 모음버튼 길게누름을 통해 강제적으로 모음의 기본형이 표시되도록 할 수 있으며, 길게누름 이후 조합되는 모음 역시 기본형모음으로 표시됨을 의미한다. 이는 출원인이 제시한 모든 모음조합에 적용가능하며, 모음이 조합되는 최초의 모음버튼의 길게누름 이후 모음 버튼의 짧게 누름의 조합에 의하여 다른 모음의 기본형을 인식할 수 있다. 이는 출원인이 제시한 모음조합((a), (i), (u)의 조합) 뿐만 아니라 다른 방식의 모음조합에 의하여 모음을 입력하는 경우에도 적용할 수 있다.The first application introduces the technique to recognize the alphabet by "short press after long press". Similarly, a "basic" vowel can be input by pressing and holding the vowel button at the beginning of the vowel combination, and the subsequent vowel buttons can be combined with other basic vowels by a short press. For example, after entering a consonant, in the vowel combination start state, the vowel "

(a) long press the button "

(a) ". Next, the vowel"

(u) "button pressed briefly, the vowel"

(a) Press and hold the "button" and the vowel "

(u) "Short press combination of basic buttons"

(o) "and print it. Likewise

(k) "next"

(a) "is pressed,"

"Become, again"

(a) "is pressed once more,"

=

(k) +

(a-) ", again

(i) is entered,

=

(k) +

(ai) "but last

by pressing and holding (i)

", Where you can

(i) is pressed once more,

To sum up, you can press and hold the vowel button to force the basic type of the vowel to be displayed, which means that the vowel combined after the long press is also displayed as the basic vowel. This is applicable to all the vowel combinations suggested by the applicant. The basic form of another vowel can be recognized by the combination of the short press of the vowel button after the long press of the first vowel button to which the vowels are combined, which is the applicant's proposed vowel combination ((a), (i), ( combination of u), as well as the case of inputting vowels by other vowel combinations.

(ri)"의 입력은 임의의 기본모음의 3번 눌러짐으로 입력할 수 있다. 예를 들어 발음이 유사한 모음 "

(i)" 버튼의 3번 눌러짐으로 입력할 수 있다. 참고로 선출원에서 "

(e) =

(a) +

(i) 또는

(a) +

(i-)" 으로 입력할 수 잇다고 하였는데, "__(e) = __(a) + __(i)" 로 입력하면 되며, 굳이 "__(e) = __(a) + __(i-)"으로 입력할 필요는 별로 없다. 다음으로 모음 "

(a-)" 에 반달표가 붙은 모음 "

" 역시 모음 __(a) 가 배정된 버튼(예. [*]버튼) 의 3번누름으로 입력할 수 있다. Under the premise that you enter four compound vowels in a combination of basic vowels, they are treated as consonants or vowels.

(ri) "can be entered by pressing three times on any base vowel. For example, a vowel"

(i) is pressed by pressing the button three times.

(e) =

(a) +

(i) or

(a) +

(i-) ", you can input it as" __ (e) = __ (a) + __ (i) ", and it's like" __ (e) = __ (a) + __ (i-) You don't need to type in ". Next vowel"

(a-) "collection with half moons

"You can also enter it by pressing the button 3 (ie the [*] button) to which the vowel __ (a) is assigned.

(ud)", "

(udh)" 가 있고, 5개의 차용자음으로 "

(k)", "

(kh)", "

(g)", "

(j)", "

(ph)" 가 있다. 5개의 차용자음은 거의 사용되지 않는다고 한다. 이렇게 아랫점이 붙는 글자의 입력은 각 자음을 발음의 유사성에 근거하여 기 제시한 자음그룹에 두고 해당 버튼의 반복누름에 의하여 선택되도록 할 수 있다. 다음의 표는 아랫점이 붙은 자음을 발음의 유사성에 근거하여 함께 그룹핑한 사례이다. 물론 각 그룹은 임의의 버튼에 할당할 수 있으며, 변형이 가능하다. 이 경우, 하나의 버튼에 명시적으로 또는 암시적으로 할당된 알파벳의 수가 많아지면, 버튼의 반복누름의 횟수가 많아지는 단점이 있다. It can be seen that there is a consonant with a dot (.) Under the consonant. This is called "bottom point" for convenience. Hindi basic consonant "

(ud) ","

(udh) ", with five borrowed consonants

(k) ","

(kh) ","

(g) ","

(j) ","

It is said that the five borrowed consonants are rarely used. The entry of letters with a lower dot is placed in a group of consonants presented based on the similarity of pronunciation and selected by repeated pressing of the corresponding button. The following table shows a group of consonants with lower dots grouped together based on the similarity of pronunciation: Of course, each group can be assigned to any button and can be modified. If the number of alphabets explicitly or implicitly assigned to is increased, the number of times of repeated pressing of the button increases.

(k)" 는 [1]버튼에 배치, "

(ch)" 는 [2]버튼에 배치, ... "

(r)" 은 [9]버튼에 배치)할 수 있다. 또한 예를 들어 모음은, __(a), __(i), __(u) 를 각각 [*], [0], [#] 버튼에 배치하면 매우 안정감있는 키패드가 구성된다. 위의 그룹은 단지 예시일 뿐이며, 변형이 가능함은 자명하다. 또한 각 그룹을 대표하는 자음 하나씩 만을 키패드에 표시할 수도 있으나, 복수로 표시(예. [1]버튼에 "

(k)" 와 "

(g)" 표시 또는 2개 이상 표시)하는 것도 가능하며, 각 그룹은 임의의 버튼에 배정될 수 있음은 자명하다. 상기 예시에 의하여 나열된 순서로 버튼의 반복누름에 따라 알파벳이 선택된다고 하면, "

(k)"가 배정된 버튼을 한번 누르면 "

(k)" 가 인식되고, 한번 더 누르면 "

(g)" 가 인식되고, 한번 더 누르면 "

(kh)" 가 인식되는 식이다. Based on the above table, one consonant representing each consonant group can be arbitrarily placed on each button. For example, the first consonants of the nine groups above are placed on the [1]-[9] buttons respectively (ie, "

(k) "is placed on the [1] button, and"

(ch) "is placed on the [2] button, ..."

(r) "can be placed on the [9] button). For example, a vowel can contain __ (a), __ (i), and __ (u) as [*], [0], [#], respectively. When placed on a button, a very stable keypad is formed, the above groups are just examples, and it is obvious that they can be modified, and only one consonant representing each group may be displayed on the keypad, but a plurality of displays (eg. On the [1] button.

(k) "and"

(g) "or two or more), it is obvious that each group can be assigned to any button. Given that the alphabet is selected according to the repeated pressing of the buttons in the order listed by the above example, "

(k) "button once

(k) "is recognized, press once more to"

(g) "is recognized, press once more to"

(kh) "is recognized.

(d)" 를 입력한 후, 약속된 버튼(예. [6]버튼)을 길게 눌러 "

(ud)" 를 입력할 수 있다. 이 방법을 사용하면, 아랫점이 붙지 않는 알파벳에도 아랫점을 덧붙인 글자를 입력할 수 있는 범용성이 있다. Next, the "control processing method using a long press" found in the applicant's prior application can be used. For example, consonant "

(d) ", then press and hold the button (e.g. [6] button)

(ud) ". With this method, you can enter a letter with a lower point in an alphabet that does not have a lower point.

(k)" 을 입력한 후, 약속된 버튼(예. [9]버튼)을 길게 눌러 "

" 를 입력할 수 있다. There is a consonant with a dot on the consonant as a sign of a half-non-consonant. For convenience, this dot is called "upper". The alphabet with the dot can also be entered as "Control using long press". For example, consonant "

(k) ", then press and hold the promised button (eg [9] button)

"Can be entered.

" - 점선으로 된 동그라미 부분에는 자음 또는 모음이 위치함)가 붙는 것이다. 이를 편의상 "반달점" 이라 부른다. 모음 "

(a)" 는 생략되어 표시되지 않으므로, 실제로는 반달점이 모음 또는 자음위에 붙게된다. 마찬가지로 "길게누름을 이용한 컨트롤처리방법" 으로 입력할 수 있다. 예를 들어, "

(k)" 다음 "

(a-)" 을 입력하면 "

(ka-)" 가 되고, 다시 약속된 버튼(예. [8]버튼)을 길게 누르면, "

" 가 된다. 역시, "

(k)" 다음 약속된 버튼(예. [8]버튼)을 길게 누르면, "

" 가 된다. 만약 "

(k)" 를 포함한 알파벳 그룹이 [8]버튼에 할당되고, [8]버튼에 "

(k)" 하나 또는 다른 알파벳이 함께 배치되어 있다면, "

" 는 "88~" 로 입력됨을 알 수 있다. (여기서 "8~" 은 [8]버튼을 길게 누르는 것을 의미)Next, the vowel non-vowels (nostrils) have a "half moon + dot" symbol on the vowel ("

"-A dotted circle with consonants or vowels is attached." For convenience, it is called "half point."

(a) "is omitted, so the half moon is actually attached to the vowel or consonant. Similarly, it can be entered as" control method using long press ". For example,

(k) "next"

(a-) "enters"

(ka-) "and press and hold the button again (eg [8] button).

"Becomes. Again,"

(k) "Press and hold the next promised button (eg [8] button),"

"Becomes. If"

Alphabet group including (k) "is assigned to the [8] button, and the" 8 "button is assigned to the" 8 "button.

(k) "If one or the other alphabet is placed together,"

"Is entered as" 88 ~ "(where" 8 ~ "means hold down the [8] button).

Next, an example of applying the parallel input method under the above-described Hindi input method will be briefly shown. Hindi syllables begin with "consonant + vowel + ..." or "vowel + ...", and the consonants alternate. Therefore, when inputting Hindi, parallel input using "(first vowel) + syllable reference initial code" or "(first vowel value) + syllable reference initial value simple code" is possible. Similarly, "(first vowel) + consonant simple code" or "(first vowel value) + consonant simple code" can be used. The parentheses of the "first vowel" and "first vowel values" are due to the syllable beginning with a consonant.

(s) 가 입력되고 나서 모음버튼이 입력되지 않고, 다른 자음버튼(예. (t) 그룹의 알파벳이 배정된 버튼)이 입력되는 순간 자음이 연속하므로 힌디어 제한(힌디어 단어생성 규칙)을 위반하므로 입력값을 심플코드로 해석하는 것이다.

(s) 가 입력되고 나서

(t') 가 입력되면 단어의 처음이 "

(s)__

(t')..." 와 일치하는 단어를 사용자에 추천(예. 리스트 형태)하여 줄 것이다. 만약 한번 더 (t)그룹의 알파벳이 배정된 버튼이 눌러지면, "

(s)__

(th)..." 와 일치하는 단어를 사용자에 추천하여 줄 것이다. (밑줄부분에는 모음이 있음을 의미) "

(s)__

(th)..." 까지 입력되면 이에 일치하는 단어 "

", ... 등등의 단어를 사용자에 추천하여 줄 수 있다. 마찬가지로 "모음+자음" 이 인식되고, 다시 모음버튼의 입력없이 다른 자음버튼이 눌러지는 순간 입력값을 심플코드로 해석하여 처리할 수 있다. 이 경우는 "첫모음+자음+___+자음..."이 일치하는 단어를 사용자에 추천하여 주게 될 것이다. Assume that "(first vowel value) + syllable-based initial value simple code" is used as a shortcut input value. An example of a full-priority parallel input method is as follows. If a consonant is input as the first input after the start of the word, and the consonant is input again without the vowel button being pressed, it violates the Hindi restriction (Hindi word generation rule) in which the consonant and the vowel alternately. The first syllable consonant and the second syllable consonant match the word is recommended to the user. As a specific example

Since the vowel button is not input after (s) is input and another consonant button (e.g., a button assigned to the alphabet of the (t) group) is contiguous, the consonants are continuous, which violates the Hindi limitation (Hindi word generation rule). To interpret the input as a simple code.

after (s) is entered

If (t ') is entered, the beginning of a word is "

(s) __

(t ') ... "will suggest words to the user (eg list). If the button with the letter of the (t) group is pressed once more,

(s) __

(th) ... "will suggest words to the user (meaning that there is a vowel in the underline)

(s) __

(th) ... "to match the word"

The words ", ... etc. can be recommended to the user. Similarly," vowel + consonant "is recognized, and the input value is interpreted as a simple code when another consonant button is pressed without inputting a vowel button. In this case, the user will be prompted for a word that matches "first vowel + consonant + ___ + consonant ...".

(k)__

(g)..." 와 같은 입력값을 처리하려면, " (k)" 입력후 일정시간(선출원에서 언급한 언어제한해제 지연시간 또는 이타지연시간) 동안의 시간지연을 통하여 "

(k)" 를 확정하고 나서, "

(g)" 를 입력하는 식으로 가능하다. 또는 약속(예. 우측이동버튼 누름)에 따라 기 입력된 "

(k)" 를 확정하고 나서 "

(g)" 를 입력하는 식으로 가능하다. 이러한 병행입력방법의 사례는 모두 선출원에서 언급(PC용 키보드 및 키패드에서 적용가능함)한 것으로 새로운 내용이 아니다. If only combinations of consonants on the same button (eg "

(k) __

(g) ... "to process input values, enter" (k) "and then enter a time delay for a period of time (language deactivation delay or other delay time mentioned in the earlier application).

(k) ", and then"

(g) "or by inputting the previously entered""according to the appointment (eg pressing the right button).

(k) "and then"

(g) "is possible. All of these parallel input methods are mentioned in the earlier application (applicable for PC keyboards and keypads) and are not new.

In the present invention, it is described that the alphabet is recognized in response to the "button press". In detail in the program, in practice, a predetermined alphabet may be recognized when a button is pressed, and when a button is pressed, a predetermined alphabet may not be recognized, and a predetermined alphabet may be recognized when a button is pressed and released. In the present invention, the expression "pressing a button" also includes a case where an alphabet is recognized at the moment of being pressed down. This is the same also in the other content of this invention.

12.14 How to Enter Language Restrictions on the Half Consonant Separation Keypad

The half consonants (ie, half vowels) are slightly different for each language. In English, w, y, j, etc. are generally treated as half consonants. Some languages exclude j, others include v, etc. Sometimes. In general, w and y seem to be treated as half consonants in most languages.

Since the semi-consonants have similar properties and phonetic properties to vowels, placing them in separate groups is an extension of grouping consonants based on the similarity of pronunciation.

In addition, there are alphabets that are not used in certain languages among English alphabets (for example, k and w which are used only in foreign languages in Spanish), and alphabets other than English alphabet (applicants are called modified alphabets or additional alphabets for convenience). It is also used. Unused alphabets in English alphabets will also be necessary for the entry of commonly used English. So if you don't have a lot of Roman alphabets that aren't used in a particular language, you can group them with half consonants and assign them to the same button. See Figures 10-6 in Chinese.

You can also group alphabets that are not used in a particular language together and assign them to the same button.

12.15 Language Constraints on the Incomplete Consonant Separation Keypad

In the present invention, it has been shown that ambiguity can be eliminated or minimized by constructing a consonant separation keypad optimized for each language and applying a repetitive selection method. In addition, by configuring the consonant separation keypad in this way, the algorithm of the input system can be simplified. It is obvious that various modifications are possible based on this. Therefore, the case of assigning the consonants to some buttons by slightly modifying them is also a modified category of the language restriction input method in the consonant separation keypad proposed in the present invention. This is called "incomplete consonant separation keypad" for convenience, and the button assigned with the consonant is called "consonant mixing button" for convenience.

For example, the vowel “i” and the (half) consonant “y” are grouped together on the consonant separator keypad, assigned to a specific button, and the consonants (in this case half consonants) and vowels are arranged in a predetermined order according to the number of button presses. It can also be selected (the remaining buttons are separated into consonant and vowel buttons). If there are no consecutive words such as “iy” or “yi”, it is possible to input Chinese pinyin without ambiguity by applying Chinese restriction input method. In this case, it is assumed that the consonants are selected in the order of “y” (one press) and “i” (two presses) according to the number of presses of the specified button. As soon as it is pressed once, the input of the previous consonant button is determined to have entered the consonant, so the system does not consider that the consonant mixing button is pressed once, but “y” is temporarily entered, and the vowel “i” is entered. Can be confirmed. This is because, in Chinese, you can use language restrictions that prevent the consonant “y” after a certain consonant.

For another example, you can group vowels “i” and consonants “j” or vowels “i” and consonants “k” into the same group and apply the repetition selection method. When entering Chinese Pinyin “…” ik… " or "… ki… Ambiguity can occur if there are consecutive occurrences, such as. Assigning consonants and vowels to some of these buttons for no particular reason, complicates the input algorithm, reduces the efficiency of the input system configuration, and is worse than applying a language-limited input method on a full consonant split keypad. . However, due to the characteristics of each language, a consonant mixed button may be placed on some buttons for the special purpose of assigning all the consonants to all 10 number buttons (see Korean example).

This can be applied by modifying the flowchart of FIGS. 10-7. See Figs. 10-9. The same is true when there is more than one vowel mixing button, and the same case when two or more consonants are assigned to one consonant mixing button. Applying language restrictions on an incomplete vowel separation keypad is a bit more complicated (see the examples of “i” and “y” above), and it is necessary to apply consonant and vowel combination rules for each language. The flowchart in which the language restrictions are applied in detail may be more complicated than those shown in FIGS. 10-9. 10-9 may be considered to be a very simplified representation of only some general content of FIG. 10-7.

For example, when entering the Chinese Pinyin in the standard English keypad of Figure 5-1, since five vowels are assigned to different buttons, the vowels can be recognized without ambiguity. In the case of consonants, a consonant followed by "~ vowel + n" can be recognized without ambiguity. When "~ vowel + n + m" is entered in "~ n + X" ('X' is the English consonant), the vowel "o" assigned to the [6] button is combined. When a possible vowel (for example vowel 'a') comes, it can be temporarily recognized as "~ ao". However, since the normal Chinese syllable syllable does not end with "m", the previous input value can be recognized as "~ anm + vowel" by looking at the vowel recognized by the next input value. If "a" is followed by a vowel that cannot be combined (e.g. "e"), then "n + m = 666" is entered. It can be treated as "~ enm ~" (since '~ emn ~' is not possible in Chinese Pinyin).

Ambiguity can occur when a consonant follows a syllable ending in "~ vowel + ng". For example, "~ ngg ~" can be recognized as "~ nh ~". In Chinese, the system can search the index for all Chinese characters matching "~ ngg ~" and "~ nh ~" and provide them to the user. In case of "~ ngh + collection ~", it can be recognized as "~ ni + collection". If the subsequently recognized vowel is a vowel that cannot be combined after "i" (e.g. 'u'), the input value can be recognized as "~ nghu", but otherwise "~ ngh + collection ~" and You can search for and process Chinese characters corresponding to both "~ ni + collection ~". In addition, when some ambiguity occurs, all the words matching the possible analysis results can be searched and provided to the user.

In the case of inputting Chinese Pinyin by applying the Chinese restriction repetition selection method in the standard English keypad of FIG. 1-1, "~ ngh + vowel ~" may be recognized as "~ ni + vowel". The phrases can be searched and processed in Pinyin index. If all of the full codes (full codes in the iterative selection method based on Fig. 1-1) are stored in the Pinyin index, as in the case of applying the Chinese-limited iteration selection method, all cases in which input values can be generated (eg By searching the index for “~ ngh + vowels” and “~ ni + vowels”, the system can identify matching phrases.

For example, when the repeated selection method is applied to FIGS. 1-1 and 5-1, “222” may be recognized as “aaa”, “ab”, “ba”, and “c”. Accordingly, "beijing = 22334445444664" in FIGS. 1-1 and 5-1, where a consecutive number group can be recognized as a plurality of alphabet combinations. Consecutive groups of numbers “22 ~” can be interpreted as “aa” or “b”. “~ 33 ~” can be interpreted as “dd” or “e”. Thus, “2233 ~” can be interpreted as four kinds of “aadd ~”, “aae ~”, “bdd ~” or “be ~”. As the input increases, the number of possible combinations increases exponentially. This alphabetic interpretation of input values is also called "alphabetic combination" or "candidate alphabetic combination" for convenience.

However, when “22 ~” is pressed, it can be interpreted as “aa ~” or “b ~”. If the system checks that the word starting with “aa ~” is no longer in the index by referring to the index, For example, the system can treat inputs “22 ~” as “b ~”, except for combinations that begin with “aa ~”. This is similar to the way that the Pinyin interprets the input value “22 ~” as “b ~” using a Chinese restriction that does not begin with “aa ~”. Thus, when “2233 ~” is pressed, the index is searched for only two combinations of “bdd ~” and “be ~”, where again the phrase starting with “bdd ~” no longer exists in the index. If the system confirms, the combination starting with "bdd ~" is not considered anymore, and only "be ~" is processed according to the next input value. Similarly, in Chinese Pinyin, it is similar to treating “input value“ 2233 ~ ”as“ be ~ ”using Chinese restriction that“ bdd ~ ”is not possible. It can be interpreted as “beg ~” for the input value “22334 ~”. It can also be interpreted as “begg ~” or “beh ~” for the input value “223344 ~.” When the pinyin index is searched and the word starting with “begg ~” is no longer present, the system enters it. The value “223344 ~” will be treated as “beh ~”. This can be seen as similar to using the Chinese Restriction input method (eg, input method using Chinese Restriction where “begg ~” is not valid syllable and only “beh ~” is valid syllable syllable according to Chinese Pinyin generation rule). When “4” is pressed once more and the input value becomes “2233444 ~”, it can be interpreted as “behg ~” or “bei ~”. There is no longer a word starting with “behg ~” by searching the index. As soon as the system confirms that it does not, the input value can be treated as "bei ~", which translates the input value "2233444 ~" into "bei ~" because "behg ~" is not available in Chinese restricted input method. This can be seen as similar to processing.

In a system that stores all the words you want to enter and the full code, there are simply 2 * 2 * 4 * 1 * 4 * 2 * 1 = 128 possible candidates for "beijing = 22334445444664". Of course, it is also included in the scope of the present invention that all 128 candidate alphabet combinations are compared to the index and processed only for matching words. However, in a system where the system can recognize the input value from the beginning of the input, the alphabetical combination ('aa ~', 'bdd ~', behg ~ ', etc.) that does not exist in the index as the input value is increased is used. You may find it useful to exclude the initial input.

The system can search for only some candidate alphabetical combinations present in the index among a large number of candidate alphabetical combinations that occur as the same input value in the iterative selection method continuously increases. If none of the candidate alphabetic combinations by input value are found in the index, the system can treat the input value as a simple code of the promised type.

12.16 Application of hidden control methods

In the above consonant separation keypad, select an arbitrary button (button on the 3 * 4 keypad or a separate button on the outside) as the control button, select only the representative alphabet as the corresponding button, and input the remaining alphabet by the control processing method. Can be. For example, “w, y, v” assigned to the [0] button on the keypad of FIG. 10-6 is assigned to an arbitrary consonant button, and the [0] button is used as a control button, so that “p = b + 0 = 10 ”(if input is applied after control). This is already mentioned in the earlier application.

13. Parallel input method judged by length of input value

The length of the shortcode stored in the index may be less than a certain number in some cases. Also, in certain cases, the type of shortcode entered by the user or by the system (e.g., Type 1 (city name), Type 2 (bank name),... Can be built). If the type of the shortcode inputted as Type 1 (city name) is specified and the length of the shortcode of the city name is 3 or less, the length of the input value is 3 when the parallel input method using the shortcut input method as the default mode is applied. The moment it exceeds, the system treats the input as a full code. Conversely, when applying the full-priority parallel input method, if three input values are input and the word termination function (eg blank) is input, the system can treat the input value as a simple code.

This may be particularly useful when the length of a shortcode of a certain type (city name-北京, company name-四通 集團,...) Can be less than a certain length, such as Korean and Chinese. Types of nouns often consist of less than a certain number of syllables, and it is natural to use a syllable-based initial code short code.For example, most bank names in Korean consist of two syllables. The length of the code is 2).

It is necessary to determine whether the input value is a short code or full code at the beginning of the input and not provide it to the user, that is, determine whether the input value is a simple code or a full code only if the input value is longer than a certain length or less. May also be useful. In other words, instead of searching the shortcode index every time an input value is input, only checking whether the input value is longer than a certain length can simplify the implementation and improve the performance of the system.

14. Parallel language input method

The language restriction parallel input method applies the full priority parallel input method at the moment when the input value violates the "word generation rule" of a specific language (i.e., the language restriction violation), and the system considers the input value as a simple code. To deal with. If it is confirmed that the value matching the input value no longer exists in the simple code index, the input value can be regarded as full code again and processed.

14.1 Language Restriction Parallel Input Method Using Language Repetition Selection Method as Full Input Method

14.1.1 Chinese

In particular, the syllable-based initial code of Chinese based on Figs. 10-1 to 10-4 has only the numerical values of the consonant buttons [1] to [9] (even when the collections a, o, and e are used alone). If the vowels i, u, ..u are used alone, they are preceded by y, w, y respectively). In the example of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the full code to which the repeat selection method is applied is the second or at least the third input value in most cases, one of the [*], [0] or [#] buttons for vowel input. This must be entered. This property is a good property to know whether the input value is full code at the beginning of the input when applying the "parallel input method" as mentioned in the Korean example of the previous application (method using the collection element). To provide.

For example, in the parallel input method (full priority parallel input method) using the iterative selection method based on Figs. 10-1 to 10-4 as the pull input method and the pull input mode as the default input mode, If the value "693 ... = shk ..." is entered, the input value is not full code at the moment when the third value [3] is entered (up to 'sh' but the next consonant 'k' The system can recognize the input value as a simple code. Again “112… = pd… Is entered, the input value does not form a full code at the moment when the third input value [2] is input (in Chinese input, '11' cannot be 'bb' and must be interpreted as 'p', If p is followed by a Roman alphabet P consonant d or t, the system can recognize Chinese syllables) and the system can treat the input as a simple code. Similarly, “7771… = wb… Is entered, the system can regard the input value as a simple code and process it as soon as the fourth input value [1] is entered. After all, in most cases, when a second or third input value is entered, the system knows whether the input value is full code or not.

“14…. = bj… ”Is entered, the system recognizes that the input does not form a valid Chinese syllable at the moment the second input value [4] is entered (since there is no Roman alphabet consonant combined, such as bj in the Chinese Our Lady), You can treat input values as simple codes. That is, in FIG. 10-5, the system can provide the user with the phrase “Bejing” or “北京”, which is a corresponding phrase of the simple code “14”. If there is no simple code starting with "14" or "14" in the index of the simple code, the system will treat the input as full code again and provide the user with "bj".

This is the same as in the case of Korean using vowel elements (Fig. 4-5). 4-5 described above can be seen as a Korean limited iterative selection method, and when the full priority parallel input method is applied, if “12” is input, the input value does not form a valid Korean syllable. Considers the input value as a simple code and provides the user with a phrase corresponding to the simple code by referring to the simple code index. However, if it is confirmed that the simple code matching the “12” no longer exists in the simple code index, the system regards the input value again as a full code and provides the user with “AB”.

For simplicity, the simple codes are shown in a sorted state in the simple code indexes of FIGS. 5-4 and 10-5, but they may be stored in any form within the system. Simply sorts the simplecode and checks whether the input is no longer in the simplecode index.

In addition, the parallel input method using the short input mode (assuming that only syllable-based initial codes consisting of [1] to [9] are stored in the simple code index to be searched) based on Figs. In the short-priority parallel input method, when the second value [*] is input from the input value "1 * ...", the system recognizes the input value as full code without processing the simple code index and can process it. have. This is also the same as in the case of Korean in Figures 5-4.

In Figs. 5-4 and 10-5, the pinyin / kanji index and the simple code index are described as one index. However, as shown in Fig. 5-1, there is a Pinyin / Chinese index (simply called "Pinyin index". An index storing "Pinyin + Pinyin-compatible Chinese"-for searching a corresponding Chinese character from the input Pinyin), and also a simple code It is self-evident that the pinyin index (simply referred to as the "simple chord index". "Simple chord + simple chord corresponding pinyin + Chinese to pinyin" or "simple chord + simple chord corresponding pinyin") may be separately placed. Do.

5-4 and 10-5, it is not necessary to store only syllable-based initial codes in the simple code index, and other types of simple codes may be stored together, such as consonant-based initial codes. Similarly, depending on the type of simple code, the syllable-based initial code index, the consonant-based initial code index, and the overall associated simple code index may be implemented by placing each index.

As shown in Fig. 10-10, it is assumed that the syllable-based initial code "14", the consonant-based simple code "1473", and the overall associated simple code "1 * # 4 # 73" are found for "北京". In the case of applying the Chinese restricted full priority parallel input method on the keypad of FIGS. 10-10, in the case of the syllable-based initial code "14" and the consonant-based simple code "1473", the system inputs the second input value "7" when it is pressed. You can regard the value as a simple code and retrieve and process the index. However, in the case of the totally associated simple code "1 * # 4 # 73" of "beijing", when the input value "1 * # 4 ..." is interpreted as full code, it becomes "baiz ...", and "1 * Up to # 4 "does not violate the Pinyin generation rule. However, "baiz ..." (and "baij ..."-because it can be "baij ..." based on the following inputs) is not the pinyin present in the pinyin index of Figures 10-11. Therefore, the system interprets the input value as full code according to the input value of each input value, so that the input value is "b ... => ba ... => bai ... => baiz ..." At each recognition, the Pinyin index is searched for matching phrases. As can be seen from Fig. 10-10, a matching pinyin can be found up to "bai ~", but as soon as the input is recognized as "baiz ~" (and potentially "baij ~"), the system no longer matches the pinyin index. It can be confirmed that there is no (see (1) of Figure 10-10). Therefore, the input value "1 * # 4 ..." up to "baiz ~" can be regarded as a simple code, and the matching phrase can be found by referring to the simple code index (Fig. 10-11 (2)-(A ), (2)-(B)). Here, even if the simple code index cannot find a phrase that matches the input value "1 * # 4 # ...", the system can again treat the input value as a full code and treat it as "bai ...".

Due to the peculiarity of the Chinese character, all pinyin and kanji indices (Pinyin / Chinese index) must be stored in the system. Therefore, even if the input value forms a valid Pinyin syllable, the system enters the pinyin / kanji index. It means to treat the value as a simple code. This can be seen in the same context as processing the input value as a simple code when the system recognizes that the input value is not full code.

When different types of simple codes exist for the same word, as shown in FIGS. 10-10 or 10-11, it is possible to have a simple code in multiple forms in multiple forms for one pinyin. In processing the input value as a simple code (that is, processing the input value as a short input), the processing of (2)-(A) or (2)-(B) in Figs. Optionally possible. Using the process of Figs. 10-11 (2)-(B), it is not necessary to have a simple code in the index. The process of (2)-(B) is to find the matching pinyin by comparing the pinyin of the index with the combination of pinyin that can be achieved by each input. The combination of pinyin that an input value can achieve is assigned to each button when "1 *" is pressed because two alphabets are assigned to the [1] button and three alphabets are assigned to the [*] button. It is easy to see that six combinations of (= 2x3) are possible. This is called "simple code possible alphabet combination" or "possible alphabet combination" for convenience. Since two alphabets are assigned to the [#] button in FIGS. 10-11, 12 combinations will be possible when pressed to "1 * #", and 24 combinations will be possible when pressed to "1 * # 4". However, since there is no Pinyin beginning with "poi ..." in the actual Chinese Pinyin dictionary, the combination below "poi ..." can be excluded from consideration. That is, for the input value "1 * # 4", the combination "poiz ..." and "poij ..." below "poi ..." may also be excluded. Likewise, you can search for Pinyin that matches the input, excluding not only "poi ..." but also combinations that do not exist in the Pinyin index.

Using the process of Figs. 10-11 (2)-(A) should have a simple code in the index, but can also handle the case where an irregularly defined simple code is used. Using the processing of (2)-(B) does not require storing the simple code in the index, but requires the premise that a simple code with a certain rule (for example, a totally associated simple code) is entered. It is necessary to know in advance what type of simple code is promised (e.g. totally associated simple code).

Due to the peculiarity of Chinese, which must have an index of all Pinyin / Chinese characters that you want to input, when the value interpreted as full code does not exist in the index as shown in FIGS. Can be regarded as a shortened input value). When applying the parallel priority input method, FIGS. 10-12 illustrate a procedure generally applicable to Chinese input. This may be equally applied to a full-priority parallel input method using syllable-based initial codes or consonant-based simple codes. For example, if a syllable-based initial code is entered, the system interprets it as a full code and searches for the pinyin index. In most cases, the second or third input value no longer exists in the Pinyin index. This is because the system can recognize that. 10-13 show that a procedure of checking whether an input value constitutes a valid Pinyin syllable is added before searching for a Pinyin index using linguistic characteristics of Chinese.

In the input system not only in Chinese but also in other languages, when the system stores the index of all words to be input, similarly as in the procedures of FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13, one input value is inputted. Each time, it is possible to interpret the input as a full code, search for words in the index to see if they match, and if the matching word no longer exists, treat the input as a shortcode.

14.1.2 English, etc.

If it is recognized that the fourth consonant is entered from the beginning of the first word starting with "st ~" or "sp ~", and from the beginning of the first word without beginning with "st ~" or "sp ~". As soon as the second consonant is recognized as being input, the system can treat the input as a simple code.

For example, the simple repetition selection method is applied on the keypad of Fig. 1-1, and when inputting “467 ... = gms…”, the input value is the English word generation rule. Because of the violation, the system can treat the input value as a simple code. If the simple code index contains the entire associated simple code “4678255 = install”, the system can provide the user with the simple code equivalent install. The simple code index of the search range indicates “467…”. If there is no simple code that matches, then the input can be treated as full code again.

As described above, if the English Repetition Selection Method is used as a full input method on the alphabetic keypad, the input value does not start with English input rules (eg, "st ~" or "sp ~" from the beginning of a word). Since it is easy to know whether three consonants cannot come), the parallel input method can be applied more efficiently.

14.2 Language Restriction Parallel Input Method Using Full Input Method as Control Method Excluding Representative Alphabet

In Fig. 1-1, when the first alphabet of each button is inputted as the corresponding alphabet by one button, and the remaining alphabet is input by the control processing method (that is, the control processing method other than the representative alphabet is applied), the above-described English is explained. By using the word generation rule, the language restriction parallel input method that treats the input value as a simple code can be applied.

For example, in Fig. 1-1, when the first alphabet is represented as the representative alphabet and the remaining alphabet is input by the control method, the moment when the third input value [7] is inputted when “467 ... = gms…” is inputted. Since the input value violates the English word generation rule, the system can treat the input value as a simple code.

Similarly, it can be applied similarly to languages other than English, and the rest is similar to the language restriction parallel input method using the repeated selection method as a full input method.

14.3 Overcoming Third-order Ambiguity in Language-Restricted Parallel Input Methods

In case of inputting the simple code “72673” of “scope”, if the system first recognizes it as full code, it becomes “72673 = pampd” and the input value does not violate the word generation rule of English. The first value is recognized as a full code, and secondly, the third value is interpreted as a simple code to generate a "third ambiguity" that is also recognized as a scope corresponding to the simple code. In this case, the simple repetition selection method is applied based on FIG. 1-1 as the pull input method.

In this case, the system will first provide pampd to the user. However, if the user wants to enter the scope, the user can select the scope by pressing a specific button (for example, the arrow [v] button below). Or, if the word input is terminated after entering “72673” (for example, a space is entered), the user can use “pampd”, which first interprets the input value as full code, and “scope”, which is interpreted as simple code. You can provide it to the list and let the user make a selection.

The above case can be similarly applied to the parallel input method in which the control processing method except the representative alphabet is used as the full input method. In addition, in the short-priority parallel input method instead of the full-priority parallel input method, even when the input value exists in the simple code index at the end of a word after inputting the input value, when the input value is regarded as a full code, the language restriction is applied. If not violated (third ambiguity occurs), the user can be forced to make a selection (press a specific button repeatedly or select from a list).

The same applies to languages other than English (particularly in the case of Japanese which applies the control method except the representative alphabet).

In order to select one of a plurality of candidates, an arbitrary button which is not frequently used among the movement buttons may be used to select a target phrase among candidate phrases output by the system. It has already been explained that this can be applied to all cases where ambiguity occurs as well as when third-order ambiguity occurs.

15. Parallel input method using a string that violates language restrictions

Input values (full code or simple code) can be interpreted on the client side or on the server side. Fig. 11-1 and Fig. 11-2 are diagrams of prior applications showing the case of analysis on the client side and the case of analysis on the server side, respectively. In other words, simply "system" encompasses both client-side and server-side systems. When the input value is a simple code, the client side interprets the simple code and transmits the simple code corresponding phrase as a text to the server side. On the server side, various services may be used. Similarly, when the input value is transmitted to the server side as a number and analyzed on the server side, the simple code may be interpreted on the server side and used for various services. The DTMF tone is transmitted from the client side and the input value is received from the server and used as one of the examples. Of course, the numeric value is transmitted from the client side to the server side.

In the parallel language input method, the input value violates the language restriction (that is, the input value does not constitute a valid syllable of a specific language), and the system treats the input value as a simple code, but inputs it to the index of the simple code. There may not be a simple code that matches the value. In this case, the input value is regarded as full code again. For example, the user inputs "7799" with "Samsung Electronics" in mind based on Fig. 4-5, and "Samsung" corresponding to "7799" and "7799" in the simple code index in the client system. If you do not save the former, the system will simply assume that the user has entered "ㅅㅅㅈ". In the case of the securities information system, if the client sends the input value "7799" to the server side, or the Samsung Electronics corresponding to the input value "7799" to the server side, the "7799" can be interpreted by the stock information server. Therefore, it should not have any problem (assuming that the stock information server has the simple code "7799" and the simple code corresponding phrase "Samsung Electronics"). However, in the character input mode on the client side, the user inputs "7799" and treats the input value as a simple code on the client side, and "7799" does not exist in the client simple code index. If the string "ㅅㅅㅈ" is transmitted to the server side, it is difficult to utilize it in the stock information server.

Therefore, if the transmitted string "ㅅㅅㅈ" is not a meaningful value, the Securities Information Server extracts "7799" used to enter "ㅅㅅㅈ" and replaces "Samsung Electronics" which is a corresponding phrase of the simple code "7799". Can be tracked and utilized in the system. Alternatively, if you use the syllable-based initial code as a simple code in Korean, the system will track and use "Samsung Electronics" that match the first consonant of the syllable with "ㅅㅅㅈ" among the phrases of the simple code. To provide services.

The same can be applied to a PC environment using a keyboard rather than a keypad. In other words, in the stock information system using a PC as a client, the user had to enter "Samsung Electronics" to query the stock price of "Samsung Electronics". However, even if only "ㅅㅅㅈ" was entered and sent to the server side, the Stock Information Server The system recognizes that "ㅅㅅㅈ" does not exist in the listed company name as a sequence of single letters, and after extracting the two methods described above ("7799"), "Samsung Electronics" tracking or "ㅅㅅㅈ" and the first consonant of syllables match "Samsung" tracking) to provide services.

Another method is to register “7799 (Simple Code), Samsung Electronics (Simple Code Correspondence)” as well as “ㅅㅅㅈ” (conventionally called “Simple Code Correspondence”) ”in the server side index. You can check that the value “ㅅㅅㅈ” does not form a valid Korean syllable and compare it with the stored simple code corresponding character to find out what the user intended is “Samsung”.

The above is summarized in Figure 11-3, and (A), (B), (C) can be selectively.

Furthermore, even when a character such as a character is input from a client such as a PC through a device such as a keyboard (for example, a character is input using a PC word processor, etc.), the syllable-based initial code is used. By inputting only the first consonant of a syllable, and converting it into a target phrase in a system (client or server), it is possible to input text at high speed or to use it in various information systems. For example, if the user enters "Samsung" and the user enters "ㅅㅅㅈ", the system may search the index and provide the user with "Samsung" with the first consonant "ㅅㅅㅈ". The other methods described above (such as extracting and indexing simple codes of input values based on a specified specific keypad and storing simple code corresponding characters in an index) are also applicable. See FIG. 11-5. (A), (B) and (C) are optionally possible.

 Up to now, in registering and inputting a commercial phrase, simply specifying a combination of a special function button and a number button, regardless of the relationship with the phrase. For example, "Samsung Electronics" is registered as a commercial phrase, "alt + 1" to be entered.

Similarly, syllables of “四通 集團 (satongjipdan: Korean phonetics are regarded as Chinese Pinyin for convenience because applicants do not know Chinese pronunciation, but can be similarly applied to Chinese pronunciation) based on Fig. 10-2.” The reference initial code is “6242” corresponding to s, t, j, and d. When the user enters "6242", if 6242 and satongjipdan are not registered in the simple code index of the client side system, the client side system only provides "sdzd" to the user. If the user sends “sdzd” to the server side, since “sdzd” does not form a valid Chinese syllable on the server side, the user inputs “6242” from “sdzd” and extracts the simple code (in this case syllable-based initials). Code) It is possible to search for "四通 集團" corresponding to "6242" (assuming that the server-side system stores the simple code and the corresponding phrase).

In the case of Korean, “sdzd” and other consonant combinations that can be modified based on Fig. 10-2, such as searching for “ㅅㅅㅈ” and a phrase matching the first consonant of the alphabet assigned with each consonant. Eg, "xdjd", "stjt", "sdjt", ... 16 cases) and the first consonant of each syllable can be provided to the user.

Also, the simple code corresponding character “sdzd” is stored on the server side, and the value “sdzd” transmitted from the client side does not form valid Chinese syllables. The system can find out what is "四通 集團".

The above is summarized in Figure 11-4, and (A), (B), (C) are optionally available.

The processing in Figs. 11-3 and 11-4 may be performed on the server side or on the client side.

In addition to a device equipped with a keypad, an information communication device such as a PC can provide a user by searching for a word (“四通 集團”) that matches the first consonant of a syllable of Chinese Pinyin when the user enters “stjd”. Alternatively, when the user inputs “stjd”, the system (eg PC) registers a short code (simple code corresponding character) as the first consonant “stjd” of each syllable, and violates the Chinese language restriction when the second consonant is input. Two roman alphabets (not sh, ch, zh, etc.) appear, so the input value can be regarded as a shorthand input value (the user regards it as a shorthand input). Extracting the simple code from the input value “stjd” may extract the simple code (eg 6242) by using a predetermined keypad (eg 10-2). 11-6, (A), (B), and (C) are optionally available.

 11-6 (B) shows words that the input value generates and do not produce valid Pinyin syllables (in this example, "stjd" as the syllable-based initial value) and the first alphabet of each syllable of the phrase stored in the index ( "sa-tong-jip-dan => stjd") to search for matching phrases. It can be seen that the syllable reference initial value is used as the shortened input value. In the keypad of Fig. 10- *, the syllable reference initial value corresponding to &quot; stjd " is " 622442 ". As can be easily seen from Fig. 11-6, (B) does not have a simple code index, it is possible to simply have a pinyin index for input of Chinese characters. Similarly, even when "consonant reference input value" is used as an input value, the system can search for a phrase in which the word (string) generated by the input value matches the consonant of the phrase stored in the index.

In short, the type of the input value inputted by the abbreviation, which can be recognized regularly, is similar to the simple chord type of "syllable-based initial value" (for example, "beijing's syllable-based initial value is" 144 = bj "). ), "Consonant reference input value" ("beijing" consonant reference input value is "144773 = bjng"), "first vowel + syllable reference initial value", "word reference initial value" and the like. The system treats an input value as a short input value as soon as the input value violates the language restriction.

The types of "shortened input values" presented so far are shown in the tables of FIGS. 11-11. In Fig. 11-11, the abbreviated input value (A) covers (B) to (L), which shows the type of the abbreviated input value that the system can recognize according to a certain rule. Also included are some associative simple codes defined in relation to any partial alphabet and shortened input values consisting of any arbitrary alphabet only. It can be seen that the "full input value" (Z) is the full code of the full input method.

If a certain condition (for example, the input value violates the rules for generating full codes or fails to form a valid syllable of a specific language) as stated previously, the input value is regarded as a shorthand input value and processed. (I.e., the processing is regarded as not being the full code of the promised full input method.) Since this is the core content of the parallel input method, the parallel input of the present invention may be used even if a short input value not provided in the present invention is used. Obviously included in the category of methods. In the table of Figs. 11-11, the short-cut input values (H) to (L) can be used not only in the apparatus with the keypad but also in the apparatus such as the PC as in Figs. 11-5 and 11-6. 11-6 (B) shows an example in which "syllable reference initial value" is used as a shortened input value. The term simple code or short code is used as a short term input value. The short input value of (H) ~ (L) can also be regarded as a simple code with a comprehensive meaning. That is, (I) "syllable reference initial value" in FIGS. 11-11 may be referred to as "syllable reference initial value simple code", and the shortened input values of (H) to (L) may be named as well. .

In FIG. 10- *, if "14 = bz" is input as a syllable initial value, the system will search for a phrase in the index that matches "bz" and the consonant of each syllable. Here, if you enter "4" again, "144 = bj", you will search the index for phrases that match "bj" and the first consonant of each syllable (for example, "beijing").

According to the present invention, it is further shown that when any one of the shortcut input values exemplified above is input, it can be interpreted as several types of shortcut input values. For example, a single abbreviated input value is first treated as a predetermined shortened input value (for example, a syllable reference initial value), and a second shortened input value (for example, a consonant reference input value) is processed. It is considered to be regarded as), and it is considered to process thirdly as another shortcut input value, and the following can be interpreted as several types of shortcut input values for one single input value. 10- *, if the shorthand input value "144 = bj" is input, the system first searches the index for the phrase ("beijing") that matches "bj" and the first alphabet of each syllable. In addition, regardless of whether there is a primary search result or not, the phrase that matches the consonant in the index can be searched secondarily.

This shows that the system can interpret any input of shortened input values shown in Figs. 11-11. By applying this, there may be a plurality of search results for one short input value, and the output priority may be applied according to the type of the short input value applied. For example, first, the phrase (s) retrieved by interpreting the syllable reference initial value is first interpreted as the consonant reference input value, and then the retrieved phrase (s) is outputted next. If a user mainly uses syllable-based initial values as short-term input values, it may be desirable to set the phrase (s) interpreted by the syllable-based initial values to be output primarily. Therefore, it is desirable to allow the user to specify the priority according to the type of the shortcut input value. Also, if a user wants to use only the consonant initial value, it may be desirable to set the short input value to be interpreted as the consonant initial value only. The output priority of the phrases obtained by interpreting the same type of short input value may be determined by factors such as frequency of use, as mentioned above. Also, the output priority may be determined according to the frequency of use of each of the retrieved phrases regardless of the shortcut input type applied to the shortcut input value analysis.

In the case of "jinzhi (禁止) and zhuijian (는 ㅇ), the initial syllable-based initial values are" jz "and" zj ", respectively," 444 ". In this case, the third input value" 4 "is applied when the full-priority parallel input method is applied. As soon as "" is input, the system can recognize that the input value does not form the syllable syllable. The syllable-based initial value based on Fig. 10- * is different in case of different alphabets assigned to the same button. In other words, for the short-term input value "444", all the phrases in which each syllable matches "jz" match the phrase "zj".

Similarly, when the shortcut priority parallel input method is applied, the input value can be regarded and processed as the shortcut input values in FIGS. 11-11 (B) to (L). In addition, the input value is regarded primarily as a syllable reference initial value, and the input value is regarded as a syllable reference initial code. Secondly, the input value is regarded as a consonant reference initial value. It is possible to. As soon as the input value is treated as a shorthand input and it is determined that no more matching words exist in the index, the system treats the input value as a full code. It may be desirable to allow the user to specify in advance the type of shortcut input that is commonly used.

In the case of jinzhi (禁止) and zhuijian (逐 ㅇ), in order to solve the problem of using the syllable-based initial value, the syllable-based initial value of the recommended sound and the syllable-based initial code can be as follows. In Chinese, the recommendation sounds “ch”, “sh”, and “zh” are actually a single Our Lady, and the main sign is represented by a single symbol, but in English alphabet, it is a combination of two alphabets. Therefore, the syllable reference initial simple code of zhuijian according to FIGS. 10-6 may also be “4944” corresponding to “zh + j” including “h”. The syllable base initial code will be “494” which corresponds to “zh + j”. In the keypad of Fig. 10- *, the first letters “c”, “s”, and “z” that make up the recommended sounds “ch”, “sh”, zh ”are assigned to buttons different from the second letter“ h ”, so that“ jinzhi ( There is no ambiguity when the initial syllable of simple syllables of "Yu" and "zhuijian" is set to "444".

In the full-priority parallel input method using the syllable-based initial value simple code as a shorthand input value, the input value “4 ~” is recognized as “z ~”, and when the input value “49 ~” is input, it is recognized as “zh ~”. Will be processed. However, since there are many words that start with “zh ~”, it will be less meaningful even if the system treats the input value “49 ~” as “zh ~” and outputs the corresponding phrase to the user. Therefore, for the input value “49”, the system interprets the syllable quasi-initial value simple code and outputs the phrase “z__h__”. The underlined part means that the vowel is located. If “49” is interpreted as “zh” only, it is difficult to shorten the word whose initial syllable initial value is “z__h__”. In Chinese, most words are composed of one syllable (letter) or two syllables (letter). Therefore, in order to shorten two syllable words, it is necessary to process shorthand input for the recommended sound input. See Figures 10-17. In Fig. 10-17, [禁止] followed by pale [. . .] Means that if the word "z__h__" is plural, other words of the subordinate order are printed. Of course, the words "zh__" can be printed in a lower order, and according to the user's preference, the word "zh__" may be set to be output first, but in general, the word "z__h__" is output first. It will be convenient.

If a vowel input is recognized after “49” (eg when the vowel button is pressed), the system will treat the input as “zh__” (ie, process the input as a full code). If a consonant input is recognized next to “49” (for example, when the consonant button is pressed), the system will treat the input as “zh__X__” (upper case “X” is an English consonant representing any Our Lady). In other words, even in the full-priority parallel input method, input of “ch”, “sh”, “zh”, etc. of the recommended sound is first interpreted as a simple code (a syllable-based initial value or a syllable-based initial code), and the next input is performed. Depending on whether the values are vowels or consonants, they are interpreted as full or simple codes.

The above is similar to the result of applying the consonant standard initial value simple code as the shortened input value and applying the shortened priority parallel input method. However, the syllable-based initial simple code is applied to the shortened input value, and the full-priority parallel input method is applied, but only at the beginning of the word (after the confirmation button is pressed or after the end of the word promised by the input system). When a recommendation sound is input, the input value is regarded as a shorthand input value, and the word matching the processing (e.g., in case of other recommendation sounds such as 'ch', 'sh', etc.) is searched. )

Although described above with reference to FIG. 10- *, it is obvious that the above concept can be applied to other keypads.

Furthermore, the same applies to the keyboards and keypads of a PC as well as to all similar variations of the keyboard (the type of keyboard implemented on the screen can vary widely).

16. Parallel input method using simple code-capable alphabet combination

In the case of using the syllable-based initial code as the simple code, the method described above does not have the simple code index (eg 6242 / satongjipdan / 四通 集團) on the client side. This can also be useful if you have only an index of phrases (eg satongjipdan / 四通 集團). For example, “62… The second time [2] is entered in the system, the system recognizes that the input value violates the Chinese language limit and enters the input value, “62…”. = sd… , st… , xd… , xt… (Conventionally called 'available alphabet combinations') and words in the index can be searched for and matched to the first consonant of each syllable. As the number of button presses increases, the number of possible alphabet combinations increases, which can be compared / searched for the phrases in the index. See Figures 11-7. In the indexes of Figs. 11-7, “s t j p” and “s d...”, “X d... ”,“ X t... ”(2 ** 4 = 16 possible), but with the input“ sd… ”. We could also provide the user with 四通 集團 by comparing this multi-value for each record. This is also not recommended because it is difficult to implement or has the same concepts and advantages. See Figures 11-9. Either way, it is the same to compare the phrases of the index (Pinyin in Figures 11-9) with the possible alphabet combinations that can be expressed as input values.

Similarly, if the client side does not have a simple code index (eg 7799, Samsung) but only an index of a specific phrase (eg Samsung), the user should keep the “77…” in mind. ”, The system recognizes that the input value violates the Korean language restriction as soon as the second [7] is inputted, and the input value“ 77... = ㅅ ㅅ… , Your… , ㅆㅅ… , ㅆㅆ… (Conventionally, it is called 'available alphabet combination') and the words in the index can be searched for and matched to the first consonant of each syllable. See Figures 11-8.

If you find that a phrase that matches the input no longer exists in the index, you can treat the input as full code and present it to the user. This is similar to the parallel input method with the simple index on the word without the simple code on the premise that the user inputs only the syllable-based initial code value. In this method, however, the system detects the moment when the input value violates the full code generation rule in the full-priority parallel input method or the input value violates the language restriction in the full-priority parallel input method. The only difference is the procedure for retrieving a phrase corresponding to an input value. That is, when the system violates the full code generation rule or violates the language restriction, the system considers the input value as not the full code, but uses the point that the input value is the syllable-based initial code without using the simple code. To interpret (or search) the phrase corresponding to and to provide the user.

The core content of the parallel input method is that the system automatically detects the moment of violating the full code generation rule or the language limitation, and regards the input value as a simple code (that is, the user inputs a shortcut instead of the full input). In the end, the parallel input method is modified only in the special case (using syllable-based initial code) to search for a phrase corresponding to the input value.

As with the syllable-based initial code, if the simple code can be extracted automatically because of its regularity such as totally related simple code, consonant related simple code, first vowel + consonant related simple code, etc. It is possible to search the target phrase from the index by comparing the phrases of the index with the "alphabet combinations available". In FIG. 10-11, the system interprets the input value as a full code every time the input value is input, and confirms that the pinyin interpreted as the full code does not exist in the pinyin index. Thus, the target phrase can be searched by comparing the Pinyin with the "Possible Alphabet Combination" for the input value. This is shown in Fig. 11-10, which represents a part ((2)-(B) part) of Fig. 10-11 and is an example of a case where the entire correlation code is used.

17. Pool input method and parallel input method in the input system that stores the full code

It can be seen from the foregoing that it is a bit complicated to identify the correct word for the input value by the specific language restriction full input method on the specific keypad. (E.g., English input and Chinese pinyin input by the repeated selection method on the standard English keypad) As previously explained in Chinese, if the system has an index of all words to be input not only in Chinese but also in other languages, the input value Can be interpreted primarily as full code, and if it does not exist in the index, it can be interpreted as secondarily promised simple code.

For convenience, the Chinese case will be described as an example. If the system stores all Chinese pinyin (words possible in other languages) as shown in Figs. 10-14, the system recognizes the target alphabet by simply searching for a phrase that matches the input value. I can make it. If the full-priority parallel input method is applied, the system will treat the input as a simple code of the promised type when the matching full code value no longer exists in the index. In FIG. 10-14, the process of inputting "北京" can be seen as a process of interpreting and processing the input value as a full code. Only the full code is stored in the index, so the full code is interpreted by searching the index.

When applying the full input method where words can be identified without ambiguity by the language restricted input method, it is not useful to store the full code in the index. However, this can be useful if you apply an ambiguous pool input method, such as the iterative selection method, and store all the indexes of the phrase you want to enter. As described earlier in “Language Input Methods in Incomplete Consonant Separation Keypads”, if all the words you want to enter are stored in the index when you apply the full input method that may cause ambiguity (even in Chinese as well as other languages). This full code index can be used to process input values.

Although the example of Chinese has been described above, it is obvious that it can be applied to cases other than Chinese. The same may also be applied to the keypad of Fig. 1-1 as well as the keypad of Fig. 10- * and other keypads.

18. Parallel input method that processes input values into different types of codes (input values) at the same time

A parallel input method is possible in which certain types of codes (input values) are processed with respect to the input values. For example, in FIG. 10-14, if the input value is treated as a full code (A) and a totally associated simple code (B) at the same time, the system interprets the input value "1 * #" as a full code. Recognize "bei" when interpreted as "bai" and totally associated simple code. In this case, the system can provide "bai" and "bei" to the user at the same time.

In the case of the full-priority parallel input method, the difference is that only "bei" is output when interpreted as a full code, and in the case of the short-priority parallel input method, only "ba i" which is the result of the interpretation as a promised short code is different. In this parallel input method, when the input value is no longer present in a specific type of code, the input value can be regarded as another type of code and processed, and thus it is included in the category of the parallel input method mentioned above. Will be. The system index does not necessarily have to store the full code and the full associative simple code as shown in Figs. 10-14, but the same applies to the case where the input values are interpreted as various types of codes at the same time.

19. Priorities of words with ambiguity

In any one input method (e.g., a specific full input method or a specific type of short input method), when ambiguity occurs for the same input value, a specific input method is applied as shown in FIGS. 10-14 and other drawings. Target phrases may be output in the order based on the priority order when time ambiguity occurs. For example, when ambiguity occurs when the full input method is applied in FIGS. 10-14, the target phrase may be output and recommended to the user according to "(A) priority" which is the priority between the full codes (A). have.

Next, a case in which an input value is interpreted as predetermined various types of codes will be described. As illustrated above, when the input value "1 * #" is interpreted as a full code in FIG. 10-14, it is "bai", and when it is interpreted as a total correlation simple code, it is "bei". When ambiguity arises, the system attempts to target the target phrase by priority when interpreting it as a full code (A) in Figure 10-14 and a totally simple simple code (B) in Figure 10-14. Can be provided to the user.

For example, an input value is treated as a full code primarily, but it is found to violate the full code generation rule, violate the syllable generation rule of a specific language, or confirm that there is no longer a full code corresponding to the index. In the parallel input method that treats input values as syllable-based initial codes and syllable-based initial values simple codes, when processing input values as short codes, "syllable-based initial codes" and "syllable-based initials" Ambiguity between "value simple codes" can be handled based on priorities when they occur. (I.e., if the syllable-based initial code is (C) and the syllable-based initial value simple code is (D), outputting the target phrase by "(C) + (D) priority")

Although Chinese is described as an example, it is obvious that the same applies to other languages if the target word is pinyin rather than inputting Chinese characters.

20. Parallel input method using the control processing method as a full input method

2-1 and 2-2, when the control buttons to the [*] and [#] button and the control processing method other than the representative alphabet is applied, the parallel input method is applied, but the word consisting of only the representative alphabet in the index If all the data is saved and the short-priority parallel input method is applied, the system can treat the input value as a full code as soon as "*" or "#" is pressed as the input value.

In the Japanese of FIGS. 2-1 and 2-2, it is assumed that all shortcodes consist of numeric values only. In this case, an index (which may be included in the short code index or may be configured separately from the short code index) that stores all words consisting of only representative alphabets is applied, and the parallel input method is applied. While Bay is still pressed, both the result of interpreting the input value as a full code and the result of interpreting it as a short code by referring to the index (or simple code index containing it) consisting of only representative alphabets are given a predetermined priority. By the target phrase can be provided to the user.

For example, when the input values “111” are processed as full codes in the input values FIGS. 2-1 and 2-2 (that is, when the full priority parallel input method is applied), it is interpreted as “あ あ あ”. If there is no word starting with “あ あ ~” by referring to the index of all the letters of the alphabet, and only “あ い” or “あ い ~” exists, replace “あ い” or “あ い ~” with “あ あ ~”. Priority can be provided to the user.

See FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16. In FIG. 10-15, the input value “11” is interpreted as a full code, but since this is a word composed only of representative alphabets, it is checked again by searching “index of all words composed only of representative alphabets”. If “あ あ”, where “11” is interpreted as a full code, exists in the index, it can be recognized as a valid word for the input value. When it is confirmed that the phrase corresponding to the input value no longer exists in the index of all words consisting only of the representative alphabet, the system interprets the input value again as a simple code and the system recognizes the corresponding “あ い”. 10-15, the system recognizes “あ い” as the highest priority with respect to the input value “11”. Depending on the input after “11”, “あ い ...” (“…” can be added with “あ い” followed by another alphabet), so the system will rank it next to “あ い”. You can also output Similarly, even if it doesn't exist in the index, the target phrase may be "あ あ", so it can also be output to the next rank of "あ い". In Figs. 10-15, the words "あ い ..." and "あ あ" in dim colors and the second and third recommendation sequences indicate that the system can output this and only outputs "あ い".

* In Figures 10-15, (1), (2), and (3) may occur sequentially, or may occur simultaneously as mentioned in the "Parallel Input Method for Recognizing Input Values as Different Types of Codes". have. Similarly, the full and simple codes in the index are only for understanding, and it is obvious that the same procedure can be performed even if the full and simple codes are not stored. Simple codes that can be interpreted regularly, such as all-association simple codes). As shown in Fig. 10-16, the case where the index and the simple code index of all the words consisting only of representative alphabets exist as one index is the same. Implementation data structures can take many forms.

The operation result of the system is similar to the parallel input method described above, but it can be regarded as applying the full priority parallel input method or the general parallel input method instead of applying the short-priority parallel input method.

This can be equally applied to all parallel input methods using the control processing method as a full input method as well as a parallel input method using the control processing method except the representative alphabet as a full input method.

21. Input of function

When entering phrases (sentences) among the functions, blanks can be called as essential functions, and deletion (cancel input) function is also required. Enter function can be solved by no input for a certain period of time after input, but it is also a necessary function. These three functions are collectively called "three basic functions" for convenience. In addition, in case of a language such as English that has a case, a case switching function is also required. Up / down / left / right movement functions can be replaced by deleting and blank functions, and up / down movement functions are not required.

Here are some examples of various functions for inputting phrases in order of essential functions. Of course, this is a reference only, not an absolute criterion and may vary slightly depending on the particular situation. If you input Chinese through English keypad, Chinese character conversion will be the most essential function. In addition, the Chinese character conversion function may be an important function in Chinese character culture languages such as Japanese or Korean.

1. Space-Enter-Delete-Change case-Change national / numeric / English mode-Move (up / down / left / right)

2. Space-Delete-Enter-Local / Numeric / English Mode Switch-Case Change-Move (Up / Down / Left / Right)

3. Space-Enter-Delete-Hanja conversion-National language / number / English conversion-Move (up / down / left / right)

4. Chinese Character Conversion-Blank-Enter-Delete-English / Number Mode Switch-Move

17.1 Function Input by Control Processing Method

It was explained that the alphabet and various symbols can be selected by the control processing method. The same can be applied to selecting various functions. 12-1 is an example showing that the meaning of various functions can be given to the numeric buttons and implemented in combination with "function control". The number buttons associated with each button can be assigned to make it easier to remember. In FIG. 12-1, the left and right up and down arrows can be intuitively recognized, and placing an enter in the center can also be used to easily understand the number buttons and related functions. The remaining necessary functions can also be facilitated by associating with the buttons in which the alphabets associated with the names of the functions in each language are arranged. In Fig. 12-1, the shift function is associated with the [7] button to which "S" is assigned.

For convenience, in FIG. 12-1, as shown in the case of Korean for the filing application, assuming that the sound control and the sound control are selected according to the number of times of pressing the [*] button, the function control is selected next, Enter = [5] + { Function} = [5] + [*] + [*] + [*]. If the alphabet selected by the [5] button 1 is an alphabet without a beep / beep, it may be assumed that the enter was entered when [5] + [*] was pressed using the skip control operation.

The function associated with each button may or may not be displayed on the number buttons. However, it is pointed out that by displaying a number button associated with a group of various symbols on a part of the LCD screen so that it can be easily understood, it is possible to add convenience of use while maintaining a simple arrangement without displaying on the button. The same can be applied here. See Figure 12-2. You can also allow the user to redefine the function associated with the numeric button as indicated by symbol input.

When the [*] or [#] button is not used as another control button, as in the case of English, “*” button 1 can be used to select “function control”. Press the [*] button once to enter the function.

17.2 Input of functions by multidimensional cross control processing method (using cross combination of control buttons)

One control button is used to input one alphabet. The same is true if the same control button is used repeatedly.

When [*] and [#] are used as control buttons, and alphabets and various symbols are input as the one-dimensional control processing method, the cross combination of control buttons (in this case, [*] + [#], [#] + [ *]) Can be used to input various functions. If the control buttons are not used repeatedly, you can use [*] + [*] or [#] + [#] to enter the function. “[*] + [#]” Is from left to right, so it can be easily recognized by the user when it is used as a right movement function (or blank). Conversely, [#] + [*] can be easily recognized by the user when used as a left-to-right movement (or deletion).

This can be understood in terms of multidimensional intersection control processing. In case of inputting ^ a = a + [*] by applying the control after input as an example, if the user inputs “a + [*] + [#]”, the system inputs up to a + [*]. ^ a is recognized as input, but the next [#] cannot be followed (even if the [#] button is used as another control button), so the moment [#] is entered, the system will display “[*] + [ #] ”Can be recognized as the right shift function. It is similar to the case of specifying the control line input.

In the case of Japanese, the two-dimensional control processing method is applied. In this case, the function can be implemented by combining control buttons three times (or more). For example, enter space = [*] + [#] + [*], delete = [#] + [*] + [#]. In the case of the blank function, the shape formed when [*] + [#] + [*] is pressed is like the arrowhead of the right arrow. In the case of deletion, it can be easily remembered when you press [#] + [*] + [#] to remind you of the arrowhead of the left arrow. The reason for this is the same as described earlier.

In summary, it can be seen that various functions can be input by combining control buttons twice in the case of applying the one-dimensional control processing method, and combining the control buttons three times in the case of applying the two-dimensional control processing method. have. In other words, when the N-dimensional control processing method is applied for input of alphabets and various symbols, various functions can be input by alternately combining N + 1 control buttons.

22. Chinese character conversion

Korean and Chinese Pinyin and Chinese characters have a 1: multi correspondence. For example, the Chinese characters corresponding to "Politeness" are used in the following manners: 禮 意, 禮 儀, 銳意. There will be many like this.

In the case of Chinese, Chinese characters corresponding to “beijing” also have 北京 and 背景 (unless there is an adult sign). Therefore, it is possible to press the Chinese character conversion button repeatedly to select subsequent Chinese characters (eg 北京 (2nd), 背景 (3rd)). For example, if you enter the etiquette beijing and press the Hanja conversion function once, it becomes Beijing and if you press it again, it becomes 背景. Or you can choose from a list.

In the case of Chinese, all Chinese characters (called “Target Chinese Characters”) that you want to input must be stored in the index in order to enter Chinese characters. Can be provided to For example, “beij… If the word starting with "is only" 北京 ", the user can provide" 北京 "to the user when the user enters" beij ". If there is only one "beijing (北京)" in the Pinyin index, the system will convert "beijing" to "北京" as soon as "beijing" is fully recognized even if the user does not confirm the target Chinese character in the middle of the input. You can print it out.

In the case of Japanese, hiragana and katakana have a 1: 1 correspondence, and hiragana or katakana and kanji have a 1: multi relationship. Accordingly, it has been described that it is possible to convert Katakana by inputting Katakana conversion control (eg, “a / a” control in FIG. 2-1) after inputting hiragana. If in Figure 2-1 the modified alphabet is entered by the cross-control processing method, the "ah / ah" control can be selected by the [0] button two. Here again, Chinese characters corresponding to a specific hiragana or katakana can be selected by repeatedly pressing the [0] button. For example, if the “A / A” control is specified as post-input, press [0] + [0] after entering the hiragana word (or alphabet) to convert it to the katakana corresponding to the hiragana typed in. Press the button to switch to the first Chinese character, and press the button again to switch to the next Chinese character. Conversely, in Katakana input mode, pressing [0] + [0] after inputting Katakana converts to the corresponding Hiragana, and pressing [0] button once again converts to Chinese characters.

23. Constructing a simple code index

Among the simple codes presented by the applicant, all related simple codes, syllable based initial codes, consonant related simple codes, first vowels + consonant related simple codes, and word based initial codes are mechanically (ie, automatically) specific phrases (words or phrases). There is a good property to extract simple code from. Therefore, a simple code index (index consisting of simple codes and simple code corresponding phrases) can be automatically constructed with respect to a word once entered by the user using the full input method, and this can be used for a parallel input method. The simple code may be stored on the client side or the server side in an environment similar to that of Fig. 5-5, or may be stored on both the client side and the server side.

It is also possible to generate different kinds of simple chords (eg totally related simple chords and syllable quasi-initial chords) for the same phrase. In general, however, it will be convenient to use a simple code of a specific type, and the user only needs to be aware of the type of simple code that is automatically generated and can be used when applying the parallel input method. Applying this, the more the user's character input has the effect that the simple code index is richer.

In order to extract syllable-based initial codes from specific phrases of a specific language, it is necessary to separate syllables from specific words. Separation of syllables from certain words of a particular language is possible according to the rules of consonant separation. Since each language has a convex rule, it is not difficult to automatically separate syllables from a specific word by using them.

For example, in the case of "Zhongguo" in Chinese Pinyin, syllables can be divided into "Zhong" and "guo" around the vowels "o" and "uo", which is more than the process of recognizing the Pinyin in the present invention. It can be done much easier. In the example of separating the syllables by forward scanning from the beginning of the word, the consonant "n" after "zho" is not known as the consonant of the next syllable, but the consonant "g" shows the consonant belonging to the first syllable. Similarly, "g" may be the consonant of the next syllable, but the next "g" shows that the first "g" is the consonant of the first syllable and the second "g" is the consonant of the next syllable. . (A syllable may end in "~ ng" in the Pinyin.) The first syllable "zhong" can be separated by scanning up to "zhongg". Next, "u" is naturally a vowel forming the second syllable, and the system recognizes that the vowel "o" coming out is also a vowel forming the second syllable. (In the pinyin, the English vowel "uo" can occur consecutively.) Since the alphabet after "o" is no longer present, the system can separate the syllables of "zhongguo" into "zhong" and "guo", so It can be recognized that the initial value of the clause is "zg", and that the initial syllable initial code of "zhongguo" is "43" (based on Fig. 10-6). Of course, the rest of the languages can automatically separate syllables from specific words or phrases according to the syllable separation rules of the language.

24. Analysis of target phrases from phrases without special symbols

In the case of beijing, if the vowel is not attached to the vowel, it corresponds to both “北京” or “背景”. In this case, pressing a specific button repeatedly allows the user to select a target phrase or to select one of them from the list. It was said.

Similarly, in languages other than Chinese, if the user inputs a vowel or a vowel with a subscript, but inputs only a basic vowel, the user can search the index by providing a target phrase to the user in response to repeated pressing of a specific button, or search the index. You can then provide the user with a list of matching phrases that include a subscripted collection so that the user can make a selection.

This may be useful in languages with many variations of the alphabet, such as Vietnamese, and complex tonal signs. However, the system should be equipped with the index of the phrase consisting of subscripts attached to the basic alphabet. Similarly, building such an index can also be built from words that the user has already entered. For example, if a user enters the word “^ + abc” (with the subscript '^' on the 'a') through character input, the system stores the system “^ + abc” (the “ abc ”and“ abc ”may be stored in both). If user presses a certain button after inputting“ abc ”,“ ^ + abc ”is provided to the user or“ abc ” You can provide the user with a list of phrases corresponding to “abc”, such as “^ + abc”. If "abc" is the target phrase, the user will not press a particular button or will choose "abc" even if the system provides a list of related phrases. The point in time when the list is provided may be the point at which the entry of words is terminated or any point in the middle of the entry.

25. A parallel input method in which a part of a phrase (word or phrase) is entered as a full input method and a part is input as a short input method.

According to the word input (full code input), a method of outputting a word matching an input content from an index and allowing a user to select it has been widely used. For example, think of the "autocomplete" feature of Windows. In the case of full input (input by full code), the index (e.g. index for parallel input) is referred to to output the matching phrase among the phrases (words or phrases) stored in the index and to be selected / confirmed by the user. Of course it can.

This will be described with reference to the input system of FIGS. 4-5 to 4-8 as follows. For example, suppose the words "Thank you" and "Thank you" are stored in the index. If "10 * = high" is entered, the system will match words "high ..." (that is, words that begin with "high", "thank you", "thank you", ...) in the proper form. You can print it out. In a mobile phone-like environment, the contents generated by the input values are displayed on the input line (top of the liquid crystal in FIG. 13-1), and candidate phrases (words or phrases) printed by referring to the index are similar to the list or the list at the bottom. It can be output in the form. The user can select and enter a desired word using a navigation button (navigation button). See Figure 13-1 for an example of a cell phone liquid crystal. FIG. 13-1 illustrates an example of outputting a word corresponding to a syllable formed according to a full input at the bottom of the liquid crystal.

If you input “thank you”, you can enter up to “high” and then input the remaining syllables as short-cut input (short-cut using syllable-based initial value simple code in this example). That is to say, “Go + ㅁㅅㄴㄷ = 10 * + 5723”. Here, the first syllable is “high” and the remaining syllables may provide the user with a word whose initial value corresponds to “ㅁㅅㄴㄷ” (ie, “thank you”).

However, about half of the syllables in Korean are syllables with finality and the other half are syllables without finality. In the case of “Thank you”, if you input “1 * 05723” consecutively, it will be “bear”. The system will process “bear” = 1 * 057 ”as normal full input and enter“ 2 ”as soon as it is input. Recognizing that a part of the value does not form a normal Korean syllable, the part that does not form the remaining syllables (eg “ㅅㄴ c = 723”) can be treated as a shorthand input. This also belongs to the category of "Parallel Input Method (Priority-Priority Input Method)" mentioned in the previous application, and the syllables recognized by the full input (eg, "bear") are naturally interpreted as full codes. Input values (eg “ㅅ ㄴㄷ = 723”) are interpreted as simple codes.

Here you can find and provide matching words in the index (e.g., if the index is stored in the index), including syllables pre-formed by full input, or correspond to the inputs you interpret as simple codes. You can provide a word (for example, if "is" is stored in the index), or you can print both. When outputting both, specific words are defined by a set promise (e.g., a word containing a part that is interpreted as a full code first or vice versa, or based on the priority of a word or over a group of words). Can be output to the top. Since various means are possible, it would be desirable to allow the user to set this output order.

If you print both, “Bear” and “Bee” are displayed at the bottom of the LCD. When the user selects “Bear”, the entire “Bear” is “ It will be replaced with "Issue", and if "Yes" is selected, it is natural that the corresponding "sb" will be replaced with "Yes."

If only “thank you” is stored in the index, you will not be able to output “thank you” in response to a continuous input of the input value “1 * 05723”. Thus, the system can additionally interpret "1 * 05723" as "bear" and "go", which can be interpreted at the same time, and output (provide the user) a matching word by referring to the index. Interpretation of “bear” as “high” means that if the syllable before “s” ends with a final consonant, which is recognized as the beginning of the abbreviation, except the first consonant (ie, “high”), the final consonant In a single consonant between "high" and "ㅅ". It may seem a bit complicated, but it is easy for anyone with basic knowledge of Hangul processing. The same applies to the case where double consonants are used as the finality. Figure 13-2 shows a group of words (s) of a particular group designated as prioritizing the output of &quot;-word (s) including part interpreted as full code-words not including part interpreted as full code ( S)-. . Show the example of outputting candidate words by applying the order of. In this case, "is" is printed first, and belonged to the designated group.

If you want to be interpreted as “high” only, enter “10 * = high” and then use the promised operation to give a syllable confirmation (eg no appointment for a certain time, or press the right arrow [>] button once). Etc.), by pressing “5723”, only the word corresponding to “go” can be searched. In this case, it is also possible to output a word corresponding to “Go” (including “thank you”), including the pre-recognized syllable “Go”. (E.g. if "yes" is stored in the index), or both. See Figure 13-3.

Here, pressing the right arrow button (hereinafter referred to as “[>] button”) as an operation button for intentional syllable confirmation may act as syllable confirmation. In addition, the [>] button can be used as a blank button. After the syllable is confirmed, it can act as a blank input. In other words, if the [>] button is pressed once after entering the “high”, the syllable “high” is confirmed, and if the [>] button is pressed again, it becomes “high” (“high” + blank). In other words, if "10 *> 5723" is input, the system can interpret it as "go" and provide the user with the corresponding word "thank you". Of course, if the system refers to the example index, it is obvious that the system can output "thank you" even if only "10 *> 57 = thank you".

In such a parallel input method, the processing including the syllables formed by the full input will be useful when the target word is determined from the list of candidate words when a candidate word matching the middle of the full input is provided. In addition, when outputting a subword only corresponding to an input value (that is, an input value interpreted as a simple code) except for pre-formed syllables (ie, an input value interpreted as a simple code), a frequently used suffix or a word search is input as a short input. Will be useful. For example, enter "thank you" (confirm the entry with a certain number of steps), and then enter "Yes" (assuming it is stored in the index). Frequently used suffixes such as “...” can be placed in a separate group (eg, a suffix group) in the index so that the words of the group will be preferentially outputted when candidate words are output in parallel input. If you enter “thank you”, both “thank you” and “you” may appear in the candidate word list if both “thank you” and “you” are stored in the index.

One more example, when entering “Sejong o = 70 ## 90 * 838”, “Sejong” can be treated as a full input, and “38” that does not form an appropriate syllable can be treated as a shorthand input value. Likewise, if there is only “Sejong the Great” in the index, “Sejong the Great” will be printed. Conversely, if there is only "great king" in the index, only "great king" will be printed. If both "Sejong the Great" and "Great King" are present, they may all be printed, but it would be desirable to have only one output (with or without the part processed by full input) by appointment. Also, in the case of "Moonmu King", if you input the full input to "Mummu" and then enter "ㄷㅇ" in succession, it will be "Moonmun". Therefore, to input “Mountain” by full input, and to input only “Great King” by short-cutting input, after inputting “Mountain”, confirm the input syllable “Thumbs” (eg right arrow [>] button to give the end of syllable). Press once to confirm), and then enter “38 = ㄷㅇ”. Here, even though “Great King” has a lower priority than other words in the index (eg “Tawa”) that correspond to “ㄷ ㅇ = 38”, the input value “5 * 025 * 0 is stored in the index if“ Two Kings ”is stored in the index. > 38 ”may be used to output“ great king ”over other postwords (eg“ Tawa ”).

In addition, when inputting by short input, such as “ac.c = 157 * 623” and inputting some syllables by full input, the corresponding “thank you” can be processed. If “157 = ㄱㅁㅅ” is entered, the system interprets the simple code (in the example, syllable-based initial value simple code or syllable-based initial code) “157” and searches for a word with each syllable corresponding to “ㄱㅁㅅ”. If “* 6” is input again, the system can recognize that the syllable “7 * 6 = wet” is formed as “157 * 6 = a. That is, if the system recognizes that the previously input “15” is a shortened input value and “23” is input again, it can be treated as a shortened input value because an appropriate syllable is not formed. In this case too, the system may interpret some syllables as full code in “a.” And some syllables as short codes, and provide the corresponding “thank you” to the user.

In Chinese, a syllable is said to be composed of "Our Lady + Mica". In Chinese Pinyin, “Mary” is the consonant of the Roman alphabet, and “Mica” is the vowel or “vowel + n” or “vowel + ng” of the Roman alphabet. In other words, one Chinese character (one syllable) written in Pinyin is composed of Roman alphabet “consonants + vowels” or “consonants + vowels + n” or “consonants + vowels + ng”. Rarely, there may be syllables beginning with the vowel “a”, “e”, or “o”. Here we have already pointed out that the Roman alphabet consonants that can come to the end of the Pinyin syllable are only “n” or “ng”. This can be regarded as the finality of Korean. Only consonant “n” or “ng” can be used as a final consonant.

For example, in Pinyin Index, “中華 (zhonghua)”, “民國 (minguo)”, “中華民國 (zhonghuaminguo)”,. . . Suppose a word such as is stored, input pinyin by full input to "中華 (zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## *, based on Fig. 10-6)", and input only "民國 (minguo)" For example, enter "mg = 73 (refer to Fig. 10-6)" as a shortcut input using a syllable-based initial value simple code as a shortcut input. After inputting the Pinyin (“zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## *”) at the input of “中華”, “mg = 73” may be entered after the process of selecting and confirming among the candidates listed above is mediated. After entering “zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## *”, “mg = 73” may be entered continuously. In the former case, “mingo”, 民歌 (minge), corresponding to “73 = mg”. . . It is natural to output only words such as the candidate words. In the latter case, it is interpreted as “中華” for the input value “49 *** 7739 ## *” and outputs “中華民國” along with “民國” corresponding to “73” recognized as an abbreviated input value. It is also natural. For input up to “49 *** 7739 ## * 73 = zhonghua + mg” for input up to “49 *** 7739 ## * 7”, the last “7” is the input of Pinyin and normal full input The system recognizes this, but as soon as the last "3" is input, the system recognizes that the last two input values "73" are shortened input values. This is the same as in the case of Korean described above. Therefore, the system is able to change the input value “49 *** 7739 ## * 73” to “中華”, which corresponds to the full input value “49 *** 7739 ## *”, and to “73”, which corresponds to the short input value, “73”. It is possible to print the word “中華民國”, which is composed of “”. See Figures 13-4.

On the contrary, input “中華” as “zh = 49” by short-cutting, and do not select “中華” among candidate words. Instead, input “民國” as full input “7 # 773 ## ***”. When inputted (ie, “497 # 773 ## *** = zhminguo”), “中華民國” corresponding to “z__h__minguo” can be output. Likewise, if you input “73 ## ***” to input “民國 (minguo)”, you can output “民國” by interpreting “73 ## *** = mguo = m__guo”. As soon as "73" is pressed, the system considers the short input and searches for and processes the word corresponding to "m__g__", but treats the following "## *** = uo" as the second syllable vowel. . Entering “uo” followed by “mg” compresses “民國” among candidate words corresponding to “m__g__”.

Input the Chinese character “Chinese” by other means (shortcut input, full input, stroke input, etc.) and then input “Korea” as “73” by abbreviated input. If you interpret “73” as a simple code and provide the user with a word corresponding to “m__g__”, a number of candidate words (eg, “民國 (minguo)”, 民歌 (minge),. Will be output in the form However, if “中華民國” is stored, it is possible to interpret “中華民國” as “中華民國”, apart from that “民國” is stored in the index. In this case, “中華” has already been entered as a single letter, so “民國” is output in preference to other candidate words (eg “民歌 (minge),...) In response to the input value“ mg = 73 ”. can do.

When “zhong ...” is entered here, the system may be interpreted as “zho” + “n__g__” or “zhon” + ”g__”. However, since there are no syllables consisting of “zho” or “zhon” in Chinese Pinyin (that is, of course, none in Pinyin index), “zhong ...” is interpreted as “中” by referring to the index. If it exists, when "zhong" is inputted, it can be outputted as a candidate word in a predetermined output order. With respect to the input of “zhongg ... = 49 *** 7733” based on Figs. 10-6, it may be interpreted as “zhonk ..” = “zho” + “n__k__” or “zhon” + “k__”. There will be. This is similar to the parallel input method in which input values are interpreted simultaneously as full codes and short input values (simple codes).

In the above example, an example of using a syllable-based initial value simple code as a shortcut input value (simple code) has been presented. However, when "syllable-based initial code" is applied as a shortcut input value, FIG. 3 to 11-11 can be applied.

26. Character input method using long press and control processing method using long press

In general, you can press one button once to cover an alphabet (eg alphabet, number, English) in a language that is not your first language, including English alphabets, symbols (special characters), functions, and controls for various purposes. ). Here, you can press a specific button once but use "long press" to express an object different from the object by simply pressing once. In the following, pressing and holding a certain button is referred to as "long press" or "long hit". In the following description, "long press" does not mean a normal button press, and in particular, in contrast to a long press is referred to as "danta". In the following, the general content will be described in the case of English, and application examples will be described for each language. However, it is obvious that the content described in one language can be equally applied to other languages.

26.1 English (and Common)

26.1.1 Long press alphabet input

Currently, pressing and holding a specific number button is used to enter that number. However, it is not always possible to input numbers only. For example, pressing each number button once in Fig. 1-1 inputs the first alphabet among the letters assigned to the corresponding button (ex. “A” by pressing the [2] button 1 time). A), by pressing and holding the second letter (eg “B”) can be entered. Short presses interrupt the natural flow of the input, so it is not desirable to apply it to the input of the alphabet that is frequently input. Therefore, it is desirable to apply the input by long press (long stroke) to input an object which is not frequently used. In addition, it would be desirable to allow the user to set the time recognized as long press as long as possible according to each user's skill.

In the present invention, a long press is appropriately used, but through this, it is shown that the input rule of a specific input method can be simplified, the range of expression can be broadened, and further ambiguity can be removed. For convenience, press and hold the [2] button for “2” followed by a tilde (~) to indicate “2 ~”. As mentioned above, if the [2] button is pressed three times in Fig. 1-1 when applying the existing repetition selection method, it is possible to know whether “222” is “C”, “AAA”, “AB” or “BA”. Unambiguous ambiguity occurs.

In Figure 1-1, "A" presses the [2] button long or presses the corresponding button once, "B" presses the corresponding button once after entering "A", and "C" presses the corresponding button once after entering the "B" (or For example, define “A” and press twice.) If alphabets in the same button are entered continuously, in the second and subsequent alphabet inputs, if you start with a long press, you can also enter without ambiguity. For example, when entering “DACB”, you can enter “3 2 2 ~ 22 2 ~ 2” without ambiguity, and “ACB” on the same button is displayed continuously, but when you enter “C”, “B” long press By being mediated, they can be identified without ambiguity. This case can be entered with a feeling almost similar to the existing repetitive selection method, and only when the alphabet assigned to the same button is continuously input, the long press can be used to remove ambiguity. Of course, in the case of “DACB = 322 ~ 222 ~ 2”, it is also possible to press and hold the [2] button on the “A” input (ie “2 ~”).

The above example uses a representative alphabet of any of the alphabets assigned to a particular button (including both explicit and implicit assignments) (e.g. "A"), followed by an alphabet (e.g. "B"). , “C”) can be regarded as a subsequent alphabet inputting a button assigned a representative alphabet and a subsequent alphabet by pressing a predetermined number of times. In other words, “A (represented alphabet)-B (2nd follow-up alphabet)-C (3rd follow-up alphabet)”, “A = 2 ~”, “B = A + 2 =“ 2 ~ 2 ”, “C = B + 2 = A + 2 + 2 = 2 ~ 22”. It is also possible to input “A” as a normal press (ie, a single stroke) instead of a long press, unless the alphabet assigned to the same button is inputted consecutively. As in the selection method, it is also possible to input with a normal single press (ie, single stroke). For convenience, this is referred to as "repetitive selection method by long pressing the representative alphabet".

If you enter only two alphabets using a single button, you can define one alphabet as a normal single press (i.e. single) and another alphabet as a long press (i.e. long). (E.g., “B = 1”, “P = 1 ~” in Fig. 10-1) However, as shown in Fig. 1-1, three alphabets are assigned per button (explicitly or implicitly). (E.g. [2] button), define the first alphabet as one press (eg “A = 2”, define the second alphabet as long press (eg “B = 2 ~”, 3rd alphabet) Pressing twice (eg “C = 22”) or long press and once (eg “C = 2 ~ 2”) also results in ambiguity when entering the third alphabet. In this case, it can be interpreted as “AA”, and if it is defined as “C = 2 ~ 2,” it can also be interpreted as “BA.” In this case, the first, second, 3 alphabets may optionally be set. In this case also the ambiguity of times that can occur more than usually simple repeat selection method is greatly reduced.

The advantage of the repeated selection method using long press can be more useful when inputting not only the alphabet assigned to each button, but also the numbers and symbols associated with each button. For example, any “button x” has a specific alphabet (s) “A1, A2, A3, ...” associated with it (either explicitly or implicitly), and the specific number “N1” Assume that the specific symbol (s) "S1, S2, S3, ..." are related. In this case, it may be defined as a long press on an arbitrary alphabet associated with “button x”. For example, the alphabet "A1" is designated as the representative alphabet, and the long press "button x" is inputted. Inputting "A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3" associated with "Button x" in graph form is shown in Figure 14-3. In FIG. 14-3, it can be seen that “A1S1 = xx ~ xxxx” or “A1S1 = x ~ x ~ xxxx” is input. If the language is not English as a native language, the English alphabets “E1, E2, E3, ...” may be additionally associated.

Furthermore, in entering objects related to "button x" (eg, "A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3"), it is not a repetitive selection method by long pressing a representative alphabet, but a normal repetition selection. By applying the method, it is also possible to enter the associated numbers and various symbols (special characters). However, ambiguity occurs when you enter objects that are related to the same button consecutively. Therefore, after entering a single object, enter “Delayed fixed time delay” or sphere (eg “Complementary input method in parallel”). It is necessary to ensure that ambiguity does not occur by the input of the [>] button once described). For example, if “A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3” is related to “Button x” and “S1A1” is entered by repeat selection method, enter “S1A1 = xxxxx> x”. Can be. This is a technique used to overcome ambiguity in applying the iterative selection method, except that a specific number and symbol group can be inputted to a specific button.

Currently, if there is a national language alphabet “A1, A2, A3” associated with (assigned) “button x”, it will be “x = A”, “xx = B”, “xxx = C”, or defined maximum repetition If it was pressed more than the number of presses (ex. “Button x” pressed four times), it was a circular toggle such as “xxxx = A” and “xxxxx = B”. The circular toggle seems to be a consideration that allows the user to input the target alphabet again by repeatedly pressing the button that was pressed when an input error occurred when the repeated selection method was applied. However, as suggested by the applicant, if the input of the delete button is to delete the "recent input value" instead of deleting the entire alphabet generated, it is not necessary to apply the cyclic toggle method. You should only press “xx = B” because if you enter “xxx = C”, you can enter “B” by pressing the Delete button once, even if you do not press “xx” to enter “B”. .

14-4 shows a process of inputting an alphabet by a long press after a short press of a specific button. In Fig. 14-4, the lines A1, A2, A3, ... are input processes by the conventional repetition selection method. In B2, A1 is inputted by a short press of a button (eg, button “x”), and then a long press of the same button is combined. That is, “A1 = x” and “B2 = xx ~”. If no alphabet input is defined by the long press of the button x, and if only the letters A1 and B2 are input using the button x, it can be recognized without ambiguity. Even if the long press of the button x is defined as a certain alphabet (eg, the letter E1), this language restriction (Language restriction where A1 and E2 do not occur at the same time) is prevented unless "A1" and "E1" appear at the same time. A1, B2, E1 can be entered without ambiguity.

Again, in FIG. 14-4, if the long press of “button x” is not defined as any alphabetic input, A1, B2, C3 can be recognized without ambiguity. In the case of A1, A2, and D3, there may be ambiguity as “A1 = x”, “A2 = xx = A1A1”, but if A1 does not occur in a language, these language restrictions (A1 do not occur in succession) Language restrictions), allowing A1, A2, and D3 to be entered without ambiguity. The method as in Fig. 14-4 is called "repetitive selection method by long pressing after short pressing" for convenience. For example, in Figure 10-6, enter "i = #", "u = # ~", and use the "## ~" as an arbitrary vowel (eg " ^.. u"-"u" to subscript “ Alpha bets with “…” can be entered without ambiguity (in Chinese Pinyin, “i” and “u” do not appear consecutively). Of course, since "i" does not appear in succession, it is possible to enter any other target with "##". The same can be applied to other languages. In FIG. 14-4, it may be used to input subordinate alphabets (eg, S1, S2, S3, ...) of the A1, A2, and A3 rows.

26.1.2 Control method using long press

Next, an example of application to the selection of controls is shown. In the following example, the control is assumed to be inputted later. In the previous example, the [2] button danta and long hitting "A" is intended to give an example that can be entered with a feeling similar to the existing repeated selection method. However, a specific object may be expressed by pressing a specific button once, and another object may be expressed by long pressing the same button. For example, a single press of a particular button (eg [1] button) may indicate a particular object (eg any “alphabet x” where “x” means any alphabet, not actually “x”). Can represent a specific object (eg, an arbitrary “y”) that has a different long press. That is, "alphabet x = 1", "alphabet y = 1 ~". In this example, any of the letters “alphabet x” and “alphabet y” are conceptual, even if “A = 2 ~” or “A = 2” is defined in the “Repeat Selection Method by Long Pressing Representative Alphabet” described above. “A” by normal pressing (ie, danta) corresponds to the letter x, and “A” by long pressing corresponds to “alphabety”.

The same applies to the selection of controls. For example, any button (e.g. [*] button as a control button) can be pressed once to represent a specific object (e.g. any “control a1”), and a long press of the same button can be used to Yes, it can represent any “control b1”). "A2 control", "a3 control", ..., etc. can be selected by pressing the control button repeatedly. It is important to select “b1 control” by pressing and holding down the control button, and then press “b2 control”, “b3 control”, “b4 control”, ... and so on by repeatedly pressing instead of long pressing. will be. Again, no ambiguity occurs. This can be referred to the case in which only the representative alphabet "A" in the previous example is entered by pressing and holding, and in the subsequent subsequent alphabet selection, the single stroke is combined.

For convenience, the object to be inputted by the combination of a specific button (eg [1] button) and the "b1 control" is displayed as "B1".

“A1 = x + {a1 control} = 1 *”, “A2 = x + {a2 control} = 1 **”, “A3 = x + {a3 control} = 1 ***”,. . . ,

“B1 = x + {b1 control} = 1 * ~”, “B2 = x + {b2 control} = 1 * ~ *”, “B3 = x + {b3 control} = 1 * ~ **”,. . .

Of course, it is also possible to apply one hit, two hits and three hits respectively to the selection of the b1, b2 and b3 controls. However, it is not surprising that it is not a good idea to use long presses frequently. As in the case of B1, B2, B3, ... After pressing the control button one time long, input by normal pressing is called “Long press after repeated press” for convenience, and this control method “After long press Control method by repeated pressing ”. A1, A2, ... series means the control method suggested previously, and B1, B2, ... series means "control method by repeated pressing after long press." The above contents are shown in Fig. 14-1. The above is an example of extending the first control selection by one long press as in the repetitive selection method by long pressing the representative alphabet. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-2, various expansions (eg, C-series and D-series) are possible through additional long presses.

Of course, if you apply a long press of a button (for example, the [1] button) that is not a control button (eg, “alphabet”), you can express another object. Furthermore, the letters displayed on each button of the keypad (Fig. 1-1 to 3) can be selected using the long press repeatedly (eg “A = 2 ~”, “B = 2 ~ 2”, “C = 2 ~ 22”). Alphabets) can be identified without ambiguity, so you can enter three different alphabets by pressing the control button repeatedly, or by pressing and holding the control button repeatedly. will be. That is, in Figure 1-1, by pressing the control button repeatedly after inputting "A", it is possible to input the alphabet (meaning symbols, numbers, mother tongue, English alphabet, etc.) of a specific group (eg group 1), “Long press and repeat” allows you to enter another alphabetic group (eg group 2). Likewise, the alphabet of group 3 can be entered by a combination of “B” input and the control button repeatedly pressed, and the alpha bet of another group, group 4, can be entered by pressing and holding the button repeatedly. Fig. 1-1 In addition to the three alphabets displayed on the keypad buttons, an arbitrary rule (e.g., "2 to 222") is set, and the control group repeatedly presses a long button and then repeatedly presses a group of arbitrary groups. It is also possible to enter an alphabet.

Control method by repeated pressing after long press is the same as the case of Korean (Fig. 4-5 ~ 4-8) and the case of Japanese (Fig. 2-1, 2-2), etc. In case of input, it may be very useful for input of intermittent numbers among sentences and input of English alphabet (in languages other than English). In the following, application examples are briefly mentioned for each language and may be applied to other languages not mentioned.

26.2 English

In the examples of FIGS. 4-5 to 4-8, the modified alphabet (eg lattice / light consonants and dropped consonants) is inputted by repeatedly pressing the button to which the basic consonants belong (eg “a = 1”, “ㄲ =”). 11 ”,“ ㅋ = 111 ”or“ ㄱ = 1 ”,“ ㅋ = 11 ”,“ ㄲ = 111 ”) may be similarly applied. In other words, when alphabets belonging to the same button appear consecutively, the alphabetical letters appearing after the second time are inputted by a long press. For example, if the continuous press of the [1] button is defined as “ㅋ” in FIG. 4-5, when “a” is continuously displayed, it may be recognized as “ㅋ” rather than “a + a”. If you input long press on “a”, it can be recognized as “a + a”. In other words, long press is used to input “a” of the second syllable in “country”. Even when entering “Kukka”, enter “ㅋ = 1 ~ 1” using long press on “ㅋ” input of the second syllable. This can be applied optionally by inputting the variant alphabet by a control method (either one or both at the same time).

An example of inputting some alphabets that are not representative alphabets in a long press can be entered by pressing and holding one of the lattice sounds or the hard consonants. For example, when the lattice sound is defined as long pressing, the hard consonant (double consonant) can be input by combining the basic consonant. Of course, as mentioned in the earlier filings, there is an ambiguity that, in the case of “Ottogi”, “ot” (where “c” is the final support of “oh”).

Similarly, a long press can be applied to the input of consonants assigned to vowels (eg, “ㅎ” assigned to [0] button in FIGS. 4-5 and 4-6). That is to say, "ㅎ = 0 ~". Applicant's opinion, “ㅎ = 8 **” or “ㅎ = 0 **” or “ㅎ = 0 (only in the special case presented in the application) based on Figs. It is assumed that inputting with 을 is better in input efficiency than using long press. The input method of the dropped consonant (eg “ㅎ”) and the input method by long pressing can be selectively applied.

It is said that it is possible to input a certain object by using a short press after a long press. In the drawings of FIGS. When defined as inputting a certain object, a long press of a certain button and a short press can input a series of objects associated with the specific button. The reason for this is as described above. When defined as (period) = ㅁ + ㅡ + ㅡ ”, there is no Korean character that begins with the vowel“ ㅡ ”after“ some object (period) in the Korean consonant, ”“, (comma) = ㅁ + ㅡ It can be defined as + ㅡ + ㅡ. If you have defined the long press of the [*] button (the button to which "-" is assigned) "-(hyphen)", you can define any other object (eg underscore) by pressing the long press repeatedly. . That is, "-(hyphen) = * ~" and "_ (underscore) = * ~ *". This also takes advantage of the property that Hangul vowels do not appear at the beginning of words. By using the property that the vowel element “.” Does not appear at the beginning of the Hangul, the short press of the button ([0] button in the example) assigned “.” In the “Word start state” can be used as the input of “ㅎ”. As stated above, the pressing of a vowel button in the "word start state" can be defined as the input of a specific object (eg a special character associated with the vowel button). For example, if the button assigned with "-" at the beginning of a word ([*] button in this example) is pressed, you can make it "-(hyphen)". However, there is a drawback that you cannot input the vowel “ㅡ” as a single word when you apply it. Of course, even in this case, if a certain non-consonant object (eg, “-”) is recognized as the input of the button assigned with “ㅡ”, the button assigned with “ㅡ” in succession is pressed again. It can be defined to be input of special character “_”).

Next, we present an example of applying “Control method by repeated press after long press”. Applicant's representative Korean input system is introduced on the homepage http://www.simplecode.net with simulator (introduces gore, symbol input and parallel input technology), and also inputs numbers and English alphabets. It is possible without.

The person in the industry says that there is a need to provide the input technology of numbers and English without changing the mode, so that this application is inevitably executed. (For reference, the company that made this request did not adopt the applicant's Korean input technology. It is a shame.)

The common frequency of use for input can be found in the following order: "National Alphabet-Various Symbols (Special Characters)-Number-English Alphabet". As shown in Fig. 4-5, there is no control button that can be used to input numbers and English. Here you can enter numbers in combination with the long press of the number button and the [*] button (ie “* ~ = number control”). That is, "number 1 = 1 * ~". The [*] button is primarily used as a vowel button and a control button at the same time. Pressing the [*] button once indicates the collection “ㅣ”, but pressing and holding the [*] button once is an arbitrary object (“ Number control ”).

The input of the English alphabet can be performed in various ways. For example, it can be defined as “A = 2 # ~”, “B = 2 # ~ #”, “C = 2 # ~ #”. What is not recognized as “A” and vowel “ㅣ” for input “2 # ~ #”, and what can be recognized as “B” is the absence of syllables beginning with vowel “ㅣ” in Korean. It is to use. If long press and repeat of the [#] button are used for other purposes, the English alphabet is regarded as a subsequent alphabet of numbers and “A = 2 * ~ *” or “A = 2 * ~ # (cross control processing). Method) ”can be defined as“ B = 2 * ~ ** ”or“ B = 2 * ~ ## ”.

One more example of control by long press is given. 4-5 to 4-8, inputting "TT" and "ㅠ" by repeatedly pressing the button to which the vowel "-" is assigned (that is, "ㅡ = *", "TT = **"). ”,“ ㅠ = *** ”), it takes 3 or more strokes (ie maximum possible repetitions) to press alphabetically. In this case, the sound control can be selected by pressing “Maximum Possible Repetitions + 1” times (ie, [*] button 4 times). "That is," ㅋ = 1 **** ". In this case, in order to alleviate the burden of pressing four times in a row, “beep control = * ~” can be defined as “ㅋ = a + {beep control} = 1 * ~”. This applies equally to falling consonants which are considered to be light consonants and modified alphabets. In addition, the control processing method can be applied to all cases in which the sound control is selected by the repetitive selection method, and the modified alpha input by long press and the modified alpha input by conventional repeated press are optional (only one of the quantums or Of course, both) are possible. In this case, use the other button (eg [#] button) to enter numbers.

26.3 Japanese

As in the case of Japanese of Figures 2-1 and 2-2, there are a number of subsequent alphabets, which may be useful when inputting subsequent alphabets by a repetitive selection method. In other words, it is defined as “あ = 1” or “あ = 1 ~”, “い = 1 ~ 1”, “う = 1 ~ 11”, “え = 1 ~ 111”, “お = 1 ~ 1111”. will be. As mentioned, if the alphabet assigned to the same button appears in succession, only the second letter of the alphabet assigned to the same button is entered using long press (ie, “1 to”), otherwise, simply It is entered without ambiguity even if it is entered by pressing once. However, it has already been shown in the Japanese examples of FIGS. 2-1 and 2-2 that the subsequent control processing method can be used to input without ambiguity with a small number of input strokes. have.

* Representative alphabet It shows the case of inputting the modified alphabet using long press in the case of inputting the subsequent alphabet by the control method without applying the repeated selection method by long press. When inputting the subsequent alphabet by the control processing method in Fig. 2-2, when inputting the modified alphabet (eg “ば”, “ぱ”) of the representative alphabet (eg “は”) as shown in Fig. 2-3, the input stroke You can see that there are a lot more unnatural. In this case, a long press of the corresponding button ([6] button in FIG. 2-2) may be defined as a modified alphabet of a representative alphabet (eg, “ば”). The rest of the modified alphabet “정의 = ば + predetermined control button (eg [*] button) = 6 ~ *” can be defined.

Here, if you do not input the modified alphabet using the long press of the button assigned to the alphabet, it is possible to apply the repetitive selection method by long pressing the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet input by the control processing method. The input of the modified alphabet (eg “ば”, “ぱ”) can be entered by pressing and holding the arbitrary control button (eg [*] button) and the combination of the representative alphabet “は”. . That is, it can be defined as “ば (any modified alphabet) = は + * ~ = 6 * ~” and “ぱ (any other modified alphabet) = は + * ~ * = 6 * ~ *”. If there are many variations of “Ha”, it can be entered without ambiguity by pressing long press like “6 * ~ **”, “6 * ~ ***”, ... Of course. Just as "*" and "* ~" can represent different objects, "**" and "* ~ *" can represent different objects (in this case, arbitrary controls).

It is important to note that not only is it possible to select arbitrary controls by long presses, but also by repeatedly pressing the button (eg control button) used for long presses after one long press, without any ambiguity (eg arbitrary Control).

Similarly, in the input of numbers and English alphabets, the description described in Korean can be applied. For example, you can define “number 2 = 2 # ~”, “A = 2 # ~ #”, “B = 2 # ~ ##”,. . . It can be defined as

26.4 Chinese

The keypads of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-6 show that Chinese Pinyin can be input without ambiguity (or almost without ambiguity). However, if you input “bb = 11” to shorten a word composed of “b__b__” (underscore is Pinyin syllable composed of vowels), if the language restriction applies that “bb” does not appear consecutively in Chinese Pinyin, “ 11 = p ”. In this case, as mentioned above, after inputting “b = 1”, the input value “1” is intentionally set to “b” by a predetermined time delay or a specific operation (eg, pressing the [>] button). = 1 ”. Also, it can be regarded as a problem of ambiguity caused by successive input of the alphabet assigned to the same button. In this case, too, the control processing method by pressing and holding the representative alphabet can be solved (representative alphabet “b” of button [1] to “b = 1 ~”). For example, when the letters "bb = 1 ~ 1 ~" or the letters assigned to the same button appear consecutively, you can make "bb = 11 ~" by applying a long press on the alphabet input after the second.

Next, you will see the numbers and symbols entered. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6. The input of English in Chinese is not mentioned because it is not necessary to convert it into Chinese after entering the English alphabet. Based on Figure 10-6 can be defined as "number 1 = 1 * ~". In FIG. 10-6, one press of the [*] button is recognized as “a”, but a long press (“* ~”) can represent a separate object (“number control” in the example). 10-6, it is preferable to apply a control processing method using a long press and a repeat press of the [#] button to input various symbols. For example, associate dot (.), Comma (,), colon (:), semi-colon (;), and so on with the [2] button. “Dot (.) = 2 # ~”, “comma (,) = 2 # ~ # ”,“ colon (:) = 2 # ~ ## ”, and“ semi-colon (;) = 2 # ~ ### ”. The reason that “2 # ~ #” is not recognized as “dot (.) + I” but can be recognized as “comma (,)” is because Chinese pinyin uses Chinese restrictions that do not begin with “i”. Similarly, “2 # ~ ##” can be recognized as “colon (:)” instead of “dot (.) + I + i” or “comma (,) + i”. If you want to input “dot (.) + I”, as mentioned above, after inputting up to “2 # ~”, after “dot (.)” Is confirmed for a certain time or after certain operation (eg [>] Button to confirm) and enter “# = i”.

The reason why the [*] button is not used to input the symbol (s) of a specific group in Fig. 10-6 is rare, since there is a pinyin beginning with “a”, “e”, “o”, etc. It is because ambiguity may occur when using "Repeated Press". Since there is only one number, the long press of the [*] button only requires one combination. In the case of Figs. 10-1 to 10-5, since there is no pinyin beginning with “i” and “u” assigned to the [*] button and the [#] button, a long length is obtained using the [*] button and the [#] button. After pressing, it is always possible to input numbers, symbols, etc. as a control method using repeated pressing.

Obviously, the above description can be similarly applied to other keypads as well as the keypads of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-6.

26.5 languages using roman

In the European language of the Roman alphabet, there are a number of modified alphabets with subscripts in the basic alphabet. It can be applied to input of modified alphabet and input of special character by applying various long press described above.

It has realized the most concise layout of keyboards, ambiguity, and "minimum" input strokes among Korean keypad Korean input systems.

In addition, the combination of long press of a specific button and repeated pressing of a specific button, combined with long pressing of a specific button and repeatedly pressing a control button, has been proposed to input various characters.

Claims (11)

In the alphabet input method of any language on the keypad each having one or more alphabets or a plurality of buttons assigned a control, The arbitrary language is Hindi, The three main Hindi __ (a), __ (i), and __ (u) are assigned to three different buttons, and the remaining vowels are entered as a combination of the three vowel buttons. The alphabet recognition method according to the keypad characterized in that it is recognized as an alphabet with a comma-shaped "hal" under the consonant in response to the input of the vowel __ (a) input after the consonant. The method of claim 1, Input method of vowel __ (a) generates consonant with "H" and then inputs consecutive consonants as input of compound consonants The method according to claim 1 or 2, One or more consonants are divided into predetermined groups and assigned to one or more buttons that are not assigned vowels, and are recognized by repeated pressing of each button. The method of claim 3, When an input value violates a Hindi restriction (Hindi word generation rule), an input value is regarded as a predetermined simple code, and is interpreted and processed. In the alphabet input method of any language on a keypad (or keyboard) having a plurality of buttons each assigned one or more alphabets or controls, The arbitrary language is Hindi, If the vowel key is not entered after the consonant, the vowel is recognized as "basic" rather than "abbreviated". In the alphabet input method of any language on the keypad each having one or more alphabets or a plurality of buttons assigned a control, The arbitrary language is Hindi, The basic vowel is recognized by one button assigned to a predetermined number of basic vowels, and the remaining vowels are recognized as a combination of the basic vowels, The consonant next to the input of the vowel button is to be recognized as a condensed vowel or in a state to be recognized as a condensed vowel according to a predetermined vowel combination rule, characterized in that it is recognized as a basic vowel by long press of the vowel button Alphabet recognition method by keypad The method of claim 6, The alphabet recognition method in the keypad, characterized in that the other vowels combined by pressing the other button after the long press is also recognized as a basic type The method according to any one of claims 6 to 7, The basic vowels are alphabet recognition method in the keypad, characterized in that __ (a), __ (i), __ (u) In the alphabet input method of any language on a keypad (or keyboard) having a plurality of buttons each assigned one or more alphabets or controls, The arbitrary language is Hindi, Recognition of Hindi modified alphabets (alphabet with top, bottom, half moon, etc.) is recognized by a combination of a corresponding basic alphabet input and a long press of a predetermined button. The method of claim 1, The method of alphabet recognition on a keypad characterized by the fact that the vowel __ (ri) is recognized by a combination of three presses of the vowel __ (i). The method of claim 1, Vowel in combination of 3 presses of vowel __ (a)

"Is recognized in the keypad characterized in that

Images